 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| OMC942723169 Hitachi Microcomputer H8/3032 Series Hardware Manual Preface The H8/3032 Series is a series of high-performance single-chip microcontrollers that integrate system supporting functions together with an H8/300H CPU core. The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space.* The on-chip system supporting functions include ROM, RAM, a 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), a programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, I/O ports, and other facilities. The three operating modes offer a choice of expanded mode and single-chip mode, enabling the H8/3032 Series to adapt quickly and flexibly to a variety of conditions. This manual describes the H8/3032 Series hardware. For details of the instruction set, refer to the H8/300H Programming Manual. Note: * The H8/3032 Series has a maximum address space of 1 Mbyte. Contents Section 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overview ..................................................................................................... 1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 1 Block Diagram................................................................................................................ 5 Pin Description ............................................................................................................... 6 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement............................................................................................. 6 1.3.2 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 7 Pin Functions .................................................................................................................. 10 CPU............................................................................................................... 15 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 26 26 27 28 38 39 39 39 42 46 46 47 47 49 50 50 Section 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 2.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU ....................................................................... CPU Operating Modes.................................................................................................... Address Space................................................................................................................. Register Configuration.................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 2.4.2 General Registers............................................................................................ 2.4.3 Control Registers ............................................................................................ 2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values ............................................................................ Data Formats................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats....................................................................... 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats.................................................................................... Instruction Set................................................................................................................. 2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................ 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes................................................................ 2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function ................................................ 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats ............................................................................... 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions .............................................. Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation .................................................. 2.7.1 Addressing Modes .......................................................................................... 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ........................................................................ Processing States ............................................................................................................ 2.8.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 2.8.2 Program Execution State ................................................................................ 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State............................................................................... 2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences ...................................................................... 2.8.5 Reset State ...................................................................................................... 2.8.6 Power-Down State .......................................................................................... 2.9 Basic Operational Timing............................................................................................... 2.9.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing................................................................... 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ................................................. 2.9.4 Access to External Address Space.................................................................. 51 51 51 53 54 Section 3 3.1 MCU Operating Modes........................................................................... 55 55 55 56 57 58 60 60 60 60 61 61 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection .............................................................................. 3.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................... Mode Control Register (MDCR) .................................................................................... System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................................. Operating Mode Descriptions......................................................................................... 3.4.1 Mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 3.4.2 Mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 3.4.3 Mode 3 ............................................................................................................ Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.......................................................................... Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.......................................................................... Section 4 4.1 Exception Handling.................................................................................. 65 65 65 65 66 67 67 67 69 70 71 72 73 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority.......................................................... 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation ....................................................................... 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table................................................................................... Reset ........................................................................................................................ 4.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 4.2.2 Reset Sequence ............................................................................................... 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset....................................................................................... Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ Trap Instruction............................................................................................................... Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................... Notes on Stack Usage ..................................................................................................... Section 5 5.1 Interrupt Controller................................................................................... 75 75 75 76 77 77 78 78 5.2 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 5.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 5.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 5.1.3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 5.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................. 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB) ....................................... 79 5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) .............................................................................. 85 5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER)............................................................................. 86 5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR) ............................................................... 87 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................. 88 5.3.1 External Interrupts .......................................................................................... 88 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts ........................................................................................... 89 5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table ..................................................................................... 89 Interrupt Operation ......................................................................................................... 92 5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Process ............................................................................. 92 5.4.2 Interrupt Sequence .......................................................................................... 97 5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time................................................................................. 98 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 99 5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction ................ 99 5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts .................................................................. 100 5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution ........................................ 100 Section 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Bus Controller............................................................................................ 101 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 101 6.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 101 6.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 102 6.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 103 6.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 103 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 104 6.2.1 Access State Control Register (ASTCR)........................................................ 104 6.2.2 Wait Control Register (WCR)......................................................................... 105 6.2.3 Wait State Controller Enable Register (WCER)............................................. 106 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 107 6.3.1 Area Division.................................................................................................. 107 6.3.2 Bus Control Signal Timing ............................................................................. 109 6.3.3 Wait Modes ..................................................................................................... 111 6.3.4 Interconnections with Memory (Example)..................................................... 117 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 118 6.4.1 Register Write Timing .................................................................................... 118 Section 7 7.1 7.2 I/O Ports....................................................................................................... 119 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 119 Port 1 ........................................................................................................................ 122 7.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 122 7.2.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 123 7.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode........................................................................... 124 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 Port 2 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 Port 3 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 Port 5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 Port 6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 Port 7 7.7.1 7.7.2 Port 8 7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 Port 9 7.9.1 7.9.2 7.9.3 Port A 7.10.1 7.10.2 7.10.3 Port B 7.11.1 7.11.2 7.11.3 ........................................................................................................................ 126 Overview......................................................................................................... 126 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 127 Pin Functions in Each Mode........................................................................... 128 Input Pull-Up Transistors................................................................................ 130 ........................................................................................................................ 131 Overview......................................................................................................... 131 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 131 Pin Functions in Each Mode........................................................................... 133 ........................................................................................................................ 134 Overview......................................................................................................... 134 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 134 Pin Functions in Each Mode........................................................................... 137 Input Pull-Up Transistors................................................................................ 138 ........................................................................................................................ 139 Overview......................................................................................................... 139 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 139 Pin Functions in Each Mode........................................................................... 141 ........................................................................................................................ 144 Overview......................................................................................................... 144 Register Description ....................................................................................... 145 ........................................................................................................................ 146 Overview......................................................................................................... 146 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 147 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 148 ........................................................................................................................ 150 Overview......................................................................................................... 150 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 150 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 152 ........................................................................................................................ 153 Overview......................................................................................................... 153 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 154 Pin Functions ................................................................................................. 156 ........................................................................................................................ 161 Overview......................................................................................................... 161 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 161 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 163 Section 8 8.1 16-Bit Integrated Timer Unit (ITU)..................................................... 169 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 169 8.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 169 8.1.2 Block Diagrams .............................................................................................. 172 8.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 177 8.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 178 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 181 8.2.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR) .......................................................................... 181 8.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC) .................................................................... 182 8.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)....................................................................... 184 8.2.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR) ...................................................... 187 8.2.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) .............................................. 189 8.2.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR)......................................................... 192 8.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT) ................................................................................. 193 8.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB) ..................................................................... 194 8.2.9 Buffer Registers (BRA, BRB) ........................................................................ 195 8.2.10 Timer Control Registers (TCR) ...................................................................... 196 8.2.11 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)................................................................ 198 8.2.12 Timer Status Register (TSR)........................................................................... 200 8.2.13 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)......................................................... 203 CPU Interface ................................................................................................................. 205 8.3.1 16-Bit Accessible Registers............................................................................ 205 8.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers.............................................................................. 207 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 209 8.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 209 8.4.2 Basic Functions............................................................................................... 210 8.4.3 Synchronization .............................................................................................. 220 8.4.4 PWM Mode .................................................................................................... 222 8.4.5 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode ................................................................... 226 8.4.6 Complementary PWM Mode.......................................................................... 229 8.4.7 Phase Counting Mode..................................................................................... 239 8.4.8 Buffering......................................................................................................... 241 8.4.9 ITU Output Timing......................................................................................... 248 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 250 8.5.1 Setting of Status Flags .................................................................................... 250 8.5.2 Clearing of Status Flags.................................................................................. 252 8.5.3 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................. 253 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 254 Section 9 9.1 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller ......................................... 269 9.2 9.3 9.4 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 269 9.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 269 9.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 270 9.1.3 TPC Pins ......................................................................................................... 271 9.1.4 Registers ......................................................................................................... 272 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 273 9.2.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ...................................................... 273 9.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR) ......................................................................... 273 9.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) ...................................................... 274 9.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR) ......................................................................... 274 9.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA)....................................................................... 275 9.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB) ....................................................................... 277 9.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA) ........................................................ 279 9.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB)......................................................... 280 9.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR)............................................................ 281 9.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR).............................................................. 284 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 286 9.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 286 9.3.2 Output Timing................................................................................................. 287 9.3.3 Normal TPC Output........................................................................................ 288 9.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output........................................................................ 290 9.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture....................................................... 292 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 293 9.4.1 Operation of TPC Output Pins........................................................................ 293 9.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output .................................................................. 293 Section 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 Watchdog Timer ........................................................................................ 295 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 295 10.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 295 10.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 296 10.1.3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 296 10.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 297 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 298 10.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)................................................................................... 298 10.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)........................................................... 299 10.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ...................................................... 301 10.2.4 Notes on Register Access ............................................................................... 303 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 305 10.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation............................................................................. 305 10.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ................................................................................ 306 10.4 10.5 10.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF).................................................... 307 10.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST) ............................. 308 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 309 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 309 Section 11 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 Serial Communication Interface........................................................... 311 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 311 11.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 311 11.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 313 11.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 314 11.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 314 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 315 11.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ......................................................................... 315 11.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)......................................................................... 315 11.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)........................................................................ 316 11.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) ....................................................................... 316 11.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) .......................................................................... 317 11.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ........................................................................ 321 11.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ........................................................................... 325 11.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ................................................................................. 329 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 338 11.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 338 11.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode.................................................................. 340 11.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication ..................................................................... 349 11.3.4 Synchronous Operation .................................................................................. 356 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................. 365 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 366 Section 12 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 A/D Converter............................................................................................ 371 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 371 12.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 371 12.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 372 12.1.3 Input Pins ........................................................................................................ 373 12.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 374 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 375 12.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)........................................ 375 12.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) .......................................................... 376 12.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ....................................................................... 379 CPU Interface ................................................................................................................. 380 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 381 12.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) ............................................................................... 381 12.5 12.6 12.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1).................................................................................. 383 12.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .................................................... 385 12.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing........................................................................ 386 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................ 387 Usage Notes .................................................................................................................... 387 Section 13 13.1 RAM ............................................................................................................. 389 13.2 13.3 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 389 13.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 389 13.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 390 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................................. 391 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 392 13.3.1 Mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 392 13.3.2 Modes 2 and 3................................................................................................. 392 Section 14 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 ROM ............................................................................................................. 393 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 393 14.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 393 PROM Mode................................................................................................................... 394 14.2.1 PROM Mode Setting ...................................................................................... 394 14.2.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map.................................................................. 394 Programming .................................................................................................................. 397 14.3.1 Programming and Verification........................................................................ 397 14.3.2 Programming Precautions............................................................................... 402 Reliability of Programmed Data..................................................................................... 403 Clock Pulse Generator............................................................................. 405 Section 15 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 405 15.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 405 Oscillator Circuit ............................................................................................................ 406 15.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ..................................................................... 406 15.2.2 External Clock Input....................................................................................... 408 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................. 410 Prescalers ........................................................................................................................ 410 Section 16 16.1 16.2 16.3 Power-Down State .................................................................................... 411 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 411 Register Configuration.................................................................................................... 412 16.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................. 412 Sleep Mode ..................................................................................................................... 414 16.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode................................................................................ 414 16.4 16.5 16.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode..................................................................................... 414 Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................. 415 16.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode ............................................................ 415 16.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode ................................................................. 415 16.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode ................ 416 16.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode ............................................ 417 16.4.5 Note................................................................................................................. 417 Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................ 418 16.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode........................................................... 418 16.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode................................................................ 418 16.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode.............................................................. 418 Section 17 17.1 17.2 17.3 Electrical Characteristics ........................................................................ 419 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................... 419 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................................................ 420 17.2.1 DC Characteristics .......................................................................................... 420 17.2.2 AC Characteristics .......................................................................................... 430 17.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................... 437 Operational Timing......................................................................................................... 438 17.3.1 Bus Timing ..................................................................................................... 438 17.3.2 Control Signal Timing .................................................................................... 442 17.3.3 Clock Timing .................................................................................................. 444 17.3.4 TPC and I/O Port Timing................................................................................ 444 17.3.5 ITU Timing ..................................................................................................... 445 17.3.6 SCI Input/Output Timing................................................................................ 446 Appendix A Instruction Set ............................................................................................ 447 A.1 A.2 A.3 Instruction List................................................................................................................ 447 Operating Code Maps ..................................................................................................... 462 Number of States Required for Execution...................................................................... 465 Appendix B Register Field ............................................................................................. 474 B.1 B.2 Register Addresses and Bit Names................................................................................. 474 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 482 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams ........................................................................ 532 C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 Port 1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 3 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 5 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 6 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 532 533 534 535 536 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 C.10 Port 7 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 8 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 9 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port B Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 538 539 540 543 546 Appendix D Pin States ..................................................................................................... 550 D.1 D.2 Port States in Each Mode................................................................................................ 550 Pin States at Reset........................................................................................................... 552 Appendix E Appendix F Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode.............................................................. 555 Package Dimensions ................................................................................ 556 Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series is a series of microcontrollers (MCUs) that integrate system supporting functions together with an H8/300H CPU core having an original Hitachi architecture. The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space.*1 Its instruction set is upward-compatible at the object-code level with the H8/300 CPU, enabling easy porting of software from the H8/300 Series. The on-chip system supporting functions include ROM, RAM, a 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), a programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, I/O ports, and other facilities. The three members of the H8/3032 Series are the H8/3032, the H8/3031, and the H8/3030. The H8/3032 has 64 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM. The H8/3031 has 32 kbytes of ROM and 1 kbyte of RAM. The H8/3030 has 16 kbytes of ROM and 512 bytes of RAM. Three MCU operating modes offer a choice of data bus width and address space size. The modes (modes 1 to 3) include a single-chip mode and expanded mode. In addition to the masked-ROM versions of the H8/3032 Series, the H8/3032 has a ZTATTM*2 version with user-programmable on-chip PROM. This version enables users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other conditions. Table 1-1 summarizes the features of the H8/3032 Series. Notes: 1. The H8/3032 Series has a maximum address space of 1 Mbyte. 2. ZTAT (Zero Turn-Around Time) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd. 1 Table 1-1 Features Feature CPU Description Upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU at the object-code level General-register machine * Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also useable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) High-speed operation * Maximum clock rate: 16 MHz * Add/subtract: 125 ns * Multiply/divide: 875 ns Two CPU operating modes * Normal mode (64-kbyte address space) * Advanced mode (1-Mbyte address space) Instruction features * * * * * Memory 8/16/32-bit data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions Signed and unsigned multiply instructions (8 bits x 8 bits, 16 bits x 16 bits) Signed and unsigned divide instructions (16 bits / 8 bits, 32 bits / 16 bits) Bit accumulator function Bit manipulation instructions with register-indirect specification of bit positions H8/3032 * ROM: 64 kbytes * RAM: 2 kbytes H8/3031 * ROM: 32 kbytes * RAM: 1 kbyte H8/3030 * ROM: 16 kbytes * RAM: 512 bytes Interrupt controller Bus controller * Six external interrupt pins: NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ4 * 21 internal interrupts * Three selectable interrupt priority levels * Address space can be partitioned into eight areas, with independent bus specifications in each area * Two-state or three-state access selectable for each area * Selection of four wait modes 2 Table 1-1 Features (cont) Feature 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU) Description * Five 16-bit timer channels, capable of processing up to 12 pulse outputs or 10 pulse inputs * 16-bit timer counter (channels 0 to 4) * Two multiplexed output compare/input capture pins (channels 0 to 4) * Operation can be synchronized (channels 0 to 4) * PWM mode available (channels 0 to 4) * Phase counting mode available (channel 2) * Buffering available (channels 3 and 4) * Reset-synchronized PWM mode available (channels 3 and 4) * Complementary PWM mode available (channels 3 and 4) * Maximum 16-bit pulse output, using ITU as time base * Up to four 4-bit pulse output groups (or one 16-bit group, or two 8-bit groups) * Non-overlap mode available * Reset signal can be generated by overflow * Reset signal can be output externally * Usable as an interval timer * Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode * Full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously * On-chip baud-rate generator * * * * * Resolution: 10 bits Eight channels, with selection of single or scan mode Variable analog conversion voltage range Sample-and-hold function Can be externally triggered Programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) Watchdog timer (WDT), 1 channel Serial communication interface (SCI), 2 channels A/D converter I/O ports * 55 input/output pins * 8 input-only pins 3 Table 1-1 Features (cont) Feature Description Operating modes Three MCU operating modes Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Power-down state Other features Product lineup Address Space 1 Mbyte 64 kbytes 1 Mbyte Address Pins A0 to A19 -- -- Bus Width 8 bits -- -- * Sleep mode * Software standby mode * Hardware standby mode * On-chip clock oscillator Model HD6473032F HD6473032TF HD6433032F HD6433032TF HD6433031F HD6433031TF HD6433030F HD6433030TF Package 80-pin QFP (FP-80A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 80-pin QFP (FP-80A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 80-pin QFP (FP-80A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 80-pin QFP (FP-80A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) ROM PROM Mask ROM Mask ROM Mask ROM 4 1.2 Block Diagram Figure 1-1 shows an internal block diagram. P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 Port 3 Address bus Data bus (upper) MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL o STBY RES RESO NMI VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS Data bus (lower) Clock osc. H8/300H CPU Bus controller P53/A15 P52/A16 P51/A17 P50/A18 Port 5 Port 2 Port 1 Port 7 Port 9 P65/WR P64/RD P63/AS P60/WAIT Port 6 PROM* (or masked ROM) Interrupt controller P27/A15 P26/A14 P25/A13 P24/A12 P23/A11 P22/A10 P21/A9 P20/A8 P17/A7 P16/A6 P15/A5 P14/A4 P13/A3 P12/A2 P11/A1 P10/A0 RAM Watchdog timer (WDT) P83/IRQ3 P82/IRQ2 P81/IRQ1 P80/IRQ0 16-bit integrated timer-pulse unit (ITU) Serial communication interface (SCI) x 1 channel Port 8 Programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) A/D converter P94/SCK/IRQ4 P92/RxD P90/TxD Port B PB7/TP15/ADTRG PB6/TP14 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4 PB4/TP12/TOCXA4 PB2/TP11/TIOCB4 PB2/TP10/TIOCA4 PB1/TP9/TIOCB3 PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 Port A PA7/TIOCB2 PA6/TIOCA2 PA5/TIOCB1 PA4/TIOCA1 PA3/TIOCB0/TKCKD PA2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA1/TCLKB PA0/TCLKA Vref AVCC AVSS Note: PROM version is available only in the H8/3032 Series. Figure 1-1 Block Diagram 5 P77/AN7 P76/AN6 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 1.3 Pin Description 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the H8/3032 Series, FP-80A and TFP-80C package. PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA7/TP7/TIOCB2 PA3/TP3/IOCB0/TCLKD PA6/TP6/TIOCA2 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1 PA4/TP4/TIOCA1 PA1/TP1/TCLKB PA0/TP0/TCLKA P83/IRQ3 P82/IRQ2 P81/IRQ1 P80/IRQ0 P77/AN7 P76/AN6 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 62 AVCC 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 PB1/TP9/TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4 PB6/TP14 PB7/TP15/ADTRG P90/TxD P92/RxD P94/SCK/IRQ4 VSS P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 P72/AN2 VREF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Top view (FP-80A, TFP-80C) P71/AN1 P70/AN0 AVSS RESO P65/WR P64/RD P63/AS VCC XTAL EXTAL VSS NMI RES STBY o MD1 MD0 P60/WAIT P53/A19 P52/A18 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 Figure 1-2 Pin Arrangement (FP-80A, TFP-80C, Top View) 6 P51/A17 VCC VSS 1.3.2 Pin Functions Pin Assignments in Each Mode: Table 1-2 lists the FP-80A and TFP-80C pin assignments in each mode. Table 1-2 FP-80A and TFP-80C Pin Assignments in Each Mode Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Pin Name Mode 1 PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 PB1/TP9/TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4 PB6/TP14 PB7/TP15/ADTRG P90/TxD P92/RxD P94/SCK/IRQ4 VSS D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 VCC P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 Mode 2 PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 PB1/TP9/TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4 PB6/TP14 PB7/TP15/ADTRG P90/TxD P92/RxD P94/SCK/IRQ4 VSS P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VCC P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 Mode 3 PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 PB1/TP9/TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4 PB6/TP14 PB7/TP15/ADTRG P90/TxD P92/RxD P94/SCK/IRQ4 VSS P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VCC P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 PROM Mode NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VSS EO0 EO1 EO2 EO3 EO4 EO5 EO6 EO7 VCC EA0 EA1 EA2 EA3 EA4 Note: Pins marked NC should be left unconnected. 7 Table 1-2 FP-80A and TFP-80C Pin Assignments in Each Mode (cont) Pin No. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Pin Name Mode 1 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 P60/WAIT MD0 MD1 o STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC Mode 2 P15 P16 P17 VSS P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 MD0 MD1 o STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC Mode 3 P15 P16 P17 VSS P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 MD0 MD1 o STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC PROM Mode EA5 EA6 EA7 VSS EA8 CE EA10 EA11 EA12 EA13 EA14 CE VCC VCC NC NC EA15 VSS VSS NC VSS NC EA9 VSS NC NC VCC 8 Table 1-2 FP-80A and TFP-80C Pin Assignments in Each Mode (cont) Pin No. 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pin Name Mode 1 AS RD WR RESO AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 VREF AVCC P80/IRQ0 P81/IRQ1 P82/IRQ2 P83/IRQ3 PA0/TP0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/TCLKB PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1 PA6/TP6/TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/TIOCB2 Mode 2 P63 P64 P65 RESO AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 VREF AVCC P80/IRQ0 P81/IRQ1 P82/IRQ2 P83/IRQ3 PA0/TP0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/TCLKB PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1 PA6/TP6/TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/TIOCB2 Mode 3 P63 P64 P65 RESO AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 VREF AVCC P80/IRQ0 P81/IRQ1 P82/IRQ2 P83/IRQ3 PA0/TP0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/TCLKB PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/A20 PROM Mode NC NC NC VPP AVSS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VCC VCC EA16 PGM NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 9 1.4 Pin Functions Table 1-3 summarizes the pin functions. Table 1-3 Pin Functions Type Power Symbol VCC Pin No. 21, 53 I/O Input Name and Function Power: For connection to the power supply (+5 V). Connect all VCC pins to the +5-V system power supply. Ground: For connection to ground (0 V). Connect all VSS pins to the 0-V system power supply. For connection to a crystal resonator. For examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 15, Clock Pulse Generator. For connection to a crystal resonator or input of an external clock signal. For examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 15, Clock Pulse Generator. VSS 12, 30, 50 Input Clock XTAL 52 Input EXTAL 51 Input o Operating mode control MD1, MD0 46 45, 44 Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to external devices Input Mode 1 and mode 0: For setting the operating mode, as follows MD1 0 0 01 1 MD0 0 1 0 1 Operating Mode -- Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 System control RES RESO STBY 48 57 47 Input Reset input: When driven low, this pin resets the H8/3032 Output Reset output: Outputs a reset signal to external devices Input Standby: When driven low, this pin forces a transition to hardware standby mode 10 Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont) Type Interrupts Symbol NMI IRQ4 to IRQ0 Address bus Data bus Bus control A19 to A8, A7 to A0 D7 to D0 AS RD WR Pin No. 49 11, 72 to 69 42 to 31, 29 to 22 20 to 13 54 55 56 I/O Input Input Name and Function Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt Interrupt request 4 to 0: Maskable interrupt request pins Output Address bus: Outputs address signals Input/ output Data bus: Bidirectional data bus Output Address strobe: Goes low to indicate valid address output on the address bus Output Read: Goes low to indicate reading from the external address space Output High write: Goes low to indicate writing to the external address space; indicates valid data on the data bus. Input Wait: Requests insertion of wait states in bus cycles during access to the external address space Clock input A to D: External clock inputs Input capture/output compare A4 to A0: GRA4 to GRA0 output compare or input capture, or PWM output Input capture/output compare B4 to B0: GRB4 to GRB0 output compare or input capture, or PWM output WAIT 43 16-bit integrated time unit (ITU) TCLKD to TCLKA TIOCA4 to TIOCA0 TIOCB4 to TIOCB0 TOCXA4 TOCXB4 76 to 73 3, 1, 79, 77, 75 4, 2, 80, 78, 76 5 6 8 to 1, 80 to 73 Input Input/ output Input/ output Output Output compare XA4: PWM output Output Output compare XB4: PWM output Output TPC output 15 to 0: Pulse output Programmable TP15 to timing pattern TP0 controller (TPC) 11 Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont) Type Serial communication interface (SCI) Symbol TxD RxD SCK A/D converter Pin No. 9 10 11 I/O Name and Function Output Transmit data: SCI data output Input Input/ output Input Input Input Receive data: SCI data input Serial clock: SCI clock input/output Analog 7 to 0: Analog input pins A/D trigger: External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Power supply pin for the A/D converter. Connect to the system power supply (+5 V) when not using the A/D converter. Ground pin for the A/D converter. Connect to system ground (0 V) when not using the A/D converter. Reference voltage input pin for the A/D converter. Connect to the system power supply (+5 V) when not using the A/D converter. Port 1: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). Port 2: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR). Port 3: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). Port 5: Four input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR). Port 6: Four input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (P6DDR). Port 7: Eight input pins Port 8: Four input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 8 data direction register (P8DDR). AN7 to AN0 66 to 59 ADTRG AVCC 8 68 AVSS 58 Input VREF 67 Input I/O ports P17 to P10 29 to 22 Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input Input/ output P27 to P20 38 to 31 P37 to P30 20 to 13 P53 to P50 42 to 39 P65 to P63, 56 to 54, P60 43 P77 to P70 P83 to P80 66 to 59 72 to 69 12 Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont) Type I/O ports Symbol P94, P92, P90 PA7 to PA0 Pin No. 11 to 9 I/O Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Name and Function Port 9: Three input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 9 data direction register (P9DDR). Port A: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port A data direction register (PADDR). Port B: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port B data direction register (PBDDR). 80 to 73 PB7 to PB0 8 to 1 13 14 Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8/300H CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU. The H8/300H CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8/300H CPU has the following features. * Upward compatibility with H8/300 CPU Can execute H8/300 series object programs without alteration * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) * Sixty-two basic instructions -- 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions -- Multiply and divide instructions -- Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- * Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] 1-Mbyte* linear address space Note: * The CPU, if used alone, can access a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes. However, the maximum address space of the H8/3032 Series is 1 Mbyte. 15 * High-speed operation -- -- -- -- -- -- -- All frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states Maximum clock frequency: 16 MHz 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 125 ns 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 875 ns 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 875 ns 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 1.375 s 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: 1.375 s * Two CPU operating modes -- Normal mode -- Advanced mode * Low-power mode Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8/300H has the following enhancements. * More general registers Eight 16-bit registers have been added. * Expanded address space -- Advanced mode supports a maximum 1-Mbyte address space. -- Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. * Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 1-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced instructions -- Data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions can operate on 32-bit data. -- Signed multiply/divide instructions and other instructions have been added. 16 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8/300H CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports up to 1 Mbytes. See figure 2-1. Normal mode Maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined CPU operating modes Maximum 1 Mbyte, program and data areas combined Advanced mode Figure 2-1 CPU Operating Modes 17 2.3 Address Space Figure 2-2 shows a simple memory map for the H8/3032 Series. The H8/300H CPU can address a linear address space with a maximum size of 64 kbytes in normal mode, and 16 Mbytes in advanced mode. For further details see section 3.6, Memory Map in Each Operating Mode. The 1-Mbyte operating mode uses 20-bit addressing. The upper 4 bits of effective addresses are ignored. H'00000 H'000000 H'FFFFF H'FFFFFF a. 1-Mbyte mode b. 16-Mbyte mode Figure 2-2 Memory Map 18 2.4 Register Configuration 2.4.1 Overview The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2-3. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (ERn) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 Control Registers (CR) 23 PC 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend SP: Stack pointer PC: Program counter CCR: Condition code register Interrupt mask bit I: User bit or interrupt mask bit UI: Half-carry flag H: User bit U: Negative flag N: Zero flag Z: Overflow flag V: Carry flag C: 0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 (SP) 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Figure 2-3 CPU Registers 19 2.4.2 General Registers The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used without distinction between data registers and address registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or as address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. Figure 2-4 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. * Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers E registers (extended registers) E0 to E7 * 8-bit registers ER registers ER0 to ER7 R registers R0 to R7 RH registers R0H to R7H RL registers R0L to R7L Figure 2-4 Usage of General Registers 20 General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2-5 shows the stack. Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2-5 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC) and the 8-bit condition code register (CCR). Program Counter (PC): This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word) or a multiple of 2 bytes, so the least significant PC bit is ignored. When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0. Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including the interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Bit 7--Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. Bit 6--User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 21 Bit 5--Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 4--User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3--Negative Flag (N): Indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. Bit 2--Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1--Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. Bit 0--Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * * * Add instructions, to indicate a carry Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on CCR by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used by conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instruction List. For the I and UI bits, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values In reset exception handling, PC is initialized to a value loaded from the vector table, and the I bit in CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer must therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. 22 2.5 Data Formats The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the data formats in general registers. Data Type General Register Data Format 7 0 Don't care 7 0 1-bit data RnH 76543210 1-bit data RnL 7 Don't care 43 0 76543210 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper digit Lower digit Don't care 7 43 0 4-bit BCD data RnL 7 Don't care 0 Upper digit Lower digit Byte data RnH MSB LSB 7 Don't care 0 LSB Byte data RnL Don't care MSB Figure 2-6 General Register Data Formats (1) 23 Data Type General Register Data Format 15 0 LSB 0 LSB 16 15 0 LSB Word data Rn MSB 15 Word data En MSB 31 Longword data ERn MSB Legend ERn: General register En: General register E Rn: General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit Figure 2-7 General Register Data Formats (2) 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2-8 shows the data formats on memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and longword data on memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. 24 Data Type Address Data Format 7 1-bit data Byte data Word data Address Address Address 2m Address 2m + 1 Address 2n Longword data Address 2n + 1 Address 2n + 2 Address 2n + 3 MSB 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB 7 MSB MSB LSB LSB Figure 2-8 Memory Data Formats When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. 25 2.6 Instruction Set 2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview The H8/300H CPU has 62 types of instructions, which are classified in table 2-1. Table 2-1 Instruction Classification Function Data transfer Arithmetic operations Logic operations Shift operations Bit manipulation Branch System control Block data transfer Total 62 types Notes: 1. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, Rn. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L Rn, @-SP. 2. They are not available on H8/3032. 3. Bcc is a generic branching instruction. Instruction MOV, PUSH*1, POP*1, MOVTPE*2, MOVFPE*2 Types 3 18 4 8 14 5 9 1 ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS, DAA, DAS, MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS, CMP, NEG, EXTS, EXTU AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST Bcc*3, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP EEPMOV 26 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2-2 indicates the instructions available in the H8/300H CPU. Table 2-2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Addressing Modes @ @ (d:16, (d:24, @ERn+/ @ @ERn ERn) ERn) @-ERn aa:8 BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- @ aa:16 BWL -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- @ @ (d:8, aa:24 PC) BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- @ (d:16, @@ PC) aa:8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Function Data transfer Instruction MOV POP, PUSH MOVFPE, MOVTPE #xx Rn Implied -- WL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- Arithmetic ADD, CMP operations SUB BWL BWL -- WL BWL -- B L -- -- ADDX, SUBX B ADDS, SUBS -- INC, DEC DAA, DAS DIVXU, MULXS, MULXU, DIVXS NEG EXTU, EXTS Logic AND, OR, operations XOR NOT Shift instructions Bit manipulation Branch Bcc, BSR JMP, JSR RTS System control TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC STC -- -- -- BWL -- B BW -- -- -- -- BWL -- WL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o o o o BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- BWL -- BWL -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- B B -- -- -- B -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o ANDC, ORC, B XORC NOP Block data transfer Legend B: Byte W: Word L: Longword -- -- BW 27 2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function Tables 2-3 to 2-10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The operation notation used in these tables is defined next. Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :3/:8/:16/:24 General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register or address register) Destination operand Source operand Condition code register N (negative) flag of CCR Z (zero) flag of CCR V (overflow) flag of CCR C (carry) flag of CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division AND logical OR logical Exclusive OR logical Move NOT (logical complement) 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit data or address registers (ER0 to ER7). 28 Table 2-3 Data Transfer Instructions Instruction Size* MOV B/W/L Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. MOVFPE B (EAs) Rd Cannot be used in the H8/3032. MOVTPE B Rs (EAs) Cannot be used in the H8/3032. POP W/L @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. Similarly, POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. PUSH W/L Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. Similarly, PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 29 Table 2-4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions Instruction Size* ADD, SUB B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) B Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. B/W/L Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) L Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. B Rd decimal adjust Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. MULXS B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword ADDX, SUBX INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS DAA, DAS MULXU 30 Table 2-4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions (cont) Instruction Size* DIVXU B/W Function Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. DIVXS B/W Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. CMP B/W/L Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR according to the result. NEG B/W/L 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by extending the sign bit. EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by padding with zeros. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 31 Table 2-5 Logic Operation Instructions Instruction Size* AND B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. OR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. XOR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. NOT B/W/L Rd Rd Takes the one's complement of general register contents. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Table 2-6 Shift Instructions Instruction Size* SHAL, SHAR SHLL, SHLR ROTL, ROTR ROTXL, ROTXR B/W/L Function Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. B/W/L Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. B/W/L Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents. B/W/L Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry bit. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 32 Table 2-7 Bit Manipulation Instructions Instruction Size* BSET B Function 1 ( 33 Table 2-7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (cont) Instruction Size* BOR B Function C ( 34 Table 2-8 Branching Instructions Instruction Size Bcc -- Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS Bcc (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE JMP BSR JSR RTS -- -- -- -- Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z (N V) = 0 Z (N V) = 1 Branches unconditionally to a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Returns from a subroutine 35 Table 2-9 System Control Instructions Instruction Size* TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC -- -- -- B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling Returns from an exception-handling routine Causes a transition to the power-down state (EAs) CCR Moves the source operand contents to the condition code register. The condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access. STC B/W CCR (EAd) Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word access. ANDC B CCR #IMM CCR Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data. ORC B CCR #IMM CCR Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data. XORC B CCR #IMM CCR Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate data. NOP -- PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word 36 Table 2-10 Block Transfer Instruction Instruction Size EEPMOV.B -- Function if R4L 0 then repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4L - 1 R4L until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 0 then repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4 - 1 R4 until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6. R4L or R4: Size of block (bytes) ER5: Starting source address ER6: Starting destination address Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. EEPMOV.W -- 37 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The H8/300H instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (OP field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A 24-bit address or displacement is treated as 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00). Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Figure 2-9 shows examples of instruction formats. Operation field only op Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. NOP, RTS, etc. Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:8 rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm Figure 2-9 Instruction Formats 38 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, modify a bit in the byte, then write the byte back. Care is required when these instructions are used to access registers with write-only bits, or to access ports. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear flags in the on-chip registers. In an interrupt-handling routine, for example, if it is known that the flag is set to 1, it is not necessary to read the flag ahead of time. 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation 2.7.1 Addressing Modes The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2-11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except programcounter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute (@aa:8) addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2-11 Addressing Modes No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16, ERn)/@d:24, ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) @@aa:8 39 1 Register Direct--Rn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2 Register Indirect--@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand. 3 Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn): A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to the contents of an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum specify the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn: * Register indirect with post-increment--@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. * Register indirect with pre-decrement--@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result become the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the resulting register value should be even. 5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24: The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), or 24 bits long (@aa:24). For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. Table 2-12 indicates the accessible address ranges. 40 Table 2-12 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 1-Mbyte Modes H'FFF00 to H'FFFFF (1048320 to 1048575) H'00000 to H'07FFF, H'F8000 to H'FFFFF (0 to 32767, 1015808 to 1048575) H'00000 to H'FFFFF (0 to 1048575) 64-kbyte Modes H'FF00 to H'FFFF (65280 to 65535) H'0000 to H'FFFF (0 to 65535) H'000000 to H'00FFFF (0 to 65535) 24 bits (@aa:24) 6 Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction code contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The instruction codes of the ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. The instruction codes of some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction code contains 2-bit immediate data specifying a vector address. 7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is signextended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a 24-bit branch address. The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. 8 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. See figure 2-10. The upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are assumed to be 0 (H'0000), so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'000000 to H'0000FF). Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector area. For further details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 41 Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address Figure 2-10 Memory-Indirect Branch Address Specification When a word-size or longword-size memory operand is specified, or when a branch address is specified, if the specified memory address is odd, the least significant bit is regarded as 0. The accessed data or instruction code therefore begins at the preceding address. See section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2-13 explains how an effective address is calculated in each addressing mode. In the 1-Mbyte operating modes the upper 4 bits of the calculated address are ignored in order to generate a 20-bit effective address. 42 Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation No. 1 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct (Rn) op 2 rm rn 31 General register contents op 3 r 31 General register contents 0 23 0 0 23 0 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address Operand is general register contents Register indirect (@ERn) Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn)/@(d:24, ERn) op r disp Sign extension disp 43 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 General register contents 0 23 0 op r 31 1, 2, or 4 0 General register contents 23 0 Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn op r 1, 2, or 4 1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word operand, 4 for a longword operand Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation (cont) No. 5 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address @aa:8 op @aa:16 op @aa:24 44 6 7 op abs Immediate #xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 op IMM Operand is immediate data abs 23 0 abs 23 16 15 0 Sign extension Effective Address Calculation Effective Address 23 H'FFFF 87 0 Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) 23 PC contents Sign extension 0 23 0 disp op disp Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation (cont) No. 8 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Memory indirect @@aa:8 Normal mode op abs 23 87 0 abs H'0000 15 0 Memory contents Effective Address Calculation Effective Address 23 16 15 H'00 0 Advanced mode op 45 31 Memory contents Legend r, rm, rn: op: disp: IMM: abs: Register field Operation field Displacement Immediate data Absolute address abs 23 H'0000 87 abs 0 23 0 0 2.8 Processing States 2.8.1 Overview The H8/300H CPU has five processing states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, power-down state, reset state, and bus-released state. The power-down state includes sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 2-11 classifies the processing states. Figure 2-13 indicates the state transitions. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU executes a hardware sequence (saving PC and CCR, fetching a vector, etc.) in response to a reset, interrupt, or other exception Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and halted Power-down state The CPU is halted to conserve power Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Figure 2-11 Processing States 46 2.8.2 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in normal sequence. 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal program flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a starting address from the exception vector table and branches to that address. In interrupt and trap exception handling the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and saves the program counter and condition code register. Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority: Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2-14 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Table 2-14 Exception Handling Types and Priority Priority Type of Exception Detection Timing High Reset Interrupt Synchronized with clock End of instruction execution or end of exception handling* When TRAPA instruction is executed Start of Exception Handling Exception handling starts immediately when RES changes from low to high When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence Exception handling starts when a trap (TRAPA) instruction is executed Trap instruction Low Note: * Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. Figure 2-12 classifies the exception sources. For further details about exception sources, vector numbers, and vector addresses, see section 4, Exception Handling, and section 5, Interrupt Controller. 47 Reset External interrupts Exception sources Interrupt Internal interrupts (from on-chip supporting modules) Trap instruction Figure 2-12 Classification of Exception Sources Program execution state SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 0 End of exception handling Exception Sleep mode Interrupt NMI, IRQ 0 , IRQ 1, or IRQ 2 interrupt SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 1 Exception-handling state Software standby mode RES = 1 STBY = 1, RES = 0 Reset state*1 Hardware standby mode Power-down state *2 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. Figure 2-13 State Transitions 48 2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences Reset Exception Handling: Reset exception handling has the highest priority. The reset state is entered when the RES signal goes low. Reset exception handling starts after that, when RES changes from low to high. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during the reset exception-handling sequence and immediately after it ends. Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling: When these exception-handling sequences begin, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and condition code register on the stack. Next, if the UE bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1, the CPU sets the I bit in the condition code register to 1. If the UE bit is cleared to 0, the CPU sets both the I bit and the UI bit in the condition code register to 1. Then the CPU fetches a start address from the exception vector table and execution branches to that address. Figure 2-14 shows the stack after the exception-handling sequence. SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR PC Even address Before exception handling starts Legend CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer Pushed on stack After exception handling ends Notes: 1. PC is the address of the first instruction executed after the return from the exception-handling routine. 2. Registers must be saved and restored by word access or longword access, starting at an even address. Figure 2-14 Stack Structure after Exception Handling 49 2.8.5 Reset State When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. The I bit in the condition code register is set to 1 by a reset. All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details see section 10, Watchdog Timer. 2.8.6 Power-Down State In the power-down state the CPU stops operating to conserve power. There are three modes: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (SYSCR). CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction, but the contents of CPU registers are retained. Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. The CPU and clock halt and all on-chip supporting modules stop operating. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states. Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY input goes low. As in software standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are retained. For further information see section 16, Power-Down State. 50 2.9 Basic Operational Timing 2.9.1 Overview The H8/300H CPU operates according to the system clock (o). The interval from one rise of the system clock to the next rise is referred to as a "state." A memory cycle or bus cycle consists of two or three states. The CPU uses different methods to access on-chip memory, the on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. Access to the external address space can be controlled by the bus controller. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing On-chip memory is accessed in two states. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word access. Figure 2-15 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2-16 indicates the pin states. Bus cycle T1 state o Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus (read access) Internal write signal Internal data bus (write access) Write data Read data Address T2 state Figure 2-15 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle 51 T1 o Address bus AS , RD, WR Address T2 High High impedance D7 to D0 Figure 2-16 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access 52 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in three states. The data bus is 8 or 16 bits wide, depending on the register being accessed. Figure 2-17 shows the on-chip supporting module access timing. Figure 2-18 indicates the pin states. Bus cycle T1 state o Address T2 state T3 state Address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus Read access Read data Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2-17 Access Cycle for On-Chip Supporting Modules 53 T1 o Address bus AS , RD, HWR , LWR T2 T3 Address High High impedance D7 to D0 Figure 2-18 Pin States during Access to On-Chip Supporting Modules 2.9.4 Access to External Address Space The external address space is divided into eight areas (areas 0 to 7). Bus-controller settings determine whether each area is accessed via an 8-bit or 16-bit bus, and whether it is accessed in two or three states. For details see section 6, Bus Controller. 54 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection The H8/3032 Series has three operating modes (modes 1 to 3) that are selected by the mode pins (MD1 and MD0) as indicated in table 3-1. The input at these pins determines expanded mode or single-chip mode. Table 3-1 Operating Mode Selection Mode Pins Operating Mode -- Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 MD1 0 0 1 1 MD0 0 1 0 1 Address Space -- 1 Mbyte 64 kbytes 1 Mbyte Description Initial Bus Width*1 -- 8 bits -- -- On-Chip RAM -- Enabled*1 Enabled*2 Enabled*2 Notes: 1. In mode 1, if the RAM enable bit (RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0, these addresses become external addresses. 2. In modes 2 and 3, clearing bit RAME of SYSCR to 0 and reading the on-chip RAM always returns H'FF, and write access is ignored. For details, see section 13.3, Operation. For the address space size there are two choices: 64 kbytes or 1 Mbyte. Modes 1 and 3 support a maximum address space of 1 Mbyte. Mode 2 supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. The H8/3032 Series can only be used in modes 1 to 3. The inputs at the mode pins must select one of these three modes. The inputs at the mode pins must not be changed during operation. 55 3.1.2 Register Configuration The H8/3032 Series has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR). Table 3-2 summarizes these registers. Table 3-2 Registers Address* H'FFF1 H'FFF2 Name Mode control register System control register Abbreviation MDCR SYSCR R/W R R/W Initial Value Undetermined H'0B Note: * The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 56 3.2 Mode Control Register (MDCR) MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the H8/3032 Series. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 MDS1 --* R 0 MDS0 --* R Reserved bits Mode select 1 and 0 Bits indicating the current operating mode Note: * Determined by pins MD 1 and MD 0 . Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bits 5 to 3--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0. Bit 2--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bits 1 and 0--Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1 and MDS0): These bits indicate the logic levels at pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to MD1 and MD0. MDS1 and MDS0 are read-only bits. The mode pin (MD1 and MD0) levels are latched when MDCR is read. 57 3.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the H8/3032 Series. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Enables or disables on-chip RAM Reserved bit NMI edge select Selects the valid edge of the NMI input User bit enable Selects whether to use UI bit in CCR 6 as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit Standby timer select 2 to 0 These bits select the waiting time at recovery from software standby mode Software standby Enables transition to software standby mode Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. (For further information about software standby mode see section 16, Power-Down State.) When software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1. To clear this bit, write 0. Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode (Initial value) 58 Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules wait for the internal clock oscillator to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. Set these bits so that the waiting time will be at least 8 ms at the system clock rate. For further information about waiting time selection, see section 19.4.3, Selection of Oscillator Waiting Time after Exit from Software Standby Mode. Bit 6 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 -- -- Description Waiting time = 8192 states Waiting time = 16384 states Waiting time = 32768 states Waiting time = 65536 states Waiting time = 131072 states Illegal setting (Initial value) Bit 3--User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in the condition code register as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. Bit 3 UE 0 1 Description UI bit in CCR is used as an interrupt mask bit UI bit in CCR is used as a user bit (Initial value) Bit 2--NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI input. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI (Initial value) Bit 1--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized by the rising edge of the RES signal. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) 59 3.4 Operating Mode Descriptions 3.4.1 Mode 1 1-Mbyte address space can be accessed including the on-chip ROM addresses. Port 3 pins function as data pins D7 to D0 and port 1, 2, and 5 pins function as address pins A19 to A0. The address bus width can be selected by setting DDR of ports 1, 2, and 5. 3.4.2 Mode 2 This mode is a normal mode with a 64-kbyte address space which operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers. External addresses cannot be accessed. The vector area and stack area can be saved. 3.4.3 Mode 3 This mode is an advanced mode with a 1-Mbyte address space which operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers. External addresses cannot be accessed. 60 3.5 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode The pin functions of ports 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3-3 indicates their functions in each operating mode. Table 3-3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 5 Port 6 Mode 1 P17 to P10*1 P27 to P20*1 D7 to D0 P53 to P50*1 WR, RD, AS, P66/WAIT*2 Modes 2, 3 P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P53 to P50 P65 to P63, P60 Notes: 1. Initial state. These pins function as an address bus by setting the corresponding DDR bit to 1. 2. The functions of these pins vary depending on the settings in the wait state controller enable register (WCER), wait control register (WCR), and port data direction register. 3.6 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figure 3-1 shows a memory map of the H8/3032. Figure 3-2 shows a memory map of the H8/3031. Figure 3-3 shows a memory map of the H8/3030. The address space is divided into eight areas. 61 Mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM) Mode 2 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 3 (single-chip advanced mode) 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit memoryindirect addresses H'00000 Vector table H'0000 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Vector table H'00000 Vector table 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'00FF H'000FF On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'07FFF H'07FFF H'0FFFF H'10000 Area 0 H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 External addresses Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 H'F70F H'F710 H'0FFFF On-chip RAM H'FF1C On-chip registers Area 6 H'FFFF Area 7 8-bit absolute addresses H'FF00 H'FF0F H'F8000 H'F8000 H'FF70F H'FF710 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM* H'FFF00 H'FFF0F H'FFF10 External addresses H'FFF1B H'FFF1C On-chip register H'FFFFF H'FF710 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM H'FFF00 H'FFF0F 8-bit absolute addresses H'FFF1C On-chip registers H'FFFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3-1 H8/3032 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 62 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM) Mode 2 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 3 (single-chip advanced mode) 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit memoryindirect addresses H'00000 Vector table H'0000 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Vector table H'00000 Vector table 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'00FF H'000FF On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'07FFF H'07FFF Reserved H'0FFFF H'10000 Area 0 H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 External addresses H'FB10 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 On-chip registers Area 6 H'FFFF Area 7 8-bit absolute addresses H'FF00 H'FF0F H'FF1C On-chip RAM H'7FFF H'F8000 H'FF710 H'FFB0F H'FFB10 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM*1 8-bit absolute addresses H'FFF00 H'FFF0F H'FFF10 External addresses H'FFF1B H'FFF1C On-chip register H'FFFFF Reserved H'F8000 H'FFB10 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM H'FFF00 H'FFF0F H'FFF1C On-chip registers H'FFFFF Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ROM. 2. Do not accessed reserved areas. Figure 3-2 H8/3031 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 63 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Mode 1 (with on-chip ROM) Mode 2 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 3 (single-chip advanced mode) 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit memoryindirect addresses H'00000 Vector table H'0000 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Vector table H'00000 Vector table 8-bit memoryindirect addresses 8-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'00FF H'000FF On-chip ROM On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'03FFF H'03FFF Reserved H'0FFFF H'10000 Area 0 H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 External addresses H'FD10 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 On-chip registers Area 6 H'FFFF Area 7 8-bit absolute addresses H'FF00 H'FF0F H'FF1C On-chip RAM H'3FFF H'F8000 H'FF710 H'FFD0F H'FFD10 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM*1 8-bit absolute addresses H'FFF00 H'FFF0F H'FFF10 External addresses H'FFF1B H'FFF1C On-chip register H'FFFFF Reserved H'F8000 H'FFD10 16-bit absolute addresses (second half) On-chip RAM H'FFF00 H'FFF0F H'FFF1C On-chip registers H'FFFFF Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ROM. 2. Do not accessed reserved areas. Figure 3-3 H8/3030 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 64 16-bit absolute addresses (first half) Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4-1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4-1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in priority order. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Table 4-1 Exception Types and Priority Priority Exception Type High Reset Interrupt Low Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin Interrupt requests are handled when execution of the current instruction or handling of the current exception is completed Trap instruction (TRAPA) Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA) 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows. 1. 2. 3. The program counter (PC) and condition code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack. The CCR interrupt mask bit is set to 1. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from the address indicated in the vector address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 65 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4-1. Different vectors are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4-2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. * Reset External interrupts: NMI, IRQ 0 to IRQ4 Exception sources * Interrupts Internal interrupts: 21 interrupts from on-chip supporting modules * Trap instruction Figure 4-1 Exception Sources Table 4-2 Exception Vector Table Vector Address*1 Advanced Mode Normal Mode H'0000 to H'0003 H'0000 to H'0001 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0008 to H'000B H'0004 to H'0005 H'000C to H'000F H'0006 to H'0007 H'0010 to H'0013 H'0008 to H'0009 H'0014 to H'0017 H'000A to H'000B H'0018 to H'001B H'000C to H'000D H'001C to H'001F H'000E to H'000F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0010 to H'0011 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0028 to H'002B H'0014 to H'0015 H'002C to H'002F H'0016 to H'0017 H'0030 to H'0033 H'0018 to H'0019 H'0034 to H'0037 H'001A to H'001B H'0038 to H'003B H'001C to H'001D H'003C to H'003F H'001E to H'001F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0020 to H'0021 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0048 to H'004B H'0024 to H'0025 H'004C to H'004F H'0026 to H'0027 H'0050 to H'0053 H'0028 to H'0029 to H'00F0 to H'00F3 H'0078 to H'0079 Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 External interrupt (NMI) 7 Trap instruction (4 sources) 8 9 10 11 External interrupt IRQ0 12 IRQ1 13 IRQ2 14 IRQ3 15 IRQ4 16 Reserved for system use 17 18 19 Internal interrupts*2 20 to 60 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For the internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Vector Table. 66 Exception Source Reset Reserved for system use 4.2 Reset 4.2.1 Overview A reset is the highest-priority exception. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the H8/3032 Series enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high. The H8/3032 Series can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 10, Watchdog Timer. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence The H8/3032 Series enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the H8/3032 Series is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the H8/3032 Series during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock (o) cycles. See appendix D.2, Pin States at Reset, for the states of the pins in the reset state. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the H8/3032 Series starts reset exception handling as follows. * The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. The contents of the reset vector address (H'0000 to H'0003 in advanced mode, H'0000 to H'0001 in normal mode) are read, and program execution starts from the address indicated in the vector address. * Figure 4-2 shows the reset sequence in modes 1 and 3. Figure 4-3 shows the reset sequence in mode 2. 67 Vector fetch Internal processing Prefetch of first program instruction o Figure 4-2 Reset Sequence (Modes 1 and 3) RES Address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal On chip data (1) (3) (5) 68 (2) (4) (6) (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) Address of reset vector: (1) = H'00000, (3) = H'00002 Start address (contents of reset vector) Start address First instruction of program Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. Vector fetch Internal processing Prefetch of first program instruction o RES Address bus (1) (3) (5) RD WR D15 to D0 High (2) (4) (6) (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) Address of reset vector: (1) = H'00000, (3) = H'00002 Start address (contents of reset vector) Start address First instruction of program Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. Figure 4-3 Reset Sequence (Mode 2) 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. The first instruction of the program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends. This instruction should initialize the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP). 69 4.3 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by nine external sources (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ4) and 21 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4-4 classifies the interrupt sources and indicates the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts are the watchdog timer (WDT), 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), serial communication interface (SCI), and A/D converter. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller can assign interrupts other than NMI to two priority levels, and arbitrate between simultaneous interrupts. Interrupt priorities are assigned in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB) in the interrupt controller. For details on interrupts see section 5, Interrupt Controller. External interrupts Interrupts NMI (1) IRQ 0 to IRQ 4 (5) Internal interrupts WDT* (1) ITU (15) SCI (4) A/D converter (1) Note: Numbers in parentheses are the number of interrupt sources. * When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at every counter overflow. Figure 4-4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts 70 4.4 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. If the UE bit is set to 1 in the system control register (SYSCR), the exception handling sequence sets the I bit to 1 in CCR. If the UE bit is 0, the I and UI bits are both set to 1. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, which is specified in the instruction code. 71 4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4-5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR CCR * PC H PC L Even address Before exception handling Save on stack a. Normal mode After exception handling SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR PC E PC H PC L Even address Before exception handling Save on stack b. Advanced mode Legend PCE: Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC) PCH: Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC) PCL: Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC) CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer After exception handling Notes: * Ignored upon return. 1. This is the address of the first instruction executed after return. 2. Saving and restoring of registers must be conducted at even addresses in word-size or longword-size units. Figure 4-5 Stack after Completion of Exception Handling 72 4.6 Notes on Stack Usage When accessing word data or longword data, the H8/3032 Series regards the lowest address bit as 0. The stack should always be accessed by word access or longword access, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W Rn POP.L ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4-6 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. CCR SP PC SP RIL H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB PC H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD H'FFFEFF SP TRAPA instruction executed MOV. B RIL, @-ER7 SP set to H'FFFEFF Legend CCR: Condition code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Data saved above SP CCR contents lost Note: The diagram illustrates modes 1 and 3. Figure 4-6 Operation when SP Value is Odd 73 74 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 Overview 5.1.1 Features The interrupt controller has the following features: * Interrupt priority registers (IPRs) for setting interrupt priorities Interrupts other than NMI can be assigned to two priority levels on a module-by-module basis in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB). * * Three-level masking by the I and UI bits in the CPU condition code register (CCR) Independent vector addresses All interrupts are independently vectored; the interrupt service routine does not have to identify the interrupt source. * Six external interrupt pins NMI has the highest priority and is always accepted; either the rising or falling edge can be selected. For each of IRQ0 to IRQ4, sensing of the falling edge or level sensing can be selected independently. 75 5.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 5-1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. CPU ISCR NMI input IRQ input OVF TME . . . . . . . ADI ADIE IRQ input section ISR Priority decision logic IER IPRA, IPRB Interrupt request Vector number . . . I Interrupt controller UE SYSCR Legend I: IER: IPRA: IPRB: ISCR: ISR: SYSCR: UE: UI: Interrupt mask bit IRQ enable register Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B IRQ sense control register IRQ status register System control register User bit enable User bit/interrupt mask bit UI CCR Figure 5-1 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram 76 5.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 5-1 lists the interrupt pins. Table 5-1 Interrupt Pins Name Nonmaskable interrupt Abbreviation NMI I/O Input Input Function Nonmaskable interrupt, rising edge or falling edge selectable Maskable interrupts, falling edge or level sensing selectable External interrupt request 4 to 0 IRQ4 to IRQ0 5.1.4 Register Configuration Table 5-2 lists the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 5-2 Interrupt Controller Registers Address*1 H'FFF2 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 H'FFF8 H'FFF9 Name System control register IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B Abbreviation SYSCR ISCR IER ISR IPRA IPRB R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W Initial Value H'0B H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 77 5.2 Register Descriptions 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls software standby mode, selects the action of the UI bit in CCR, selects the NMI edge, and enables or disables the on-chip RAM. Only bits 3 and 2 are described here. For the other bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'0B by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Reserved bit Standby timer select 2 to 0 Software standby NMI edge select Selects the NMI input edge User bit enable Selects whether to use CCR bit 6 as a user bit or interrupt mask bit 78 Bit 3--User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. Bit 3 UE 0 1 Description UI bit in CCR is used as interrupt mask bit UI bit in CCR is used as user bit (Initial value) Bit 2--NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the NMI input edge. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description Interrupt is requested at falling edge of NMI input Interrupt is requested at rising edge of NMI input (Initial value) 5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB) IPRA and IPRB are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control interrupt priority. 79 Interrupt Priority Register A (IPRA): IPRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRA7 0 R/W 6 IPRA6 0 R/W 5 IPRA5 0 R/W 4 IPRA4 0 R/W 3 IPRA3 0 R/W 2 IPRA2 0 R/W 1 IPRA1 0 R/W 0 IPRA0 0 R/W Priority level A0 Selects the priority level of ITU channel 2 interrupt requests Priority level A1 Selects the priority level of ITU channel 1 interrupt requests Priority level A2 Selects the priority level of ITU channel 0 interrupt requests Priority level A3 Selects the priority level of WDT interrupt requests Priority level A4 Selects the priority level of IRQ4 interrupt requests Priority level A5 Selects the priority level of IRQ 2 and IRQ 3 interrupt requests Priority level A6 Selects the priority level of IRQ1 interrupt requests Priority level A7 Selects the priority level of IRQ 0 interrupt requests IPRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 80 Bit 7--Priority Level A7 (IPRA7): Selects the priority level of IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit 7 IPRA7 0 1 Description IRQ0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 6--Priority Level A6 (IPRA6): Selects the priority level of IRQ1 interrupt requests. Bit 6 IPRA6 0 1 Description IRQ1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 5--Priority Level A5 (IPRA5): Selects the priority level of IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests. Bit 5 IPRA5 0 1 Description IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 4--Priority Level A4 (IPRA4): Selects the priority level of IRQ4 interrupt requests. Bit 4 IPRA4 0 1 Description IRQ4 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ4 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) 81 Bit 3--Priority Level A3 (IPRA3): Selects the priority level of WDT interrupt requests. Bit 3 IPRA3 0 1 Description WDT interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) WDT interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 2--Priority Level A2 (IPRA2): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 0 interrupt requests. Bit 2 IPRA2 0 1 Description ITU channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) ITU channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 1--Priority Level A1 (IPRA1): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 1 interrupt requests. Bit 1 IPRA1 0 1 Description ITU channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) ITU channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 0--Priority Level A0 (IPRA0): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 2 interrupt requests. Bit 0 IPRA0 0 1 Description ITU channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) ITU channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) 82 Interrupt Priority Register B (IPRB): IPRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRB7 0 R/W 6 IPRB6 0 R/W 5 -- 0 R/W 4 -- 0 R/W 3 IPRB3 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 IPRB1 0 R/W 0 -- 0 R/W Reserved bit Priority level B1 Selects the priority level of A/D converter interrupt request Reserved bit Priority level B3 Selects the priority level of SCI channel 0 interrupt requests Reserved bits Priority level B6 Selects the priority level of ITU channel 4 interrupt requests Priority level B7 Selects the priority level of ITU channel 3 interrupt requests IPRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 83 Bit 7--Priority Level B7 (IPRB7): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 3 interrupt requests. Bit 7 IPRB7 0 1 Description ITU channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) ITU channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 6--Priority Level B6 (IPRB6): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 4 interrupt requests. Bit 6 IPRB6 0 1 Description ITU channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) ITU channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. Bit 3--Priority Level B3 (IPRB3): Selects the priority level of SCI interrupt requests. Bit 3 IPRB3 0 1 Description SCI interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) SCI interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 2--Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. Bit 1--Priority Level B1 (IPRB1): Selects the priority level of A/D converter interrupt requests. Bit 1 IPRB1 0 1 Description A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 0--Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. 84 5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupt requests. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/(W)* 6 -- 0 R/(W)* 5 -- 0 R/(W)* 4 IRQ4F 0 R/(W)* 3 IRQ3F 0 R/(W)* 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* 1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* Reserved bits IRQ 4 to IRQ0 flags These bits indicate IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupt request status Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0. Bits 4 to 0--IRQ4 to IRQ0 Flags (IRQ4F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bits 4 to 0 IRQ4F to IRQ0F 0 Description [Clearing conditions] (Initial value) 0 is written in IRQnF after reading the IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1. IRQnSC = 0, IRQn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is carried out. [Setting conditions] IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn input changes from high to low. 1 Note: n = 4 to 0 85 5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER) IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupt requests. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/W 6 -- 0 R/W Reserved bits 5 -- 0 R/W 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ 4 to IRQ0 enable These bits enable or disable IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupts IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not enable or disable interrupts. Bits 4 to 0--IRQ4 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ7E to IRQ0E): These bits enable or disable IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupts. Bits 4 to 0 IRQ4E to IRQ0E 0 1 Description IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupts are disabled IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupts are enabled (Initial value) 86 5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR) ISCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects level sensing or falling-edge sensing of the inputs at pins IRQ4 to IRQ0. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/W 6 -- 0 R/W Reserved bit 5 -- 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC IRQ 4 to IRQ0 sense control These bits select level sensing or falling-edge sensing for IRQ4 to IRQ0 interrupts ISCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not select level or fallingedge sensing. Bits 4 to 0--IRQ4 to IRQ0 Sense Control (IRQ4SC to IRQ0SC): These bits selects whether interrupts IRQ4 to IRQ0 are requested by level sensing of pins IRQ4 to IRQ0, or by falling-edge sensing. Bits 4 to 0 IRQ4SC to IRQ0SC 0 1 Description Interrupts are requested when IRQ4 to IRQ0 inputs are low Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ4 to IRQ0 (Initial value) 87 5.3 Interrupt Sources The interrupt sources include external interrupts (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ4) and 21 internal interrupts. 5.3.1 External Interrupts There are six external interrupts: NMI, and IRQ0 to IRQ4. Of these, NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2 can be used to exit software standby mode. NMI: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted, regardless of the states of the I and UI bits in CCR. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR selects whether an interrupt is requested by the rising or falling edge of the input at the NMI pin. NMI interrupt exception handling has vector number 7. IRQ0 to IRQ4 Interrupts: These interrupts are requested by input signals at pins IRQ0 to IRQ4. The IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupts have the following features. * ISCR settings can select whether an interrupt is requested by the low level of the input at pins IRQ0 to IRQ4, or by the falling edge. IER settings can enable or disable the IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupts. Interrupt priority levels can be assigned by four bits in IPRA (IPRA7 to IPRA4). The status of IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupt requests is indicated in ISR. The ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. * * Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4. IRQnSC IRQnF Edge/level sense circuit IRQn input S R Clear signal Note: n = 4 to 0 Q IRQnE IRQn interrupt request Figure 5-2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4 88 Figure 5-3 shows the timing of the setting of the interrupt flags (IRQnF). o IRQn input pin IRQnF Figure 5-3 Timing of Setting of IRQnF Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4 have vector numbers 12 to 16. These interrupts are detected regardless of whether the corresponding pin is set for input or output. When using a pin for external interrupt input, clear its DDR bit to 0 and do not use the pin for chip select output, refresh output, or SCI input or output. 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts Twenty-one internal interrupts are requested from the on-chip supporting modules. * Each on-chip supporting module has status flags for indicating interrupt status, and enable bits for enabling or disabling interrupts. Interrupt priority levels can be assigned in IPRA and IPRB. * 5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table Table 5-3 lists the interrupt sources, their vector addresses, and their default priority order. In the default priority order, smaller vector numbers have higher priority. The priority of interrupts other than NMI can be changed in IPRA and IPRB. The priority order after a reset is the default order shown in table 5-3. 89 Table 5-3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority Vector Address* Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 Reserved -- Origin External pins Vector Number 7 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 WOVI (interval timer) Reserved Watchdog timer 20 -- 21 22 23 IMIA0 (compare match/ input capture A0) IMIB0 (compare match/ input capture B0) OVI0 (overflow 0) Reserved IMIA1 (compare match/ input capture A1) IMIB1 (compare match/ input capture B1) OVI1 (overflow 1) Reserved IMIA2 (compare match/ input capture A2) IMIB2 (compare match/ input capture B2) OVI2 (overflow 2) Reserved -- -- ITU channel 2 -- ITU channel 1 ITU channel 0 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Advanced Mode H'001C to H'001F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'0064 to H'0067 H'0068 to H'006B H'006C to H'006F H'0070 to H'0073 H'0074 to H'0077 H'0078 to H'007B H'007C to H'007F H'0080 to H'0083 H'0084 to H'0087 H'0088 to H'008B H'008C to H'008F Normal Mode IPR Priority High H'000E to H'000F -- H'0018 to H'0019 IPRA7 H'001A to H'001B IPRA6 H'001C to H'001D IPRA5 H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B H'002C to H'002D H'002E to H'002F H'0030 to H'0031 H'0032 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0035 H'0036 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'0039 H'003A to H'003B H'003C to H'003D H'003E to H'003F H'0040 to H'0041 H'0042 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0045 H'0046 to H'0047 IPRA0 IPRA1 IPRA2 IPRA3 IPRA4 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 90 Table 5-3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority (cont) Vector Address* Interrupt Source IMIA3 (compare match/ input capture A3) IMIB3 (compare match/ input capture B3) OVI3 (overflow 3) Reserved IMIA4 (compare match/ input capture A4) IMIB4 (compare match/ input capture B4) OVI4 (overflow 4) Reserved Reserved -- -- -- ITU channel 4 Origin ITU channel 3 Vector Number 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 ERI0 (receive error) RXI0 (receive data full) TXI0 (transmit data empty) TEI0 (transmit end) Reserved -- SCI 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 ADI (A/D end) A/D 60 Advanced Mode H'0090 to H'0093 H'0094 to H'0097 H'0098 to H'009B H'009C to H'009F H'00A0 to H'00A3 H'00A4 to H'00A7 H'00A8 to H'00AB Normal Mode H'0048 to H'0049 H'004A to H'004B H'004C to H'004D H'004E to H'004F H'0050 to H'0051 H'0052 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0055 IPRB6 IPR IPRB7 Priority H'00AC to H'00AF H'0056 to H'0057 H'00B0 to H'00B3 H'00B4 to H'00B7 H'00B8 to H'00BB H'0058 to H'0059 H'005A to H'005B H'005C to H'005D -- H'00BC to H'00BF H'005E to H'005F H'00C0 to H'00C3 H'00C4 to H'00C7 H'0060 to H'0061 H'0062 to H'0063 H'00C8 to H'00CB H'0064 to H'0065 H'00CC to H'00CF H'0066 to H'0067 H'00D0 to H'00D3 H'00D4 to H'00D7 H'0068 to H'0069 H'006A to H'006B IPRB3 H'00D8 to H'00DB H'006C to H'006D H'00DC to H'00DF H'006E to H'006F H'00E0 to H'00E3 H'00E4 to H'00E7 H'00E8 to H'00EB H'0070 to H'0071 H'0072 to H'0073 H'0074 to H'0075 IPRB2 H'00EC to H'00EF H'0076 to H'0077 H'00F0 to H'00F3 H'0078 to H'0079 IPRB1 Low Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 91 5.4 Interrupt Operation 5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Process The H8/3032 Series handles interrupts differently depending on the setting of the UE bit. When UE = 1, interrupts are controlled by the I bit. When UE = 0, interrupts are controlled by the I and UI bits. Table 5-4 indicates how interrupts are handled for all setting combinations of the UE, I, and UI bits. NMI interrupts are always accepted except in the reset and hardware standby states. IRQ interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules have their own enable bits. Interrupt requests are ignored when the enable bits are cleared to 0. Table 5-4 UE, I, and UI Bit Settings and Interrupt Handling SYSCR UE 1 I 0 1 0 0 1 CCR UI -- -- -- 0 1 Description All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. No interrupts are accepted except NMI. All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted. No interrupts are accepted except NMI. UE = 1: Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ4 and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules can all be masked by the I bit in the CPU's CCR. Interrupts are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and unmasked when the I bit is cleared to 0. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. Figure 5-4 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 1. 92 Program execution state No Interrupt requested? Yes Yes NMI No No Priority level 1? Yes No No Pending IRQ 0 Yes IRQ 0 No Yes IRQ 1 Yes IRQ 1 Yes No ADI Yes ADI Yes No I=0 Yes Save PC and CCR I 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt service routine Figure 5-4 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 1 93 * If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highestpriority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3. The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI is accepted; other interrupt requests are held pending. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. Next the I bit is set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI. The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. * * * * * * UE = 0: The I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR and the IPR bits enable three-level masking of IRQ0 to IRQ4 interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules. * Interrupt requests with priority level 0 are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and are unmasked when the I bit is cleared to 0. Interrupt requests with priority level 1 are masked when the I and UI bits are both set to 1, and are unmasked when either the I bit or the UI bit is cleared to 0. For example, if the interrupt enable bits of all interrupt requests are set to 1, IPRA is set to H'20, and IPRB is set to H'00 (giving IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests priority over other interrupts), interrupts are masked as follows: a. If I = 0, all interrupts are unmasked (priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IRQ3 >IRQ0 ...). b. If I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, IRQ2, and IRQ3 are unmasked. c. If I = 1 and UI = 1, all interrupts are masked except NMI. * 94 Figure 5-5 shows the transitions among the above states. I0 a. All interrupts are unmasked I 1, UI 0 b. Only NMI, IRQ 2 , and IRQ 3 are unmasked I0 Exception handling, or I 1, UI 1 UI 0 Exception handling, or UI 1 c. All interrupts are masked except NMI Figure 5-5 Interrupt Masking State Transitions (Example) Figure 5-6 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 0. * If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highestpriority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3. The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted regardless of its IPR setting, and regardless of the UI bit. If the I bit is set to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0, only NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted; interrupt requests with priority level 0 are held pending. If the I bit and UI bit are both set to 1, only NMI is accepted; all other interrupt requests are held pending. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. The I and UI bits are set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI. The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. 95 * * * * * * Program execution state No Interrupt requested? Yes Yes NMI No No Priority level 1? Yes No No Pending IRQ 0 Yes IRQ 0 No Yes IRQ 1 Yes IRQ 1 Yes No ADI Yes ADI Yes No I=0 Yes No UI = 0 Yes I=0 Yes No Save PC and CCR I 1, UI 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt service routine Figure 5-6 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 0 96 Figure 5-7 shows the interrupt sequence in mode 1 when the program code and stack are in an on-chip memory area. 5.4.2 Interrupt Sequence Interrupt accepted Interrupt level decision and wait for end of instruction Instruction Internal prefetch processing Prefetch of interrupt Internal service routine processing instruction Figure 5-7 Interrupt Sequence (Mode 2, Stack in External Memory) Stack Vector fetch o Interrupt request signal A19 to A 0 Internal read signal Internal write signal On-chip data (2) High (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) 97 (1) Instruction prefetch address (not executed; return address, same as PC contents) (2), (4) Instruction code (not executed) (3) Instruction prefetch address (not executed) (5) SP - 2 (7) SP - 4 (6), (8) PC and CCR saved to stack (9), (11) Vector address (10), (12) Starting address of interrupt service routine (contents of vector address) (13) Starting address of interrupt service routine; (13) = (10), (12) (14) First instruction of interrupt service routine Note: Mode 1, with program code and stack in on-chip memory area. 5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time Table 5-5 indicates the interrupt response time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed. Table 5-5 Interrupt Response Time External Memory On-Chip Memory 2*1 1 to 23 4 4 4 4 19 to 41 8-Bit Bus 2 States 2*1 1 to 27 8 8 8 4 31 to 57 3 States 2*1 1 to 31*4 12*4 12*4 12*4 4 43 to 73 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total Item Interrupt priority decision Maximum number of states until end of current instruction Saving PC and CCR to stack Vector fetch Instruction prefetch*2 Internal processing*3 Notes: 1. 1 state for internal interrupts. 2. Prefetch after the interrupt is accepted and prefetch of the first instruction in the interrupt service routine. 3. Internal processing after the interrupt is accepted and internal processing after prefetch. 4. The number of states increases if wait states are inserted in external memory access. 98 5.5 Usage Notes 5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction When an instruction clears an interrupt enable bit to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt is not disabled until after execution of the instruction is completed. If an interrupt occurs while a BCLR, MOV, or other instruction is being executed to clear its interrupt enable bit to 0, at the instant when execution of the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so its interrupt exception handling is carried out. If a higher-priority interrupt is also requested, however, interrupt exception handling for the higher-priority interrupt is carried out, and the lower-priority interrupt is ignored. This also applies to the clearing of an interrupt flag. Figure 5-8 shows an example in which an IMIEA bit is cleared to 0 in the ITU. TIER write cycle by CPU o Internal address bus Internal write signal IMIEA IMIA exception handling TIER address IMIA IMFA interrupt signal Figure 5-8 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction This type of contention will not occur if the interrupt is masked when the interrupt enable bit or flag is cleared to 0. 99 5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts The LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions inhibit interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, after determining the interrupt priority, the interrupt controller requests a CPU interrupt. If the CPU is currently executing one of these interrupt-inhibiting instructions, however, when the instruction is completed the CPU always continues by executing the next instruction. 5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution The EEPMOV.B and EEPMOV.W instructions differ in their reaction to interrupt requests. When the EEPMOV.B instruction is executing a transfer, no interrupts are accepted until the transfer is completed, not even NMI. When the EEPMOV.W instruction is executing a transfer, interrupt requests other than NMI are not accepted until the transfer is completed. If NMI is requested, NMI exception handling starts at a transfer cycle boundary. The PC value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction. Programs should be coded as follows to allow for NMI interrupts during EEPMOV.W execution: L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W R4,R4 BNE L1 100 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has an on-chip bus controller that divides the external address space into eight areas and can assign different bus specifications to each. This enables different types of memory to be connected easily. A bus arbitration function of the bus controller controls the operation of the DMA controller (DMAC) and refresh controller. The bus controller can also release the bus to an external device. 6.1.1 Features Features of the bus controller are listed below. * Independent settings for address areas 0 to 7 -- 128-kbyte areas in 1-Mbyte mode. -- Areas can be designated for two-state or three-state access. * Four wait modes -- Programmable wait mode, pin auto-wait mode, and pin wait modes 0 and 1 can be selected. -- Zero to three wait states can be inserted automatically. 101 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. Internal address bus ASTCR Area decoder WCER Internal data bus Bus control circuit Internal signals Access state control signal Wait request signal WAIT Wait-state controller WCR Legend ASTCR: Access state control register WCER: Wait state controller enable register WCR: Wait control register Figure 6-1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller 102 6.1.3 Input/Output Pins Table 6-1 summarizes the bus controller's input/output pins. Table 6-1 Bus Controller Pins Name Address strobe Read Write Wait Abbreviation AS RD WR WAIT I/O Output Output Output Input Function Strobe signal indicating valid address output on the address bus Strobe signal indicating reading from the external address space Strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the data bus Wait request signal for access to external threestate-access areas 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6-2 summarizes the bus controller's registers. Table 6-2 Bus Controller Registers Address* H'FFED H'FFEE H'FFEF Name Access state control register Wait control register Wait state controller enable register Abbreviation ASTCR WCR WCER R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'FF H'F3 H'FF Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 103 6.2 Register Descriptions 6.2.1 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether each area is accessed in two states or three states. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 AST7 1 R/W 6 AST6 1 R/W 5 AST5 1 R/W 4 AST4 1 R/W 3 AST3 1 R/W 2 AST2 1 R/W 1 AST1 1 R/W 0 AST0 1 R/W Bits selecting number of states for access to each area ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the corresponding area is accessed in two or three states. Bits 7 to 0 AST7 to AST0 0 1 Description Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in two states Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in three states (Initial value) ASTCR specifies the number of states in which external areas are accessed. On-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on ASTCR settings. 104 6.2.2 Wait Control Register (WCR) WCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the wait mode for the wait-state controller (WSC) and specifies the number of wait states. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 WMS1 0 R/W 2 WMS2 0 R/W 1 WC1 1 R/W 0 WC0 1 R/W Reserved bits Wait count 1/0 These bits select the number of wait states inserted Wait mode select 1/0 These bits select the wait mode WCR is initialized to H'F3 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bits 3 and 2--Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1/0): These bits select the wait mode. Bit 3 WMS1 0 Bit 2 WMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Programmable wait mode No wait states inserted by wait-state controller Pin wait mode 1 Pin auto-wait mode (Initial value) 105 Bits 1 and 0--Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1/0): These bits select the number of wait states inserted in access to external three-state-access areas. Bit 1 WC1 0 Bit 0 WC0 0 1 1 0 1 Description No wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 state inserted 2 states inserted 3 states inserted (Initial value) 6.2.3 Wait State Controller Enable Register (WCER) WCER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables wait-state control of external three-state-access areas by the wait-state controller. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 WCE7 1 R/W 6 WCE6 1 R/W 5 WCE5 1 R/W 4 WCE4 1 R/W 3 WCE3 1 R/W 2 WCE2 1 R/W 1 WCE1 1 R/W 0 WCE0 1 R/W Wait state controller enable 7 to 0 These bits enable or disable wait-state control WCER is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Wait-State Controller Enable 7 to 0 (WCE7 to WCE0): These bits enable or disable wait-state control of external three-state-access areas. Bits 7 to 0 WCE7 to WCE0 0 1 Description Wait-state control disabled (pin wait mode 0) Wait-state control enabled (Initial value) 106 6.3 Operation 6.3.1 Area Division The external address space is divided into areas 0 to 7. Each area has a size of 128 kbytes in the 1-Mbyte mode. Figure 6-2 shows a general view of the memory map. H'00000 H'1FFFF H'20000 On-chip ROM*1 Area 0 (128 kbytes) Area 1 (128 kbytes) H'3FFFF H'40000 Area 2 (128 kbytes) H'5FFFF H'60000 Area 3 (128 kbytes) H'7FFFF H'80000 Area 4 (128 kbytes) H'9FFFF H'A0000 Area 5 (128 kbytes) H'BFFFF H'C0000 Area 6 (128 kbytes) H'DFFFF H'E0000 Area 7 (128 kbytes) On-chip RAM*1, *2 External address space*3 H'FFFFF On-chip I/O registers*1 1-Mbyte mode (mode 1) Notes: There is no area division in modes 2 and 3. 1. The number of access states to on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and on-chip I/O registers is fixed. 2. This area follows area 7 specifications when the RAME bit in SYSCR is 0. 3. This area follows area 7 specifications. Figure 6-2 Access Area Map 107 The bus specifications for each area can be selected in ASTCR, WCER, and WCR as shown in table 6-3. Table 6-3 Bus Specifications ASTCR ASTn 0 1 WCER WCEn -- 0 1 WCR WMS1 -- -- 0 WMS0 -- -- 0 1 1 0 1 Note: n = 0 to 7 Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 Bus Specifications Access States 2 3 3 3 3 3 Wait Mode Disabled Pin wait mode 0 Programmable wait mode Disabled Pin wait mode 1 Pin auto-wait mode 108 6.3.2 Bus Control Signal Timing 8-Bit, Three-State-Access Areas: Figure 6-3 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, three-state-access area. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 o T2 T3 Address bus External address AS RD Read access D7 to D0 Valid WR Write access D7 to D0 Valid Figure 6-3 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Three-State-Access Area 109 8-Bit, Two-State-Access Areas: Figure 6-4 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, two-state-access area. Wait status cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T1 o T2 Address bus External address AS RD Read access D7 to D0 Valid WR Write access D7 to D0 Valid Figure 6-4 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Two-State-Access Area 110 6.3.3 Wait Modes Four wait modes can be selected for each area as shown in table 6-4. Table 6-4 Wait Mode Selection ASTCR WCER WCR Wait Mode No wait states Pin wait mode 0 Programmable wait mode No wait states Pin wait mode 1 Pin auto-wait mode ASTn Bit WCEn Bit WMS1 Bit WMS0 Bit WSC Control 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 -- -- 0 1 1 0 1 Note: n = 7 to 0 Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled The ASTn and WCEn bits can be set independently for each area. Bits WMS1 and WMS0 apply to all areas. All areas for which WSC control is enabled operate in the same wait mode. 111 Pin Wait Mode 0: The wait state controller is disabled. Wait states can only be inserted by WAIT pin control. During access to an external three-state-access area, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (o) in the T2 state, a wait state (TW) is inserted. If the WAIT pin remains low, wait states continue to be inserted until the WAIT signal goes high. Figure 6-5 shows the timing. Inserted by WAIT signal T1 o T2 TW TW T3 * * * WAIT pin Address bus AS RD Read access Data bus WR Write access Data bus Note: * Arrows indicate time of sampling of the WAIT pin. Write data Read data External address Figure 6-5 Pin Wait Mode 0 112 Pin Wait Mode 1: In all accesses to external three-state-access areas, the number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. If the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (o) in the last of these wait states, an additional wait state is inserted. If the WAIT pin remains low, wait states continue to be inserted until the WAIT signal goes high. Pin wait mode 1 is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for inserting different numbers of wait states for different external devices. If the wait count is 0, this mode operates in the same way as pin wait mode 0. Figure 6-6 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1) and one additional wait state is inserted by WAIT input. Inserted by wait count T1 o T2 TW Inserted by WAIT signal TW T3 * * WAIT pin Address bus AS RD Read data Data bus WR Write access Data bus Note: * Arrows indicate time of sampling of the WAIT pin. Write data External address Read access Figure 6-6 Pin Wait Mode 1 113 Pin Auto-Wait Mode: If the WAIT pin is low, the number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. In pin auto-wait mode, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (o) in the T2 state, the number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. No additional wait states are inserted even if the WAIT pin remains low. Figure 6-7 shows the timing when the wait count is 1. T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 TW T3 o * * WAIT Address bus External address External address AS RD Read access Data bus Read data Read data WR Write access Data bus Write data Write data Note: * Arrows indicate time of sampling of the WAIT pin. Figure 6-7 Pin Auto-Wait Mode 114 Programmable Wait Mode: The number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted in all accesses to external three-state-access areas. Figure 6-8 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1). T1 T2 TW T3 o Address bus External address AS RD Read access Data bus Read data WR Write access Data bus Write data Figure 6-8 Programmable Wait Mode 115 Example of Wait State Control Settings: A reset initializes ASTCR and WCER to H'FF and WCR to H'F3, selecting programmable wait mode and three wait states for all areas. Software can select other wait modes for individual areas by modifying the ASTCR, WCER, and WCR settings. Figure 6-9 shows an example of wait mode settings. Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 3-state-access area, programmable wait mode 3-state-access area, programmable wait mode 3-state-access area, pin wait mode 0 3-state-access area, pin wait mode 0 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted Bit: ASTCR H'0F: 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 WCER H'33: 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 WCR H'F3: -- -- -- -- 0 0 1 1 Note: Wait states cannot be inserted in areas designated for two-state access by ASTCR. Figure 6-9 Wait Mode Settings (Example) 116 6.3.4 Interconnections with Memory (Example) For each area, the bus controller can select two- or three-state access. In three-state-access areas, wait states can be inserted in a variety of modes, simplifying the connection of both high-speed and low-speed devices. Figure 6-10 shows an example of interconnections between the H8/3032 Series and memory. Figure 6-10 shows a memory map for this example. A 32-kword x 8-bit EPROM is connected to area 0. This device is accessed in three states via a 8bit bus. Two 32-kword x 8-bit SRAM devices (SRAM1 and SRAM2) are connected to area 1. These devices are accessed in two states via a 8-bit bus. One 32-kword x 8-bit SRAM (SRAM3) is connected to area 7. This device is accessed via an 8-bit bus, using three-state access with an additional wait state inserted in pin auto-wait mode. H'00000 On-chip ROM H'0FFFF H'10000 H'17FFF H'18000 H'1FFFF H'20000 SRAM1, 2 H'2FFFF H'30000 Not used H'3FFFF Area 1 8-bit, two-state-access area EPROM Not used Area 0 8-bit, three-state-access area H'E0000 SRAM3 H'E7FFF Not used On-chip RAM H'FFFFF On-chip I/O registers Area 7 8-bit, three-state-access area (one auto-wait state) Note: The bus width and the number of access states of the on-chip memories and registers are fixed; they cannot be changed by register setting. Figure 6-10 Memory Map (Example) 117 6.4 Usage Notes 6.4.1 Register Write Timing ASTCR and WCER Write Timing: Data written to ASTCR or WCER takes effect starting from the next bus cycle. Figure 6-11 shows the timing when an instruction fetched from area 0 changes area 0 from three-state access to two-state access. T1 o T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 Address 3-state access to area 0 ASTCR address 2-state access to area 0 Figure 6-11 ASTCR Write Timing 118 Section 7 I/O Ports 7.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has nine input/output ports (ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, A, and B) and one input port (port 7). Table 7-1 summarizes the port functions. The pins in each port are multiplexed as shown in table 7-1. Each port has a data direction register (DDR) for selecting input or output, and a data register (DR) for storing output data. In addition to these registers, ports 2, and 5 have an input pull-up control register (PCR) for switching input pull-up transistors on and off. Ports 1 to 3 and ports 5, 6, and 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. Ports 9, A, and B can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. Ports 1 to 3 and ports 5, 6, 8, 9, A, and B can drive a darlington pair. Ports 1, 2, 5, and B can drive LEDs (with 10-mA current sink). Pins P82 to P80, PA7 to PA0, and PB3 to PB0 have Schmitt-trigger input circuits. For block diagrams of the ports see appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams. 119 Table 7-1 Port Functions (1) Port Port 1 Description * 8-bit I/O port * Can drive LEDs Pins P17 to P10/ A7 to A0 Mode 1 Address output (A7 to A0) and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Address output (A15 to A8) and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Data input/output (D15 to D8) Address output (A19 to A16) and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Bus control signal output (WR, RD, AS) Bus control signal output (WAIT) and 1-bit generic input/ output Analog input (AN7 to AN0) to A/D converter, and generic input IRQ3 to IRQ0 input and 4-bit generic input/output Mode 2 Mode 3 Generic input/output Port 2 * 8-bit I/O port * Input pull-up * Can drive LEDs P27 to P20/ A15 to A8 Generic input/output Port 3 Port 5 * 8-bit I/O port * 4-bit I/O port * Input pull-up * Can drive LEDs P37 to P30/ D7 to D0 P53 to P50/ A19 to A16 Generic input/output Generic input/output Port 6 * 4-bit I/O port P65/WR, P64/RD, P63/AS P60/WAIT Generic input/output Port 7 Port 8 * 8-bit input port * 4-bit I/O port * P82 to P80 have Schmitt inputs * 3-bit I/O port P77 to P70/ AN7 to AN0 P83/IRQ3, P82/IRQ2, P81/IRQ1 P80/IRQ0 P94/SCK/IRQ4 P92/RxD, P90/TxD Port 9 Input and output (SCK) for serial communication interface (SCI), IRQ4 input, and 1-bit generic input/output Input and output (RxD and Txd) for SCI and 2-bit generic input/output 120 Table 7-1 Port Functions (1) Port Description Pins PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/, PA6/TP6/TIOCA2, PA5/TP5/TIOCB1, PA4/TP4//TIOCA1, PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/ TCLKD, PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/ TCLKC, PA1/TP1/TCLKB, PA0/TP0/TCLKA PB7/TP15/ADTRG, PB6/TP14 PB5/TP13/TOCXB4, PB4/TP12/TOCXA4, PB3/TP11/TIOCB4, PB2/TP10/TIOCA4, PB1/TP9/TIOCB3, PB0/TP8/TIOCA3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Port A * 8-bit I/O port * Schmitt inputs TPC output (TP8 to TP0), ITU input and output (TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA, TIOCB2, TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1), and generic input/output Port B * 8-bit I/O port * Can drive LEDs * PB3 to PB0 have Schmitt inputs TPC output (TP15), trigger input (ADTRG) to A/D converter, and 1-bit generic input/output TPC output (TP14) and 1-bit generic input/output TPC output (TP13 to TP8), ITU input and output (TOCXB4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCB3, TIOCA3), and TOCXA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCB3, TIOCA3), and 6-bit generic input/output 121 7.2 Port 1 7.2.1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7-1. The pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. In mode 1, they are address bus output pins (A7 to A0). In modes 2 and 3, port 1 is a generic input/output port. Pins in port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 1 pins P17 /A 7 P16 /A 6 P15 /A 5 Port 1 P14 /A 4 P13 /A 3 P12 /A 2 P11 /A 1 P10 /A 0 Modes 1 P17 (input)/A 7 (output) P16 (input)/A 6 (output) P15 (input)/A 5 (output) P14 (input)/A 4 (output) P13 (input)/A 3 (output) P12 (input)/A 2 (output) P11 (input)/A 1 (output) P10 (input)/A 0 (output) Modes 2 and 3 P17 (input/output) P16 (input/output) P15 (input/output) P14 (input/output) P13 (input/output) P12 (input/output) P11 (input/output) P10 (input/output) Figure 7-1 Port 1 Pin Configuration 122 7.2.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-2 summarizes the registers of port 1. Table 7-2 Port 1 Registers Address* H'FFC0 H'FFC2 Name Port 1 data direction register Port 1 data register Abbreviation P1DDR P1DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR): P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 1. Bit 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P1 7 DDR P1 6 DDR P1 5 DDR P1 4 DDR P1 3 DDR P1 2 DDR P1 1 DDR P1 0 DDR Initial value Read/Write Port 1 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 1 pins Mode 1: A pin in port 1 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Modes 2 and 3 (Single-Chip Modes): Port 1 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 1 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. P1DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P1DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. 123 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR): P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P17 to P10. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P17 0 R/W 6 P16 0 R/W 5 P15 0 R/W 4 P14 0 R/W 3 P13 0 R/W 2 P12 0 R/W 1 P11 0 R/W 0 P10 0 R/W Port 1 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 1 pins When a bit in P1DDR is set to 1, if port 1 is read the value of the corresponding P1DR bit is returned directly, regardless of the actual state of the pin. When a bit in P1DDR is cleared to 0, if port 1 is read the corresponding pin level is read. P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 7.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode The pin functions of port 1 differ between mode 1 and modes 2 and 3 (single-chip modes). The pin functions in each mode are described below. 124 Mode 1: Address output or generic input can be selected for each pin in port 1. A pin becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Following a reset, all pins are input pins. To use a pin for address output, its P1DDR bit must be set to 1. Figure 7-2 shows the pin functions in mode 1. When P1DDR = 1 A 7 (output) A 6 (output) A 5 (output) Port 1 A 4 (output) A 3 (output) A 2 (output) A 1 (output) A 0 (output) When P1DDR = 0 P17 (input) P16 (input) P15 (input) P14 (input) P13 (input) P12 (input) P11 (input) P10 (input) Figure 7-2 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 1) Modes 2 and 3 (Single-Chip Modes): Input or output can be selected separately for each pin in port 1. A pin becomes an output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-3 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 3. P17 (input/output) P16 (input/output) P15 (input/output) Port 1 P14 (input/output) P13 (input/output) P12 (input/output) P11 (input/output) P10 (input/output) Figure 7-3 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 3 (Port 1) 125 7.3 Port 2 7.3.1 Overview Port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7-4. The pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. In mode 1, settings in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) can designate pins for address bus output (A15 to A8) or generic input. In modes 2 and 3, port 2 is a generic input/output port. Port 2 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. Pins in port 2 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 2 pins P27 /A 15 P26 /A 14 P25 /A 13 Port 2 P24 /A 12 P23 /A 11 P22 /A 10 P21 /A 9 P20 /A 8 Mode 1 P27 (input)/A15 (output) P26 (input)/A14 (output) P25 (input)/A13 (output) P24 (input)/A12 (output) P23 (input)/A11 (output) P22 (input)/A10 (output) P21 (input)/A9 (output) P20 (input)/A8 (output) Modes 2 and 3 P27 (input/output) P26 (input/output) P25 (input/output) P24 (input/output) P23 (input/output) P22 (input/output) P21 (input/output) P20 (input/output) Figure 7-4 Port 2 Pin Configuration 126 7.3.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-3 summarizes the registers of port 2. Table 7-3 Port 2 Registers Address* H'FFC1 H'FFC3 H'FFD8 Name Port 2 data direction register Port 2 data register Port 2 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P2DDR P2DR P2PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR): P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 2. Bit 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P2 7 DDR P2 6 DDR P2 5 DDR P2 4 DDR P2 3 DDR P2 2 DDR P2 1 DDR P2 0 DDR Initial value Read/Write Port 2 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 2 pins Mode 1: A pin in port 2 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Modes 2 and 3: Port 2 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 2 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. P2DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P2DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P2DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. 127 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR): P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P27 to P20. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P2 7 0 R/W 6 P2 6 0 R/W 5 P2 5 0 R/W 4 P2 4 0 R/W 3 P2 3 0 R/W 2 P2 2 0 R/W 1 P2 1 0 R/W 0 P2 0 0 R/W Port 2 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 2 pins When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, if port 2 is read the value of the corresponding P2DR bit is returned directly, regardless of the actual state of the pin. When a bit in P2DDR is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the corresponding pin level is read. P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P2PCR): P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P2 7 PCR P2 6 PCR P2 5 PCR P2 4 PCR P2 3 PCR P2 2 PCR P2 1 PCR P2 0 PCR Port 2 input pull-up control 7 to 0 These bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 2 When a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit from P27PCR to P20PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 7.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode The pin functions of port 2 differ between mode 1 and modes 2 and 3. The pin functions in each mode are described below. 128 Mode 1: Address output or generic input can be selected for each pin in port 2. A pin becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Following a reset, all pins are input pins. To use a pin for address output, its P2DDR bit must be set to 1. Figure 7-5 shows the pin functions in mode 1. When P2DDR = 1 A 15 (output) A 14 (output) A 13 (output) Port 2 A 12 (output) A 11 (output) A 10 (output) A 9 (output) A 8 (output) When P2DDR = 0 P27 (input) P26 (input) P25 (input) P24 (input) P23 (input) P22 (input) P21 (input) P20 (input) Figure 7-5 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 2) Modes 2 and 3: Input or output can be selected separately for each pin in port 2. A pin becomes an output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-6 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 3. P27 (input/output) P26 (input/output) P25 (input/output) Port 2 P24 (input/output) P23 (input/output) P22 (input/output) P21 (input/output) P20 (input/output) Figure 7-6 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 3 (Port 2) 129 7.3.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors Port 2 has built-in MOS input pull-up transistors that can be controlled by software. These input pull-up transistors can be turned on and off individually. When a P2PCR bit is set to 1 and the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. The input pull-up transistors are turned off by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode they retain their previous state. Table 7-4 summarizes the states of the input pull-up transistors in each mode. Table 7-4 Input Pull-Up Transistor States (Port 2) Mode 1 2 3 Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/off Other Modes On/off Legend Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P2PCR = 1 and P2DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off. 130 7.4 Port 3 7.4.1 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7-7. Port 3 is a data bus in mode 1 and a generic input/output port in modes 2 and 3. Pins in port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 3 pins P37 /D7 P36 /D6 P35 /D5 Port 3 P34 /D4 P33 /D3 P32 /D2 P31 /D1 P30 /D0 Mode 1 D7 (input/output) D6 (input/output) D5 (input/output) D4 (input/output) D3 (input/output) D2 (input/output) D1 (input/output) D0 (input/output) Modes 2 and 3 P37 (input/output) P36 (input/output) P35 (input/output) P34 (input/output) P33 (input/output) P32 (input/output) P31 (input/output) P30 (input/output) Figure 7-7 Port 3 Pin Configuration 7.4.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-5 summarizes the registers of port 3. Table 7-5 Port 3 Registers Address* H'FFC4 H'FFC6 Name Port 3 data direction register Port 3 data register Abbreviation P3DDR P3DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 131 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR): P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 3. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P3 7 DDR P3 6 DDR P3 5 DDR P3 4 DDR P3 3 DDR P3 2 DDR P3 1 DDR P3 0 DDR Port 3 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 3 pins Mode 1: Port 3 functions as a data bus. P3DDR is ignored. Modes 2 and 3: Port 3 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 3 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P3DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. P3DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P3DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR): P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P37 to P30. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P3 7 0 R/W 6 P3 6 0 R/W 5 P3 5 0 R/W 4 P3 4 0 R/W 3 P3 3 0 R/W 2 P3 2 0 R/W 1 P3 1 0 R/W 0 P3 0 0 R/W Port 3 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 3 pins When a bit in P3DDR is set to 1, if port 3 is read the value of the corresponding P3DR bit is returned directly, regardless of the actual state of the pin. When a bit in P3DDR is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the corresponding pin level is read. P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 132 7.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode The pin functions of port 3 differ between modes 1 and modes 2 and 3. The pin functions in each mode are described below. Mode 1: All pins of port 3 automatically become data input/output pins. Figure 7-8 shows the pin functions in mode 1. D7 (input/output) D6 (input/output) D5 (input/output) Port 3 D4 (input/output) D3 (input/output) D2 (input/output) D1 (input/output) D0 (input/output) Figure 7-8 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 3) Modes 2 and 3: Input or output can be selected separately for each pin in port 3. A pin becomes an output pin if the corresponding P3DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-9 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 3. P3 7 (input/output) P3 6 (input/output) P3 5 (input/output) Port 3 P3 4 (input/output) P3 3 (input/output) P3 2 (input/output) P3 1 (input/output) P3 0 (input/output) Figure 7-9 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 3 (Port 3) 133 7.5 Port 5 7.5.1 Overview Port 5 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7-10. The pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. In mode 1, settings in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR) designate pins for address bus output (A19 to A16) or generic input. In modes 2 and 3, port 5 is a generic input/output port. Port 5 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. Pins in port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a LED or a darlington transistor pair. Port 5 pins P53 /A 19 Port 5 P52 /A 18 P51 /A 17 P50 /A 16 Mode 1 P5 3 (input)/A19 (output) P5 2 (input)/A18 (output) P5 1 (input)/A17 (output) P5 0 (input)/A16 (output) Modes 2 and 3 P5 3 (input/output) P5 2 (input/output) P5 1 (input/output) P5 0 (input/output) Figure 7-10 Port 5 Pin Configuration 7.5.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-6 summarizes the registers of port 5. Table 7-6 Port 5 Registers Address* H'FFC8 H'FFCA H'FFDB Name Port 5 data direction register Port 5 data register Port 5 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P5DDR P5DR P5PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'F0 H'F0 H'F0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 134 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR): P5DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 5. 7 Bit Initial value Read/Write -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P5 3 DDR P5 2 DDR P5 1 DDR P5 0 DDR Port 5 data direction 3 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 5 pins Mode 1: A pin in port 5 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Modes 2 and 3: Port 5 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 5 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. P5DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P5DDR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P5DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. Port 5 Data Register (P5DR): P5DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P53 to P50. When a bit in P5DDR is set to 1, if port 5 is read the value of the corresponding P5DR bit is Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 P5 3 0 R/W 2 P5 2 0 R/W 1 P5 1 0 R/W 0 P5 0 0 R/W Reserved bits Port 5 data 3 to 0 These bits store data for port 5 pins returned directly, regardless of the actual state of the pin. When a bit in P5DDR is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the corresponding pin level is read. 135 Bits P57 to P54 are reserved. They can be written and read, but they cannot be used for port input or output. P5DR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Port 5 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P5PCR): P5PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 5. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P5 3 PCR P5 2 PCR P5 1 PCR P5 0 PCR Reserved bits Port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 These bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 5 When a P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit from P53PCR to P50PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. P5PCR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 136 7.5.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode The functions of port 5 differ depending on the operating mode. The pin functions in each mode are described below. Mode 1: Address output or generic input can be selected for each pin in port 5. A pin becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Following a reset, all pins are input pins. To use a pin for address output, its P5DDR must be set to 1. Figure 7-11 shows the pin functions in mode 1. When P5DDR = 1 A 19 (output) Port 5 A 18 (output) A 17 (output) A 16 (output) When P5DDR = 0 P5 3 (input) P5 2 (input) P5 1 (input) P5 0 (input) Figure 7-11 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 5) Modes 2 and 3: Input or output can be selected separately for each pin in port 5. A pin becomes an output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-12 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 3. P5 3 (input/output) Port 5 P5 2 (input/output) P5 1 (input/output) P5 0 (input/output) Figure 7-12 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 3 (Port 5) 137 7.5.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors Port 5 has built-in MOS pull-up transistors that can be controlled by software. These input pull-up transistors can be turned on and off individually. When a P5PCR bit is set to 1 and the corresponding P5DDR bit is cleared to 0, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. The input pull-up transistors are turned off by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode they retain their previous state. Table 7-7 summarizes the states of the input pull-up transistors in each mode. Table 7-7 Input Pull-Up Transistor States (Port 5) Mode 1 2 3 Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/off Other Modes On/off Legend Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P5PCR = 1 and P5DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off. 138 7.6 Port 6 7.6.1 Overview Port 6 is a 4-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output of bus control signals (WR, RD, AS, and WAIT). Figure 7-13 shows the pin configuration of port 6. In mode 1, the pin functions are WR, RD, AS, and P60/WAIT. In modes 2 and 3, port 6 is a generic input/output port. Pins in port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 6 pins P6 5 / WR Port 6 P6 4 / RD P6 3 / AS P6 0 / WAIT Modes 1 WR (output) RD (output) AS (output) P6 (input/output)/WAIT (input) Modes 2 and 3 P6 5 (input/output) P6 4 (input/output) P6 3 (input/output) P6 0 (input/output) Figure 7-13 Port 6 Pin Configuration 7.6.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-8 summarizes the registers of port 6. Table 7-8 Port 6 Registers Address* H'FFC9 H'FFCB Name Port 6 data direction register Port 6 data register Abbreviation P6DDR P6DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'80 H'80 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 139 Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR): P6DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 6. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W 0 P6 0 DDR 0 W P6 5 DDR P6 4 DDR P6 3 DDR Reserved bit Port 6 data direction 6 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 6 pins Mode 1: Pins P65 to P63 function as bus control output pins (WR, RD, AS). P60 functions as an input/output pin. When P60DDR is set to 1, P60 is an output pin, and when P60DDR is 0, P60 is an input pin. The P65DDR to P63DDR bit settings are ignored. Modes 2 and 3: Port 6 is a generic input/output port. A pin in port 6 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P6DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Bits 7, 6, 2, and 1 are reserved. P6DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P6DDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P6DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. Port 6 Data Register (P6DR): P6DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P65 to P63 and P60. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 0 R/W 5 P6 5 0 R/W 4 P6 4 0 R/W 3 P6 3 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 -- 0 R/W 0 P6 0 0 R/W Reserved bit 140 Port 6 data 5 to 3, 0 These bits store data for port 6 pins When a bit in P6DDR is set to 1, if port 6 is read the value of the corresponding P6DR bit is returned directly. When a bit in P6DDR is cleared to 0, if port 6 is read the corresponding pin level is read. Bits 7, 6, 2, and 1 are reserved. Bit 7 cannot be modified and always reads 1. Bits 6, 2, and 1 can be written and read, but cannot be used as ports. If bit 6, 2, or 1 in P6DDR is read while its value is 1, the value of the corresponding bit in P6DR will be read. If bit 6, 2, or 1 in P6DDR is read while its value is 0, if will always read 1. P6DR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 7.6.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1: P65 to P63 function as bus control output pins. P60 is either a bus control input pin or generic input/output pin, functioning as an output pin when bit P60DDR is set to 1 and an input pin when this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-14 and table 7-9 indicate the pin functions in mode 1. WR (output) Port 6 RD (output) AS (output) P60 (input/output)/WAIT (input) Figure 7-14 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 6) 141 Table 7-9 Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 1 Pin P65/WR Pin Functions and Selection Method Functions as follows regardless of P65DDR P65DDR Pin function P64/RD 0 WR output 1 Functions as follows regardless of P64DDR P64DDR Pin function 0 RD output 1 P63/AS Functions as follows regardless of P63DDR P63DDR Pin function 0 AS output 1 P60/WAIT Bits WCE7 to WCE0 in WCER, bit WMS1 in WCR, and bit P60DDR select the pin function as follows WCER WMS1 P60DDR Pin function 0 P60 input 0 1 P60 output All 1s 1 0* Not all 1s -- 0* WAIT input Note: * Do not set bit P60DDR to 1. 142 Modes 2 and 3: Input or output can be selected separately for each pin in port 6. A pin becomes an output pin if the corresponding P6DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7-15 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 3. P6 5 (input/output) Port 6 P6 4 (input/output) P6 3 (input/output) P6 0 (input/output) Figure 7-15 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 3 (Port 6) 143 7.7 Port 7 7.7.1 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit input port that is also used for analog input to the A/D converter. The pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 7-16 shows the pin configuration of port 7. Port 7 pins P77 (input)/AN 7 (input) P76 (input)/AN 6 (input) P75 (input)/AN 5 (input) Port 7 P74 (input)/AN 4 (input) P73 (input)/AN 3 (input) P72 (input)/AN 2 (input) P71 (input)/AN 1 (input) P70 (input)/AN 0 (input) Figure 7-16 Port 7 Pin Configuration 144 7.7.2 Register Description Table 7-10 summarizes the port 7 register. Port 7 is an input-only port, so it has no data direction register. Table 7-10 Port 7 Data Register Address* H'FFCE Name Port 7 data register Abbreviation P7DR R/W R Initial Value Undetermined Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 7 Data Register (P7DR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77 --* R 6 P76 --* R 5 P75 --* R 4 P74 --* R 3 P73 --* R 2 P72 --* R 1 P71 --* R 0 P70 --* R Note: * Determined by pins P7 7 to P70 . When port 7 is read, the pin levels are always read. 145 7.8 Port 8 7.8.1 Overview Port 8 is a 4-bit input/output port that is also used for IRQ3 to IRQ0 input. Figure 7-17 shows the pin configuration of port 8. Pin P80 functions as input/output pin or as an IRQ0 input pin. Pins P83 to P81 function as either input pins or IRQ3 to IRQ1 input pins in mode 1, and as input/output pins or IRQ3 to IRQ1 input pins in modes 2 and 3. Pins in port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Pins P82 to P80 have Schmitt-trigger inputs. Port 8 pins Mode 1 Modes 2 and 3 P83/IRQ3 Port 8 P82/IRQ2 P81/IRQ1 P80/IRQ0 P83 (input)/IRQ3 (input) P82 (input)/IRQ2 (input) P81 (input)/IRQ1 (input) P83 (input/output)/IRQ3 (input) P82 (input/output)/IRQ2 (input) P81 (input/output)/IRQ1 (input) P80 (input/output)/IRQ0 (input) P80 (input/output)/IRQ0 (input) Figure 7-17 Port 8 Pin Configuration 146 7.8.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-11 summarizes the registers of port 8. Table 7-11 Port 8 Registers Address* H'FFCD H'FFCF Name Port 8 data direction register Port 8 data register Abbreviation P8DDR P8DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'E0 H'E0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR): P8DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 8. 7 Bit Initial value Read/Write -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P8 3 DDR P8 2 DDR P8 1 DDR P8 0 DDR Reserved bits Port 8 data direction 3 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 8 pins * Mode 1 Pins P83 to P81 function as input pins. Do not set P83DDR to P81DDR to 1. Pin P80 functions as an output pin when P80DDR is set to 1, and as input pin when P80DDR is cleared to 0. * Modes 2 and 3 Port 8 is a generic input/output port. A pin port 8 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P8DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved bits. P8DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P8DDR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P8DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. 147 Port 8 Data Register (P8DR): P8DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P83 to P80. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 R/W 3 P8 3 0 R/W 2 P8 2 0 R/W 1 P8 1 0 R/W 0 P8 0 0 R/W Reserved bits Port 8 data 4 to 0 These bits store data for port 8 pins When a bit in P8DDR is set to 1, if port 8 is read the value of the corresponding P8DR bit is returned directly. When a bit in P8DDR is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the corresponding pin level is read. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. Bits 7 to 5 cannot be modified and always read 1. Bit 4 can be written and read, but it cannot be used for port input or output. If bit 4 of P8DDR is read while its value is 1, bit 4 of P8DR is read directly. If bit 4 of P8DDR is read while its value is 0, it always reads 1. P8DR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 7.8.3 Pin Functions The port 8 pins are also used for IRQ3 to IRQ0. Table 7-12 describes the selection of pin functions. 148 Table 7-12 Port 8 Pin Functions Pin P83/IRQ3 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit P83DDR selects the pin function as follows P83DDR Pin function 0 Mode 1 P83 input Illegal setting IRQ3 input P82/IRQ2 Bit P82DDR selects the pin function as follows P82DDR Pin function 0 Mode 1 P82 input Illegal setting IRQ2 input P81/IRQ1 Bit P81DDR selects the pin function as follows P81DDR Pin function 0 Mode 1 P81 input Illegal setting IRQ1 input P80/IRQ0 Bit P80DDR selects the pin function as follows P80DDR Pin function 0 P80 input IRQ0 input 1 P80 output 1 Modes 2 and 3 P81 output 1 Modes 2 and 3 P82 output 1 Modes 2 and 3 P83 output 149 7.9 Port 9 7.9.1 Overview Port 9 is a 3-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output (TxD, RxD, SCK) by serial communication interface (SCI), and for IRQ4 input. Port 9 has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. Figure 7-18 shows the pin configuration of port 9. Pins in port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 9 pins P94 (input/output)/SCK (input/output)/IRQ4 (input) Port 9 P92 (input/output)/RxD (input) P90 (input/output)/TxD (output) Figure 7-18 Port 9 Pin Configuration 7.9.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-13 summarizes the registers of port 9. Table 7-13 Port 9 Registers Address* H'FFD0 H'FFD2 Name Port 9 data direction register Port 9 data register Abbreviation P9DDR P9DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'C0 H'C0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 150 Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR): P9DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 9. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 W 4 P9 4 DDR 0 W 3 -- 0 W 2 P9 2 DDR 0 W 1 -- 0 W 0 P9 0 DDR 0 W Reserved bits Port 9 data direction 4, 2, 0 These bits select input or output for port 9 pins A pin in port 9 becomes an output pin if the corresponding P9DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. P9DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P9DDR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a P9DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. Port 9 Data Register (P9DR): P9DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins P94, P92, and P90. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 R/W 4 P9 4 0 R/W 3 -- 0 R/W 2 P9 2 0 R/W 1 -- 0 R/W 0 P9 0 0 R/W Reserved bits Port 9 data 4, 2, 0 These bits store data for port 9 pins When a bit in P9DDR is set to 1, if port 9 is read the value of the corresponding P9DR bit is returned directly. When a bit in P9DDR is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the corresponding pin level is read. 151 Bits 7 to 5, 3 and 1 are reserved. Bits 7 and 6 cannot be modified and always read 1. Bits 5, 3, and 1 can be written and read, but they cannot be used for port input or output. If bit 5, 3, or 1 in P9DDR is read while its value is 1, the corresponding bit in P9DR is read directly. If bit 5, 3, or 1 in P9DDR is read while its value is 0, it always reads 1. P9DR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 7.9.3 Pin Functions The port 9 pins are also used for SCI input and output (TxD, RxD, SCK), and for IRQ4 input. Table 7-14 describes the selection of pin functions. Table 7-14 Port 9 Pin Functions Pin P94/SCK/IRQ4 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit C/A in SMR of SCI, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of SCI, and bit P94DDR select the pin function as follows CKE1 C/A CKE0 P94DDR Pin function 0 0 1 0 1 -- SCK output 0 1 -- -- SCK output 1 -- -- -- SCK input P94 P94 input output IRQ4 input P92/RxD Bit RE in SCR of SCI and bit P92DDR select the pin function as follows RE P92DDR Pin function P90/TxD 0 P92 input 0 1 P92 output 1 -- RxD input Bit TE in SCR of SCI and bit P90DDR select the pin function as follows TE P90DDR Pin function 0 P90 input 0 1 P90 output 1 -- TxD output 152 7.10 Port A 7.10.1 Overview Port A is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (TP7 to TP0) from the programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) and input and output (TIOCB2, TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1, TIOCB0, TIOCA0, TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA) by the 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), Figure 7-19 shows the pin configuration of port A. Pins in port A can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port A has Schmitt-trigger inputs. Port A pins PA 7/TP7 /TIOCB2 PA 6/TP6 /TIOCA2 PA 5/TP5 /TIOCB1 PA 4/TP4 /TIOCA1 Port A PA 3/TP3 /TIOCB 0 /TCLKD PA 2/TP2 /TIOCA 0 /TCLKC PA 1/TP1 /TEND1 /TCLKB PA 0/TP0 /TEND0 /TCLKA Figure 7-19 Port A Pin Configuration 153 7.10.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-15 summarizes the registers of port A. Table 7-15 Port A Registers Address* H'FFD1 H'FFD3 Name Port A data direction register Port A data register Abbreviation PADDR PADR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR): PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port A. 7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PA7 DDR PA6 DDR PA5 DDR PA4 DDR PA3 DDR PA2 DDR PA1 DDR PA0 DDR Port A data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port A pins A pin in port A becomes an output pin if the corresponding PADDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. PADDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. PADDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a PADDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. 154 Port A Data Register (PADR): PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins PA7 to PA0. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PA 7 0 R/W 6 PA 6 0 R/W 5 PA 5 0 R/W 4 PA 4 0 R/W 3 PA 3 0 R/W 2 PA 2 0 R/W 1 PA 1 0 R/W 0 PA 0 0 R/W Port A data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port A pins When a bit in PADDR is set to 1, if port A is read the value of the corresponding PADR bit is returned directly. When a bit in PADDR is cleared to 0, if port A is read the corresponding pin level is read. PADR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. When port A pins are used for TPC output, PADR stores output data for TPC output groups 0 and 1. If a bit in the next data enable register (NDERA) is set to 1, the corresponding PADR bit cannot be written. In this case, PADR can be updated only when data is transferred from NDRA. 155 7.10.3 Pin Functions The port A pins are also used for TPC output (TP7 to TP0), ITU input/output (TIOCB2 to TIOCB0, TIOCA2 to TIOCA0), and input (TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA). Table 7-16 describes the selection of pin functions. Table 7-16 Port A Pin Functions Pin PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 2 settings (bit PWM2 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR2), bit NDER7 in NDERA, and bit PA7DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 2 settings PA7DDR NDER7 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCB2 output 0 -- PA7 input 2 in table below 1 0 PA7 output 1 1 TP7 output TIOCB2 input* Note: * TIOCB2 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM2 = 0. ITU channel 2 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 2 1 1 -- -- -- 156 Table 7-16 Port A Pin Functions (cont) Pin PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 2 settings (bit PWM2 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR2), bit NDER6 in NDERA, and bit PA6DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 2 settings PA6DDR NDER6 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCA2 output 0 -- PA6 input 2 in table below 1 0 PA6 output TIOCA2 input* Note: * TIOCA2 input when IOA2 = 1. ITU channel 2 settings PWM2 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 2 1 0 1 -- -- 2 1 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP6 output ITU channel 1 settings (bit PWM1 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR1), bit NDER5 in NDERA, and bit PA5DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 1 settings PA5DDR NDER5 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- PA5 input 2 in table below 1 0 PA5 output TIOCB1 input* Note: * TIOCB1 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM1 = 0. ITU channel 1 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 -- 1 2 1 -- -- 1 1 TP5 output 157 Table 7-16 Port A Pin Functions (cont) Pin PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 1 settings (bit PWM1 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR1), bit NDER4 in NDERA, and bit PA4DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 1 settings PA4DDR NDER4 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCA1 output 0 -- PA4 input 2 in table below 1 0 PA4 output TIOCA1 input* Note: * TIOCA1 input when IOA2 = 1. ITU channel 1 settings PWM1 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 2 1 0 1 -- -- 2 1 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP4 output ITU channel 0 settings (bit PWM0 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 to TCR0, bit NDER3 in NDERA, and bit PA3DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 0 settings PA3DDR NDER3 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCB0 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCB0 input*1 TCLKD input*2 1 1 PA3 input PA3 output TP3 output Notes: 1. TIOCB0 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM0 = 0. 2. TCLKD input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR4 to TCR0. ITU channel 0 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 -- 1 2 1 -- -- 158 Table 7-16 Port A Pin Functions (cont) Pin PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 0 settings (bit PWM0 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 to TCR0, bit NDER2 in NDERA, and bit PA2DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 0 settings PA2DDR NDER2 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCA0 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCA0 input*1 TCLKC input*2 1 1 PA2 input PA2 output TP2 output Notes: 1. TIOCA0 input when IOA2 = 1. 2. TCLKC input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = 1 and TPSC0 = 0 in any of TCR4 to TCR0. ITU channel 0 settings PWM0 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 2 1 0 1 -- -- 2 1 1 -- -- -- 159 Table 7-16 Port A Pin Functions (cont) Pin PA1/TP1/ TCLKB Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit NDER1 in NDERA and bit PA1DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows PA1DDR NDER1 Pin function 0 -- PA1 input 1 0 PA1 output TCLKB input* Note: * TCLKB input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or when TPSC2 = 1, TPSC1 = 0, and TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR4 to TCR0. PA0/TP0/ TCLKA Bit NDER0 in NDERA and bit PA0DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows PA0DDR NDER0 Pin function 0 -- PA0 input 1 0 PA0 output TCLKA input* Note: * TCLKA input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or when TPSC2 = 1 and TPSC1 = 0 in any of TCR4 to TCR0. 1 1 TP0 output 1 1 TP1 output 160 7.11 Port B 7.11.1 Overview Port B is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for TPC output (TP15 to TP8), ITU input/output (TIOCB4, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCA3) and ITU output (TOCXB4, TOCXA4), and ADTRG input to the A/D converter. Port B has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. Figure 7-20 shows the pin configuration of port B. Pins in port B can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Pins PB3 to PB0 have Schmitt-trigger inputs. Port B pins PB 7 (input/output)/TP15 (output)/ADTRG (input) PB 6 (input/output)/TP14 (output) PB 5 (input/output)/TP13 (output)/TOCXB 4 (output) PB 4 (input/output)/TP12 (output)/TOCXA 4 (output) Port B PB 3 (input/output)/TP11 (output)/TIOCB 4 (input/output) PB 2 (input/output)/TP10 (output)/TIOCA 4 (input/output) PB 1 (input/output)/TP9 (output)/TIOCB 3 (input/output) PB 0 (input/output)/TP8 (output)/TIOCA 3 (input/output) Figure 7-20 Port B Pin Configuration 7.11.2 Register Descriptions Table 7-17 summarizes the registers of port B. Table 7-17 Port B Registers Address* H'FFD4 H'FFD6 Name Port B data direction register Port B data register Abbreviation PBDDR PBDR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 161 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR): PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port B. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PB7 DDR PB6 DDR PB5 DDR PB4 DDR PB3 DDR PB2 DDR PB1 DDR PB0 DDR Port B data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port B pins A pin in port B becomes an output pin if the corresponding PBDDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. PBDDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a PBDDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. Port B Data Register (PBDR): PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores data for pins PB7 to PB0. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PB 7 0 R/W 6 PB 6 0 R/W 5 PB 5 0 R/W 4 PB 4 0 R/W 3 PB 3 0 R/W 2 PB 2 0 R/W 1 PB 1 0 R/W 0 PB 0 0 R/W Port B data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port B pins When a bit in PBDDR is set to 1, if port B is read the value of the corresponding PBDR bit is returned directly. When a bit in PBDDR is cleared to 0, if port B is read the corresponding pin level is read. PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. When port B pins are used for TPC output, PBDR stores output data for TPC output groups 2 and 3. If a bit in the next data enable register (NDERB) is set to 1, the corresponding PBDR bit cannot be written. In this case, PBDR can be updated only when data is transferred from NDRB. 162 7.11.3 Pin Functions The port B pins are also used for TPC output (TP15 to TP8), ITU input/output (TIOCB4, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCA3) and output (TOCXB4, TOCXA4), and ADTRG input. Table 7-18 describes the selection of pin functions. Table 7-18 Port B Pin Functions Pin PB7/ TP15/ ADTRG Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit TRGE in ADCR, bit NDER15 in NDERB and bit PB7DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows PB7DDR NDER15 Pin function 0 -- PB7 input 1 0 PB7 output ADTRG input* Notes: * ADTRG input when TRGE = 1. PB6/ TP14/ Bit NDER14 in NDERB and bit PB6DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows PB6DDR NDER14 Pin function PB5/ TP13/ TOCXB4 0 -- PB6 input 1 0 PB6 output 1 1 TP14 output 1 1 TP15 output ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR and bit EXB4 in TOER), bit NDER13 in NDERB, and bit PB5DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows EXB4, CMD1 PB5DDR NDER13 Pin function 0 -- PB5 input Not both 1 1 0 1 1 Both 1 -- -- TOCXB4 output PB5 output TP13 output PB4/ TP12/ TOCXA4 ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR and bit EXA4 in TOER), bit NDER12 in NDERB, and bit PB4DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows EXA4, CMD1 PB4DDR NDER12 Pin function 0 -- PB4 input Not both 1 1 0 1 1 Both 1 -- -- TOCXA4 output PB4 output TP12 output 163 Table 7-18 Port B Pin Functions (cont) Pin PB3/ TP11/ TIOCB4 Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 4 settings (bit PWM4 in TMDR, bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EB4 in TOER, and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR4), bit NDER11 in NDERB, and bit PB3DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 4 settings PB3DDR NDER11 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCB4 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCB4 input* 1 1 PB3 input PB3 output TP11 output Note: * TIOCB4 input when CMD1 = PWM4 = 0 and IOB2 = 1. ITU channel 4 settings EB4 CMD1 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 2 0 -- -- -- -- 2 1 1 0 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 164 Table 7-18 Port B Pin Functions (cont) Pin PB2/ TP10/ TIOCA4 Pin Functions and Selection Method ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EA4 in TOER, bit PWM4 in TMDR, and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR4), bit NDER10 in NDERB, and bit PB2DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 4 settings PB2DDR NDER10 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCA4 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCA4 input* 1 1 PB2 input PB2 output TP10 output Note: * TIOCA4 input when CMD1 = PWM4 = 0 and IOA2 = 1. DMAC channel 4 settings EA4 CMD1 PWM4 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 2 0 -- -- -- -- -- 2 1 1 0 0 2 1 1 1 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 165 Table 7-18 Port B Pin Functions (cont) Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method PB1/TP9/ ITU channel 3 settings (bit PWM3 in TMDR, bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EB3 in TOER, and TIOCB3 bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR3), bit NDER9 in NDERB, and bit PB1DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 3 settings PB1DDR NDER9 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCB3 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCB3 input* 1 1 PB1 input PB1 output TP9 output Note: * TIOCB3 input when CMD1 = PWM3 = 0 and IOB2 = 1. ITU channel 3 settings EB3 CMD1 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 2 0 -- -- -- -- 2 1 1 0 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 166 Table 7-18 Port B Pin Functions (cont) Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method PB0/TP8/ ITU channel 3 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EA3 in TOER, bit PWM3 in TMDR, and TIOCA3 bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR3), bit NDER8 in NDERB, and bit PB0DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows ITU channel 3 settings PB0DDR NDER8 Pin function 1 in table below -- -- TIOCA3 output 0 -- 2 in table below 1 0 TIOCA3 input* 1 1 PB0 input PB0 output TP8 output Note: * TIOCA3 input when CMD1 = PWM3 = 0 and IOA2 = 1. ITU channel 3 settings EA3 CMD1 PWM3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 2 0 -- -- -- -- -- 2 1 1 0 0 2 1 1 1 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 167 168 Section 8 16-Bit Integrated Timer Unit (ITU) 8.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has a built-in 16-bit integrated timer-pulse unit (ITU) with five 16-bit timer channels. 8.1.1 Features ITU features are listed below. * * Capability to process up to 12 pulse outputs or 10 pulse inputs Ten general registers (GRs, two per channel) with independently-assignable output compare or input capture functions Selection of eight counter clock sources for each channel: Internal clocks: o, o/2, o/4, o/8 External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD * Five operating modes selectable in all channels: -- Waveform output by compare match Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output (only 0 or 1 output in channel 2) -- Input capture function Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges (selectable) -- Counter clearing function Counters can be cleared by compare match or input capture -- Synchronization Two or more timer counters (TCNTs) can be preset simultaneously, or cleared simultaneously by compare match or input capture. Counter synchronization enables synchronous register input and output. * 169 -- PWM mode PWM output can be provided with an arbitrary duty cycle. With synchronization, up to five-phase PWM output is possible * Phase counting mode selectable in channel 2 Two-phase encoder output can be counted automatically. * Three additional modes selectable in channels 3 and 4 -- Reset-synchronized PWM mode If channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase PWM output is possible with three pairs of complementary waveforms. -- Complementary PWM mode If channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase PWM output is possible with three pairs of non-overlapping complementary waveforms. -- Buffering Input capture registers can be double-buffered. Output compare registers can be updated automatically. * High-speed access via internal 16-bit bus The 16-bit timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers can be accessed at high speed via a 16-bit bus. * Fifteen interrupt sources Each channel has two compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt. All interrupts can be requested independently. * Output triggering of programmable pattern controller (TPC) Compare match/input capture signals from channels 0 to 3 can be used as TPC output triggers. 170 Table 8-1 summarizes the ITU functions. Table 8-1 ITU Functions Item Clock sources General registers (output compare/input capture registers) Buffer registers Input/output pins Output pins Counter clearing function Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Internal clocks: o, o/2, o/4, o/8 External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, selectable independently GRA0, GRB0 GRA1, GRB1 GRA2, GRB2 GRA3, GRB3 GRA4, GRB4 -- TIOCA0, TIOCB0 -- GRA0/GRB0 compare match or input capture oo oo oo oo oo oo -- TIOCA1, TIOCB1 -- GRA1/GRB1 compare match or input capture oo oo -- TIOCA2, TIOCB2 -- GRA2/GRB2 compare match or input capture o o oo o o o BRA3, BRB3 TIOCA3, TIOCB3 -- GRA3/GRB3 compare match or input capture BRA4, BRB4 TIOCA4, TIOCB4 TOCXA4, TOCXB4 GRA4/GRB4 compare match or input capture Compare match output 0 1 Toggle -- oo oo oo Input capture function Synchronization PWM mode Reset-synchronized PWM mode Complementary PWM mode Phase counting mode Buffering Interrupt sources -- -- -- -- Three sources * Compare match/input capture A0 * Compare match/input capture B0 * Overflow -- -- -- -- Three sources * Compare match/input capture A1 * Compare match/input capture B1 * Overflow -- -- o-- oo oo -- oo -- Three sources * Compare match/input capture A2 * Compare match/input capture B2 * Overflow Three sources * Compare match/input capture A3 * Compare match/input capture B3 * Overflow Three sources * Compare match/input capture A4 * Compare match/input capture B4 * Overflow Legend o: Available --: Not available 171 8.1.2 Block Diagrams ITU Block Diagram (overall): Figure 8-1 is a block diagram of the ITU. TCLKA to TCLKD o, o/2, o/4, o/8 TOCXA4, TOCXB4 TIOCA0 to TIOCA4 TIOCB0 to TIOCB4 Clock selector Control logic IMIA0 to IMIA4 IMIB0 to IMIB4 OVI0 to OVI4 Counter control and pulse I/O control unit TODR 16-bit timer channel 4 16-bit timer channel 3 16-bit timer channel 2 16-bit timer channel 1 16-bit timer channel 0 TOCR TSTR TSNC TMDR TFCR On-chip data bus Bus interface Module data bus Legend TOER: TOCR: TSTR: TSNC: TMDR: TFCR: Timer output master enable register (8 bits) Timer output control register (8 bits) Timer start register (8 bits) Timer synchro register (8 bits) Timer mode register (8 bits) Timer function control register (8 bits) Figure 8-1 ITU Block Diagram (Overall) 172 Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1: ITU channels 0 and 1 are functionally identical. Both have the structure shown in figure 8-2. TCLKA to TCLKD Clock selector o, o/2, o/4, o/8 Comparator Control logic TIOCA0 TIOCB0 IMIA0 IMIB0 OVI0 TCNT TIOR TIER GRA GRB TCR Module data bus Legend TCNT: GRA, GRB: TCR: TIOR: TIER: TSR: Timer counter (16 bits) General registers A and B (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register (8 bits) Timer I/O control register (8 bits) Timer interrupt enable register (8 bits) Timer status register (8 bits) Figure 8-2 Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1 (for Channel 0) 173 TSR Block Diagram of Channel 2: Figure 8-3 is a block diagram of channel 2. This is the channel that provides only 0 output and 1 output. TCLKA to TCLKD Clock selector o, o/2, o/4, o/8 Comparator Control logic TIOCA2 TIOCB2 IMIA2 IMIB2 OVI2 TCNT2 TIOR2 TIER2 GRA2 GRB2 TCR2 Module data bus Legend Timer counter 2 (16 bits) TCNT2: GRA2, GRB2: General registers A2 and B2 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register 2 (8 bits) TCR2: Timer I/O control register 2 (8 bits) TIOR2: Timer interrupt enable register 2 (8 bits) TIER2: Timer status register 2 (8 bits) TSR2: Figure 8-3 Block Diagram of Channel 2 174 TSR2 Block Diagrams of Channels 3 and 4: Figure 8-4 is a block diagram of channel 3. Figure 8-5 is a block diagram of channel 4. TCLKA to TCLKD o, o/2, o/4, o/8 Clock selector TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Comparator Control logic IMIA3 IMIB3 OVI3 TCNT3 TIOR3 TIER3 GRA3 GRB3 BRA3 BRB3 TCR3 Module data bus Legend Timer counter 3 (16 bits) TCNT3: GRA3, GRB3: General registers A3 and B3 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) BRA3, BRB3: Buffer registers A3 and B3 (input capture/output compare buffer registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register 3 (8 bits) TCR3: TIOR3: Timer I/O control register 3 (8 bits) TIER3: Timer interrupt enable register 3 (8 bits) TSR3: Timer status register 3 (8 bits) Figure 8-4 Block Diagram of Channel 3 175 TSR3 TCLKA to TCLKD o, o/2, o/4, o/8 Clock selector Comparator Control logic TOCXA4 TOCXB4 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 IMIA4 IMIB4 OVI4 TCNT4 TIOR4 TIER4 GRA4 GRB4 BRA4 BRB4 TCR4 Module data bus Legend Timer counter 4 (16 bits) TCNT4: GRA4, GRB4: General registers A4 and B4 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) BRA4, BRB4: Buffer registers A4 and B4 (input capture/output compare buffer registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register 4 (8 bits) TCR4: Timer I/O control register 4 (8 bits) TIOR4: Timer interrupt enable register 4 (8 bits) TIER4: Timer status register 4 (8 bits) TSR4: Figure 8-5 Block Diagram of Channel 4 176 TSR4 8.1.3 Input/Output Pins Table 8-2 summarizes the ITU pins. Table 8-2 ITU Pins Channel Name Abbreviation TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 Input/ Output Input Input Input Input Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Function External clock A input pin (phase-A input pin in phase counting mode) External clock B input pin (phase-B input pin in phase counting mode) External clock C input pin External clock D input pin GRA0 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB0 output compare or input capture pin GRA1 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB1 output compare or input capture pin GRA2 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB2 output compare or input capture pin GRA3 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized PWM mode GRB3 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode GRA4 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized PWM mode GRB4 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode PWM output pin in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode PWM output pin in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode Common Clock input A Clock input B Clock input C Clock input D 0 Input capture/output compare A0 Input capture/output compare B0 1 Input capture/output compare A1 Input capture/output compare B1 2 Input capture/output compare A2 Input capture/output compare B2 3 Input capture/output compare A3 Input capture/output compare B3 4 Input capture/output compare A4 TIOCB3 Input/ output Input/ output TIOCA4 Input capture/output compare B4 TIOCB4 Input/ output Output Output Output compare XA4 TOCXA4 Output compare XB4 TOCXB4 177 8.1.4 Register Configuration Table 8-3 summarizes the ITU registers. Table 8-3 ITU Registers Channel Common Address*1 H'FF60 H'FF61 H'FF62 H'FF63 H'FF90 H'FF91 0 H'FF64 H'FF65 H'FF66 H'FF67 H'FF68 H'FF69 H'FF6A H'FF6B H'FF6C H'FF6D 1 H'FF6E H'FF6F H'FF70 H'FF71 H'FF72 H'FF73 H'FF74 H'FF75 H'FF76 H'FF77 Name Timer start register Timer synchro register Timer mode register Timer function control register Timer output master enable register Timer output control register Timer control register 0 Timer I/O control register 0 Timer interrupt enable register 0 Timer status register 0 Timer counter 0 (high) Timer counter 0 (low) General register A0 (high) General register A0 (low) General register B0 (high) General register B0 (low) Timer control register 1 Timer I/O control register 1 Timer interrupt enable register 1 Timer status register 1 Timer counter 1 (high) Timer counter 1 (low) General register A1 (high) General register A1 (low) General register B1 (high) General register B1 (low) Abbreviation TSTR TSNC TMDR TFCR TOER TOCR TCR0 TIOR0 TIER0 TSR0 TCNT0H TCNT0L GRA0H GRA0L GRB0H GRB0L TCR1 TIOR1 TIER1 TSR1 TCNT1H TCNT1L GRA1H GRA1L GRB1H GRB1L R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'E0 H'E0 H'80 H'C0 H'FF H'FF H'80 H'88 H'F8 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'80 H'88 H'F8 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 178 Table 8-3 ITU Registers (cont) Channel 2 Address*1 H'FF78 H'FF79 H'FF7A H'FF7B H'FF7C H'FF7D H'FF7E H'FF7F H'FF80 H'FF81 3 H'FF82 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E H'FF8F Name Timer control register 2 Timer I/O control register 2 Timer interrupt enable register 2 Timer status register 2 Timer counter 2 (high) Timer counter 2 (low) General register A2 (high) General register A2 (low) General register B2 (high) General register B2 (low) Timer control register 3 Timer I/O control register 3 Timer interrupt enable register 3 Timer status register 3 Timer counter 3 (high) Timer counter 3 (low) General register A3 (high) General register A3 (low) General register B3 (high) General register B3 (low) Buffer register A3 (high) Buffer register A3 (low) Buffer register B3 (high) Buffer register B3 (low) Abbreviation TCR2 TIOR2 TIER2 TSR2 TCNT2H TCNT2L GRA2H GRA2L GRB2H GRB2L TCR3 TIOR3 TIER3 TSR3 TCNT3H TCNT3L GRA3H GRA3L GRB3H GRB3L BRA3H BRA3L BRB3H BRB3L R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'80 H'88 H'F8 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'80 H'88 H'F8 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 179 Table 8-3 ITU Registers (cont) Channel 4 Address*1 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94 H'FF95 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 H'FF99 H'FF9A H'FF9B H'FF9C H'FF9D H'FF9E H'FF9F Name Timer control register 4 Timer I/O control register 4 Timer interrupt enable register 4 Timer status register 4 Timer counter 4 (high) Timer counter 4 (low) General register A4 (high) General register A4 (low) General register B4 (high) General register B4 (low) Buffer register A4 (high) Buffer register A4 (low) Buffer register B4 (high) Buffer register B4 (low) Abbreviation TCR4 TIOR4 TIER4 TSR4 TCNT4H TCNT4L GRA4H GRA4L GRB4H GRB4L BRA4H BRA4L BRB4H BRB4L R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'80 H'88 H'F8 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 180 8.2 Register Descriptions 8.2.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR) TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that starts and stops the timer counter (TCNT) in channels 0 to 4. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 5 -- 1 -- 4 STR4 0 R/W 3 STR3 0 R/W 2 STR2 0 R/W 1 STR1 0 R/W 0 STR0 0 R/W Counter start 4 to 0 These bits start and stop TCNT4 to TCNT0 TSTR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 4--Counter Start 4 (STR4): Starts and stops timer counter 4 (TCNT4). Bit 4 STR4 0 1 Description TCNT4 is halted TCNT4 is counting (Initial value) Bit 3--Counter Start 3 (STR3): Starts and stops timer counter 3 (TCNT3). Bit 3 STR3 0 1 Description TCNT3 is halted TCNT3 is counting (Initial value) Bit 2--Counter Start 2 (STR2): Starts and stops timer counter 2 (TCNT2). Bit 2 STR2 0 1 Description TCNT2 is halted TCNT2 is counting (Initial value) 181 Bit 1--Counter Start 1 (STR1): Starts and stops timer counter 1 (TCNT1). Bit 1 STR1 0 1 Description TCNT1 is halted TCNT1 is counting (Initial value) Bit 0--Counter Start 0 (STR0): Starts and stops timer counter 0 (TCNT0). Bit 0 STR0 0 1 Description TCNT0 is halted TCNT0 is counting (Initial value) 8.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC) TSNC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether channels 0 to 4 operate independently or synchronously. Channels are synchronized by setting the corresponding bits to 1. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 5 -- 1 -- 4 SYNC4 0 R/W 3 SYNC3 0 R/W 2 SYNC2 0 R/W 1 SYNC1 0 R/W 0 SYNC0 0 R/W Timer sync 4 to 0 These bits synchronize channels 4 to 0 TSNC is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 4--Timer Sync 4 (SYNC4): Selects whether channel 4 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 4 SYNC4 0 1 Description Channel 4's timer counter (TCNT4) operates independently TCNT4 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 4 operates synchronously TCNT4 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) 182 Bit 3--Timer Sync 3 (SYNC3): Selects whether channel 3 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 3 SYNC3 0 1 Description Channel 3's timer counter (TCNT3) operates independently TCNT3 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 3 operates synchronously TCNT3 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Bit 2--Timer Sync 2 (SYNC2): Selects whether channel 2 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 2 SYNC2 0 1 Description Channel 2's timer counter (TCNT2) operates independently TCNT2 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 2 operates synchronously TCNT2 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Bit 1--Timer Sync 1 (SYNC1): Selects whether channel 1 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 1 SYNC1 0 1 Description Channel 1's timer counter (TCNT1) operates independently TCNT1 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 1 operates synchronously TCNT1 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Bit 0--Timer Sync 0 (SYNC0): Selects whether channel 0 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 0 SYNC0 0 1 Description Channel 0's timer counter (TCNT0) operates independently TCNT0 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 0 operates synchronously TCNT0 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) 183 8.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) TMDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects PWM mode for channels 0 to 4. It also selects phase counting mode and the overflow flag (OVF) setting conditions for channel 2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 MDF 0 R/W 5 FDIR 0 R/W 4 PWM4 0 R/W 3 PWM3 0 R/W 2 PWM2 0 R/W 1 PWM1 0 R/W 0 PWM0 0 R/W PWM mode 4 to 0 These bits select PWM mode for channels 4 to 0 Flag direction Selects the setting condition for the overflow flag (OVF) in timer status register 2 (TSR2) Phase counting mode flag Selects phase counting mode for channel 2 Reserved bit TMDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bit 6--Phase Counting Mode Flag (MDF): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in phase counting mode. Bit 6 MDF 0 1 Description Channel 2 operates normally Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (Initial value) 184 When MDF is set to 1 to select phase counting mode, timer counter 2 (TCNT2) operates as an up/down-counter and pins TCLKA and TCLKB become counter clock input pins. TCNT2 counts both rising and falling edges of TCLKA and TCLKB, and counts up or down as follows. Counting Direction TCLKA pin TCLKB pin Low Down-Counting High High Low High Up-Counting Low Low High In phase counting mode channel 2 operates as above regardless of the external clock edges selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and the clock source selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in timer control register 2 (TCR2). Phase counting mode takes precedence over these settings. The counter clearing condition selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR2 and the compare match/input capture settings and interrupt functions of timer I/O control register 2 (TIOR2), timer interrupt enable register 2 (TIER2), and timer status register 2 (TSR2) remain effective in phase counting mode. Bit 5--Flag Direction (FDIR): Designates the setting condition for the overflow flag (OVF) in timer status register 2 (TSR2). The FDIR designation is valid in all modes in channel 2. Bit 5 FDIR 0 1 Description OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows or underflows OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows (Initial value) Bit 4--PWM Mode 4 (PWM4): Selects whether channel 4 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 4 PWM4 0 1 Description Channel 4 operates normally Channel 4 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM4 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA4 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with general register A4 (GRA4), and to 0 at compare match with general register B4 (GRB4). If complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected by bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the timer function control register (TFCR), the CMD1 and CMD0 setting takes precedence and the PWM4 setting is ignored. 185 Bit 3--PWM Mode 3 (PWM3): Selects whether channel 3 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 3 PWM3 0 1 Description Channel 3 operates normally Channel 3 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM3 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA3 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with general register A3 (GRA3), and to 0 at compare match with general register B3 (GRB3). If complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected by bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the timer function control register (TFCR), the CMD1 and CMD0 setting takes precedence and the PWM3 setting is ignored. Bit 2--PWM Mode 2 (PWM2): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 2 PWM2 0 1 Description Channel 2 operates normally Channel 2 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM2 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA2 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with general register A2 (GRA2), and to 0 at compare match with general register B2 (GRB2). Bit 1--PWM Mode 1 (PWM1): Selects whether channel 1 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 1 PWM1 0 1 Description Channel 1 operates normally Channel 1 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM1 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA1 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with general register A1 (GRA1), and to 0 at compare match with general register B1 (GRB1). 186 Bit 0--PWM Mode 0 (PWM0): Selects whether channel 0 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 0 PWM0 0 1 Description Channel 0 operates normally Channel 0 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM0 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA0 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with general register A0 (GRA0), and to 0 at compare match with general register B0 (GRB0). 8.2.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR) TFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects complementary PWM mode, resetsynchronized PWM mode, and buffering for channels 3 and 4. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 CMD1 0 R/W 4 CMD0 0 R/W 3 BFB4 0 R/W 2 BFA4 0 R/W 1 BFB3 0 R/W 0 BFA3 0 R/W Reserved bits Combination mode 1/0 These bits select complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode for channels 3 and 4 Buffer mode B4 and A4 These bits select buffering of general registers (GRB4 and GRA4) by buffer registers (BRB4 and BRA4) in channel 4 Buffer mode B3 and A3 These bits select buffering of general registers (GRB3 and GRA3) by buffer registers (BRB3 and BRA3) in channel 3 TFCR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 187 Bits 5 and 4--Combination Mode 1 and 0 (CMD1, CMD0): These bits select whether channels 3 and 4 operate in normal mode, complementary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized PWM mode. Bit 5 CMD1 0 Bit 4 CMD0 0 1 1 0 1 Channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary PWM mode Channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized PWM mode Description Channels 3 and 4 operate normally (Initial value) Before selecting reset-synchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode, halt the timer counter or counters that will be used in these modes. When these bits select complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode, they take precedence over the setting of the PWM mode bits (PWM4 and PWM3) in TMDR. Settings of timer sync bits SYNC4 and SYNC3 in the timer synchro register (TSNC) are valid in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode, however. When complementary PWM mode is selected, channels 3 and 4 must not be synchronized (do not set bits SYNC3 and SYNC4 both to 1 in TSNC). Bit 3--Buffer Mode B4 (BFB4): Selects whether GRB4 operates normally in channel 4, or whether GRB4 is buffered by BRB4. Bit 3 BFB4 0 1 Description GRB4 operates normally GRB4 is buffered by BRB4 (Initial value) Bit 2--Buffer Mode A4 (BFA4): Selects whether GRA4 operates normally in channel 4, or whether GRA4 is buffered by BRA4. Bit 2 BFA4 0 1 Description GRA4 operates normally GRA4 is buffered by BRA4 (Initial value) 188 Bit 1--Buffer Mode B3 (BFB3): Selects whether GRB3 operates normally in channel 3, or whether GRB3 is buffered by BRB3. Bit 1 BFB3 0 1 Description GRB3 operates normally GRB3 is buffered by BRB3 (Initial value) Bit 0--Buffer Mode A3 (BFA3): Selects whether GRA3 operates normally in channel 3, or whether GRA3 is buffered by BRA3. Bit 0 BFA3 0 1 Description GRA3 operates normally GRA3 is buffered by BRA3 (Initial value) 8.2.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) TOER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output settings for channels 3 and 4. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 EXB4 1 R/W 4 EXA4 1 R/W 3 EB3 1 R/W 2 EB4 1 R/W 1 EA4 1 R/W 0 EA3 1 R/W Reserved bits Master enable TOCXA4, TOCXB4 These bits enable or disable output settings for pins TOCXA4 and TOCXB4 Master enable TIOCA3, TIOCB3 , TIOCA4, TIOCB4 These bits enable or disable output settings for pins TIOCA3, TIOCB3 , TIOCA4, and TIOCB4 TOER is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 189 Bit 5--Master Enable TOCXB4 (EXB4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TOCXB4. Bit 5 EXB4 0 Description TOCXB4 output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings (TOCXB4 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EXB4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TOCXB4 is enabled for output according to TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 Bit 4--Master Enable TOCXA4 (EXA4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TOCXA4. Bit 4 EXA4 0 Description TOCXA4 output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings (TOCXA4 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EXA4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TOCXA4 is enabled for output according to TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 Bit 3--Master Enable TIOCB3 (EB3): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCB3. Bit 3 EB3 0 Description TIOCB3 output is disabled regardless of TIOR3 and TFCR settings (TIOCB3 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EB3 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TIOCB3 is enabled for output according to TIOR3 and TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 190 Bit 2--Master Enable TIOCB4 (EB4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCB4. Bit 2 EB4 0 Description TIOCB4 output is disabled regardless of TIOR4 and TFCR settings (TIOCB4 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EB4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TIOCB4 is enabled for output according to TIOR4 and TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 Bit 1--Master Enable TIOCA4 (EA4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCA4. Bit 1 EA4 0 Description TIOCA4 output is disabled regardless of TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings (TIOCA4 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EA4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TIOCA4 is enabled for output according to TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 Bit 0--Master Enable TIOCA3 (EA3): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCA3. Bit 0 EA3 0 Description TIOCA3 output is disabled regardless of TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings (TIOCA3 operates as a generic input/output pin). If XTGD = 0, EA3 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1. TIOCA3 is enabled for output according to TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings (Initial value) 1 191 8.2.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR) TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects externally triggered disabling of output in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode, and inverts the output levels. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 5 -- 1 -- 4 XTGD 1 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 OLS4 1 R/W 0 OLS3 1 R/W Output level select 3, 4 These bits select output levels in complementary PWM mode and resetsynchronized PWM mode Reserved bits External trigger disable Selects externally triggered disabling of output in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode The settings of the XTGD, OLS4, and OLS3 bits are valid only in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode. These settings do not affect other modes. TOCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 4--External Trigger Disable (XTGD): Selects externally triggered disabling of ITU output in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode. Bit 4 XTGD 0 Description Input capture A in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode. When an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in the timer output master enable register (TOER) are cleared to 0, disabling ITU output. External triggering is disabled (Initial value) 1 192 Bits 3 and 2--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 1--Output Level Select 4 (OLS4): Selects output levels in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode. Bit 1 OLS4 0 1 Description TIOCA3, TIOCA4, and TIOCB4 outputs are inverted TIOCA3, TIOCA4, and TIOCB4 outputs are not inverted (Initial value) Bit 0--Output Level Select 3 (OLS3): Selects output levels in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode. Bit 0 OLS3 0 1 Description TIOCB3, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 outputs are inverted TIOCB3, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 outputs are not inverted (Initial value) 8.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT) TCNT is a 16-bit counter. The ITU has five TCNTs, one for each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation TCNT0 TCNT1 TCNT2 TCNT3 TCNT4 Phase counting mode: up/down-counter Other modes: up-counter Complementary PWM mode: up/down-counter Other modes: up-counter Function Up-counter Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable register that counts pulse inputs from a clock source. The clock source is selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the timer control register (TCR). 193 TCNT0 and TCNT1 are up-counters. TCNT2 is an up/down-counter in phase counting mode and an up-counter in other modes. TCNT3 and TCNT4 are up/down-counters in complementary PWM mode and up-counters in other modes. TCNT can be cleared to H'0000 by compare match with general register A or B (GRA or GRB) or by input capture to GRA or GRB (counter clearing function) in the same channel. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 in the timer status register (TSR) of the corresponding channel. When TCNT underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF), the overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 in TSR of the corresponding channel. The TCNTs are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. Each TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. 8.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB) The general registers are 16-bit registers. The ITU has 10 general registers, two in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation GRA0, GRB0 GRA1, GRB1 GRA2, GRB2 GRA3, GRB3 GRA4, GRB4 Output compare/input capture register; can be buffered by buffer registers BRA and BRB Function Output compare/input capture register Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W A general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output compare register or an input capture register. The function is selected by settings in the timer I/O control register (TIOR). When a general register is used as an output compare register, its value is constantly compared with the TCNT value. When the two values match (compare match), the IMFA or IMFB flag is set to 1 in the timer status register (TSR). Compare match output can be selected in TIOR. 194 When a general register is used as an input capture register, rising edges, falling edges, or both edges of an external input capture signal are detected and the current TCNT value is stored in the general register. The corresponding IMFA or IMFB flag in TSR is set to 1 at the same time. The valid edge or edges of the input capture signal are selected in TIOR. TIOR settings are ignored in PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and reset-synchronized PWM mode. General registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. General registers are initialized to the output compare function (with no output signal) by a reset and in standby mode. The initial value is H'FFFF. 8.2.9 Buffer Registers (BRA, BRB) The buffer registers are 16-bit registers. The ITU has four buffer registers, two each in channels 3 and 4. Channel 3 4 Abbreviation BRA3, BRB3 BRA4, BRB4 Function Used for buffering * When the corresponding GRA or GRB functions as an output compare register, BRA or BRB can function as an output compare buffer register: the BRA or BRB value is automatically transferred to GRA or GRB at compare match * When the corresponding GRA or GRB functions as an input capture register, BRA or BRB can function as an input capture buffer register: the GRA or GRB value is automatically transferred to BRA or BRB at input capture Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W A buffer register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used when buffering is selected. Buffering can be selected independently by bits BFB4, BFA4, BFB3, and BFA3 in TFCR. The buffer register and general register operate as a pair. When the general register functions as an output compare register, the buffer register functions as an output compare buffer register. When the general register functions as an input capture register, the buffer register functions as an input capture buffer register. 195 The buffer registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word or byte access. Buffer registers are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in standby mode. 8.2.10 Timer Control Registers (TCR) TCR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TCRs, one in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation TCR0 TCR1 TCR2 TCR3 TCR4 Function TCR controls the timer counter. The TCRs in all channels are functionally identical. When phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Timer prescaler 2 to 0 These bits select the counter clock Clock edge 1/0 These bits select external clock edges Counter clear 1/0 These bits select the counter clear source Reserved bit Each TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer counter clock source, selects the edge or edges of external clock sources, and selects how the counter is cleared. TCR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. 196 Bits 6 and 5--Counter Clear 1/0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select how TCNT is cleared. Bit 6 CCLR1 0 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TCNT is not cleared TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture*1 (Initial value) TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture*1 Synchronous clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers*2 Notes: 1. TCNT is cleared by compare match when the general register functions as a compare match register, and by input capture when the general register functions as an input capture register. 2. Selected in the timer synchro register (TSNC). Bits 4 and 3--Clock Edge 1/0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select external clock input edges when an external clock source is used. Bit 4 CKEG1 0 Bit 3 CKEG0 0 1 1 -- Description Count rising edges Count falling edges Count both edges (Initial value) When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode, bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR2 are ignored. Phase counting takes precedence. 197 Bits 2 to 0--Timer Prescaler 2 to 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the counter clock source. Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Function Internal clock: o Internal clock: o/2 Internal clock: o/4 Internal clock: o/8 External clock A: TCLKA input External clock B: TCLKB input External clock C: TCLKC input External clock D: TCLKD input (Initial value) When bit TPSC2 is cleared to 0 an internal clock source is selected, and the timer counts only falling edges. When bit TPSC2 is set to 1 an external clock source is selected, and the timer counts the edge or edges selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR), the settings of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Phase counting takes precedence. 8.2.11 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) TIOR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TIORs, one in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation TIOR0 TIOR1 TIOR2 TIOR3 TIOR4 Function TIOR controls the general registers. Some functions differ in PWM mode. TIOR3 and TIOR4 settings are ignored when complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected in channels 3 and 4. 198 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W 0 IOA0 0 R/W I/O control A2 to A0 These bits select GRA functions Reserved bit I/O control B2 to B0 These bits select GRB functions Reserved bit Each TIOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the output compare or input capture function for GRA and GRB, and specifies the functions of the TIOCA and TIOCB pins. If the output compare function is selected, TIOR also selects the type of output. If input capture is selected, TIOR also selects the edge or edges of the input capture signal. TIOR is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bits 6 to 4--I/O Control B2 to B0 (IOB2 to IOB0): These bits select the GRB function. Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: 1. After a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match. 2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output instead. GRB is an input capture register Function GRB is an output compare register No output at compare match 0 output at GRB compare (Initial value) match*1 1 output at GRB compare match*1 Output toggles at GRB compare match (1 output in channel 2)*1, *2 GRB captures rising edge of input GRB captures falling edge of input GRB captures both edges of input 199 Bit 3--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0--I/O Control A2 to A0 (IOA2 to IOA0): These bits select the GRA function. Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: 1. After a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match. 2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output instead. GRA is an input capture register Function GRA is an output compare register No output at compare match 0 output at GRA compare (Initial value) match*1 1 output at GRA compare match*1 Output toggles at GRA compare match (1 output in channel 2)*1, *2 GRA captures rising edge of input GRA captures falling edge of input GRA captures both edges of input 8.2.12 Timer Status Register (TSR) TSR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TSRs, one in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation TSR0 TSR1 TSR2 TSR3 TSR4 Function Indicates input capture, compare match, and overflow status 200 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Overflow flag Status flag indicating overflow or underflow Input capture/compare match flag B Status flag indicating GRB compare match or input capture Input capture/compare match flag A Status flag indicating GRA compare match or input capture Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Each TSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register containing flags that indicate TCNT overflow or underflow and GRA or GRB compare match or input capture. These flags are interrupt sources and generate CPU interrupts if enabled by corresponding bits in the timer interrupt enable register (TIER). TSR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 2--Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates TCNT overflow or underflow. Bit 2 OVF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF (Initial value) [Setting condition] TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000, or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF* Notes: * TCNT underflow occurs when TCNT operates as an up/down-counter. Underflow occurs only under the following conditions: 1. Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR) 2. Channels 3 and 4 operate in complementary PWM mode (CMD1 = 1 and CMD0 = 0 in TFCR) 201 Bit 1--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B (IMFB): This status flag indicates GRB compare match or input capture events. Bit 1 IMFB 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB (Initial value) [Setting conditions] TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as a compare match register. TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input capture signal, when GRB functions as an input capture register. Bit 0--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A (IMFA): This status flag indicates GRA compare match or input capture events. Bit 0 IMFA 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA. DMAC activated by IMIA interrupt (channels 0 to 3 only). (Initial value) 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as a compare match register. TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input capture signal, when GRA functions as an input capture register. 202 8.2.13 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) TIER is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TIERs, one in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Abbreviation TIER0 TIER1 TIER2 TIER3 TIER4 Function Enables or disables interrupt requests. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Overflow interrupt enable Enables or disables OVF interrupts Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B Enables or disables IMFB interrupts Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A Enables or disables IMFA interrupts Each TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables overflow interrupt requests and general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. TIER is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 203 Bit 2--Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the overflow flag (OVF) in TSR when OVF is set to 1. Bit 2 OVIE 0 1 Description OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B (IMIEB): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFB flag in TSR when IMFB is set to 1. Bit 1 IMIEB 0 1 Description IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is disabled IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is enabled (Initial value) Bit 0--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A (IMIEA): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFA flag in TSR when IMFA is set to 1. Bit 0 IMIEA 0 1 Description IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is disabled IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is enabled (Initial value) 204 8.3 CPU Interface 8.3.1 16-Bit Accessible Registers The timer counters (TCNTs), general registers A and B (GRAs and GRBs), and buffer registers A and B (BRAs and BRBs) are 16-bit registers, and are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus. These registers can be written or read a word at a time, or a byte at a time. Figures 8-6 and 8-7 show examples of word access to a timer counter (TCNT). Figures 8-8, 8-9, 8-10, and 8-11 show examples of byte access to TCNTH and TCNTL. On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-6 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Word) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-7 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Word) 205 On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-8 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Upper Byte) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-9 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Lower Byte) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-10 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Upper Byte) 206 On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 8-11 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Lower Byte) 8.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers The registers other than the timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers are 8-bit registers. These registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 8-bit data bus. Figures 8-12 and 8-13 show examples of byte read and write access to a TCR. If a word-size data transfer instruction is executed, two byte transfers are performed. On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCR Figure 8-12 TCR Access (CPU Writes to TCR) 207 On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCR Figure 8-13 TCR Access (CPU Reads TCR) 208 8.4 Operation 8.4.1 Overview A summary of operations in the various modes is given below. Normal Operation: Each channel has a timer counter and general registers. The timer counter counts up, and can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, or external event counter. General registers A and B can be used for input capture or output compare. Synchronous Operation: The timer counters in designated channels are preset synchronously. Data written to the timer counter in any one of these channels is simultaneously written to the timer counters in the other channels as well. The timer counters can also be cleared synchronously if so designated by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCRs. PWM Mode: A PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match A and to 0 at compare match B. The duty cycle can be varied from 0% to 100% depending on the settings of GRA and GRB. When a channel is set to PWM mode, its GRA and GRB automatically become output compare registers. Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase PWM output with complementary waveforms. (The three phases are related by having a common transition point.) When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected GRA3, GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4 automatically function as output compare registers, TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and TOCXB4 function as PWM output pins, and TCNT3 operates as an up-counter. TCNT4 operates independently, and is not compared with GRA4 or GRB4. Complementary PWM Mode: Channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase PWM output with non-overlapping complementary waveforms. When complementary PWM mode is selected GRA3, GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4 automatically function as output compare registers, and TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and TOCXB4 function as PWM output pins. TCNT3 and TCNT4 operate as up/down-counters. Phase Counting Mode: The phase relationship between two clock signals input at TCLKA and TCLKB is detected and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly. When phase counting mode is selected TCLKA and TCLKB become clock input pins and TCNT2 operates as an up/downcounter. 209 Buffering * If the general register is an output compare register When compare match occurs the buffer register value is transferred to the general register. * If the general register is an input capture register When input capture occurs the TCNT value is transferred to the general register, and the previous general register value is transferred to the buffer register. * Complementary PWM mode The buffer register value is transferred to the general register when TCNT3 and TCNT4 change counting direction. * Reset-synchronized PWM mode The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at GRA3 compare match. 8.4.2 Basic Functions Counter Operation: When one of bits STR0 to STR4 is set to 1 in the timer start register (TSTR), the timer counter (TCNT) in the corresponding channel starts counting. The counting can be free-running or periodic. * Sample setup procedure for counter Figure 8-14 shows a sample procedure for setting up a counter. 210 Counter setup Select counter clock 1 Type of counting? Free-running counting Periodic counting Select counter clear source 2 Select output compare register function 3 Set period 4 Start counter Periodic counter 5 Start counter Free-running counter 5 Figure 8-14 Counter Setup Procedure (Example) 1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source. If an external clock source is selected, set bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. For periodic counting, set CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to have TCNT cleared at GRA compare match or GRB compare match. Set TIOR to select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in step 2. Write the count period in GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in step 2. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 211 * Free-running and periodic counter operation A reset leaves the counters (TCNTs) in ITU channels 0 to 4 all set as free-running counters. A free-running counter starts counting up when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 in the timer status register (TSR). If the corresponding OVIE bit is set to 1 in the timer interrupt enable register, a CPU interrupt is requested. After the overflow, the counter continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 8-15 illustrates free-running counting. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 STR0 to STR4 bit OVF Time Figure 8-15 Free-Running Counter Operation When a channel is set to have its counter cleared by compare match, in that channel TCNT operates as a periodic counter. Select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, set bit CCLR1 or CCLR0 in the timer control register (TCR) to have the counter cleared by compare match, and set the count period in GRA or GRB. After these settings, the counter starts counting up as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit is set to 1 in TSTR. When the count matches GRA or GRB, the IMFA or IMFB flag is set to 1 in TSR and the counter is cleared to H'0000. If the corresponding IMIEA or IMIEB bit is set to 1 in TIER, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. After the compare match, TCNT continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 8-16 illustrates periodic counting. 212 TCNT value GR Counter cleared by general register compare match H'0000 STR bit IMF Time Figure 8-16 Periodic Counter Operation * Count timing -- Internal clock source Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select the system clock (o) or one of three internal clock sources obtained by prescaling the system clock (o/2, o/4, o/8). Figure 8-17 shows the timing. o Internal clock TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 8-17 Count Timing for Internal Clock Sources 213 -- External clock source Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select an external clock input pin (TCLKA to TCLKD), and its valid edge or edges are selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. The rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. Shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. Figure 8-18 shows the timing when both edges are detected. o External clock input TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 8-18 Count Timing for External Clock Sources (when Both Edges are Detected) 214 Waveform Output by Compare Match: In ITU channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, compare match A or B can cause the output at the TIOCA or TIOCB pin to go to 0, go to 1, or toggle. In channel 2 the output can only go to 0 or go to 1. * Sample setup procedure for waveform output by compare match Figure 8-19 shows a sample procedure for setting up waveform output by compare match. Output setup Select waveform output mode 1 1. Select the compare match output mode (0, 1, or toggle) in TIOR. When a waveform output mode is selected, the pin switches from its generic input/ output function to the output compare function (TIOCA or TIOCB). An output compare pin outputs 0 until the first compare match occurs. Set output timing 2 2. Set a value in GRA or GRB to designate the compare match timing. Start counter 3 3. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Waveform output Figure 8-19 Setup Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match (Example) * Examples of waveform output Figure 8-20 shows examples of 0 and 1 output. TCNT operates as a free-running counter, 0 output is selected for compare match A, and 1 output is selected for compare match B. When the pin is already at the selected output level, the pin level does not change. 215 TCNT value H'FFFF GRB GRA Time TIOCB No change No change 1 output TIOCA No change No change 0 output Figure 8-20 0 and 1 Output (Examples) Figure 8-21 shows examples of toggle output. TCNT operates as a periodic counter, cleared by compare match B. Toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B. TCNT value GRB Counter cleared by compare match with GRB GRA Time TIOCB Toggle output Toggle output TIOCA Figure 8-21 Toggle Output (Example) 216 * Output compare timing The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and the general register match (when TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the output compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). When TCNT matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. Figure 8-22 shows the output compare timing. o TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 GR Compare match signal TIOCA, TIOCB N Figure 8-22 Output Compare Timing Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be captured into a general register when a transition occurs at an input capture/output compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). Capture can take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. The input capture function can be used to measure pulse width or period. * Sample setup procedure for input capture Figure 8-23 shows a sample procedure for setting up input capture. 217 Input selection Select input-capture input 1 1. Set TIOR to select the input capture function of a general register and the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal. Clear the port data direction bit to 0 before making these TIOR settings. Start counter 2 2. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Input capture Figure 8-23 Setup Procedure for Input Capture (Example) * Examples of input capture Figure 8-24 illustrates input capture when the falling edge of TIOCB and both edges of TIOCA are selected as capture edges. TCNT is cleared by input capture into GRB. TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0005 H'0000 TIOCB Counter cleared by TIOCB input (falling edge) Time TIOCA GRA H'0005 H'0160 GRB H'0180 Figure 8-24 Input Capture (Example) 218 * Input capture signal timing Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in TIOR. Figure 8-25 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. The pulse width of the input capture signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks for single-edge capture, and 2.5 system clocks for capture of both edges. o Input-capture input Internal input capture signal TCNT N GRA, GRB N Figure 8-25 Input Capture Signal Timing 219 8.4.3 Synchronization The synchronization function enables two or more timer counters to be synchronized by writing the same data to them simultaneously (synchronous preset). With appropriate TCR settings, two or more timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clear). Synchronization enables additional general registers to be associated with a single time base. Synchronization can be selected for all channels (0 to 4). Sample Setup Procedure for Synchronization: Figure 8-26 shows a sample procedure for setting up synchronization. Setup for synchronization Select synchronization 1 Synchronous preset Synchronous clear Write to TCNT 2 Clearing synchronized to this channel? Yes Select counter clear source No 3 Select counter clear source 4 Start counter 5 Start counter 5 Synchronous preset Counter clear Synchronous clear 1. Set the SYNC bits to 1 in TSNC for the channels to be synchronized. 2. When a value is written in TCNT in one of the synchronized channels, the same value is simultaneously written in TCNT in the other channels (synchronized preset). 3. Set the CCLR1 or CCLR0 bit in TCR to have the counter cleared by compare match or input capture. 4. Set the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR to have the counter cleared synchronously. 5. Set the STR bits in TSTR to 1 to start the synchronized counters. Figure 8-26 Setup Procedure for Synchronization (Example) 220 Example of Synchronization: Figure 8-27 shows an example of synchronization. Channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronized, and are set to operate in PWM mode. Channel 0 is set for counter clearing by compare match with GRB0. Channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clearing. The timer counters in channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronously preset, and are synchronously cleared by compare match with GRB0. A three-phase PWM waveform is output from pins TIOCA0, TIOCA1, and TIOCA2. For further information on PWM mode, see section 8.4.4, PWM Mode. Value of TCNT0 to TCNT2 Cleared by compare match with GRB0 GRB0 GRB1 GRA0 GRB2 GRA1 GRA2 Time TIOCA0 TIOCA1 TIOCA2 Figure 8-27 Synchronization (Example) 221 8.4.4 PWM Mode In PWM mode GRA and GRB are paired and a PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. GRA specifies the time at which the PWM output changes to 1. GRB specifies the time at which the PWM output changes to 0. If either GRA or GRB is selected as the counter clear source, a PWM waveform with a duty cycle from 0% to 100% is output at the TIOCA pin. PWM mode can be selected in all channels (0 to 4). Table 8-4 summarizes the PWM output pins and corresponding registers. If the same value is set in GRA and GRB, the output does not change when compare match occurs. Table 8-4 PWM Output Pins and Registers Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Output Pin TIOCA0 TIOCA1 TIOCA2 TIOCA3 TIOCA4 1 Output GRA0 GRA1 GRA2 GRA3 GRA4 0 Output GRB0 GRB1 GRB2 GRB3 GRB4 222 Sample Setup Procedure for PWM Mode: Figure 8-28 shows a sample procedure for setting up PWM mode. PWM mode Select counter clock 1 Select counter clear source 2 Set GRA 3 Set GRB 4 Select PWM mode 5 Start counter 6 PWM mode 1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source. If an external clock source is selected, set bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. 2. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to select the counter clear source. 3. Set the time at which the PWM waveform should go to 1 in GRA. 4. Set the time at which the PWM waveform should go to 0 in GRB. 5. Set the PWM bit in TMDR to select PWM mode. When PWM mode is selected, regardless of the TIOR contents, GRA and GRB become output compare registers specifying the times at which the PWM goes to 1 and 0. The TIOCA pin automatically becomes the PWM output pin. The TIOCB pin conforms to the settings of bits IOB1 and IOB0 in TIOR. If TIOCB output is not desired, clear both IOB1 and IOB0 to 0. 6. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Figure 8-28 Setup Procedure for PWM Mode (Example) 223 Examples of PWM Mode: Figure 8-29 shows examples of operation in PWM mode. The PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA, and to 0 at compare match with GRB. In the examples shown, TCNT is cleared by compare match with GRA or GRB. Synchronized operation and free-running counting are also possible. TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRA GRA GRB H'0000 Time TIOCA a. Counter cleared by GRA TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRB GRB GRA H'0000 Time TIOCA b. Counter cleared by GRB Figure 8-29 PWM Mode (Example 1) 224 Figure 8-30 shows examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and 100%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRB, and GRA is set to a higher value than GRB, the duty cycle is 0%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRA, and GRB is set to a higher value than GRA, the duty cycle is 100%. TCNT value GRB Counter cleared by compare match with GRB GRA H'0000 Time TIOCA Write to GRA a. 0% duty cycle TCNT value GRA Write to GRA Counter cleared by compare match with GRA GRB H'0000 Time TIOCA Write to GRB Write to GRB b. 100% duty cycle Figure 8-30 PWM Mode (Example 2) 225 8.4.5 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode In reset-synchronized PWM mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to produce three pairs of complementary PWM waveforms, all having one waveform transition point in common. When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and TOCXB4 automatically become PWM output pins, and TCNT3 functions as an upcounter. Table 8-5 lists the PWM output pins. Table 8-6 summarizes the register settings. Table 8-5 Output Pins in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Channel 3 Output Pin TIOCA3 TIOCB3 4 TIOCA4 TOCXA4 TIOCB4 TOCXB4 Description PWM output 1 PWM output 1 (complementary waveform to PWM output 1) PWM output 2 PWM output 2 (complementary waveform to PWM output 2) PWM output 3 PWM output 3 (complementary waveform to PWM output 3) Table 8-6 Register Settings in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Register TCNT3 TCNT4 GRA3 GRB3 GRA4 GRB4 Setting Initially set to H'0000 Not used (operates independently) Specifies the count period of TCNT3 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA3 and TIOCB3 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA4 and TOCXA4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCB4 and TOCXB4 226 Sample Setup Procedure for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Figure 8-31 shows a sample procedure for setting up reset-synchronized PWM mode. Reset-synchronized PWM mode Stop counter 1 Select counter clock 2 Select counter clear source 3 Select reset-synchronized PWM mode 4 Set TCNT 5 Set general registers 6 Start counter 7 Reset-synchronized PWM mode 1. Clear the STR3 bit in TSTR to 0 to halt TCNT3. Reset-synchronized PWM mode must be set up while TCNT3 is halted. 2. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source for channel 3. If an external clock source is selected, select the external clock edge(s) with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. 3. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR3 to select GRA3 compare match as the counter clear source. 4. Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR to select reset-synchronized PWM mode. TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 automatically become PWM output pins. 5. Preset TCNT3 to H'0000. TCNT4 need not be preset. 6. GRA3 is the waveform period register. Set the waveform period value in GRA3. Set transition times of the PWM output waveforms in GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4. Set times within the compare match range of TCNT3. X GRA3 (X: setting value) 7. Set the STR3 bit in TSTR to 1 to start TCNT3. Figure 8-31 Setup Procedure for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode (Example) 227 Example of Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Figure 8-32 shows an example of operation in reset-synchronized PWM mode. TCNT3 operates as an up-counter in this mode. TCNT4 operates independently, detached from GRA4 and GRB4. When TCNT3 matches GRA3, TCNT3 is cleared and resumes counting from H'0000. The PWM outputs toggle at compare match with GRB3, GRA4, GRB4, and TCNT3 respectively, and all toggle when the counter is cleared. TCNT3 value Counter cleared at compare match with GRA3 GRA3 GRB3 GRA4 GRB4 H'0000 Time TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCA4 TOCXA4 TIOCB4 TOCXB4 Figure 8-32 Operation in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode (Example) (when OLS3 = OLS4 = 1) For the settings and operation when reset-synchronized PWM mode and buffer mode are both selected, see section 8.4.8, Buffering. 228 8.4.6 Complementary PWM Mode In complementary PWM mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to output three pairs of complementary, non-overlapping PWM waveforms. When complementary PWM mode is selected TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and TOCXB4 automatically become PWM output pins, and TCNT3 and TCNT4 function as up/down-counters. Table 8-7 lists the PWM output pins. Table 8-8 summarizes the register settings. Table 8-7 Output Pins in Complementary PWM Mode Channel 3 Output Pin TIOCA3 TIOCB3 4 TIOCA4 TOCXA4 TIOCB4 TOCXB4 Description PWM output 1 PWM output 1 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM output 1) PWM output 2 PWM output 2 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM output 2) PWM output 3 PWM output 3 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM output 3) Table 8-8 Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode Register TCNT3 TCNT4 GRA3 GRB3 GRA4 GRB4 Setting Initially specifies the non-overlap margin (difference to TCNT4) Initially set to H'0000 Specifies the upper limit value of TCNT3 minus 1 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA3 and TIOCB3 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA4 and TOCXA4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCB4 and TOCXB4 229 Setup Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 8-33 shows a sample procedure for setting up complementary PWM mode. Complementary PWM mode Stop counting 1 1. Clear bits STR3 and STR4 to 0 in TSTR to halt the timer counters. Complementary PWM mode must be set up while TCNT3 and TCNT4 are halted. 2. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the same counter clock source for channels 3 and 4. If an external clock source is selected, select the external clock edge(s) with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Do not select any counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. 3. Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR to select complementary PWM mode. TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 automatically become PWM output pins. 4. Clear TCNT4 to H'0000. Set the non-overlap margin in TCNT3. Do not set TCNT3 and TCNT4 to the same value. 5. GRA3 is the waveform period register. Set the upper limit value of TCNT3 minus 1 in GRA3. Set transition times of the PWM output waveforms in GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4. Set times within the compare match range of TCNT3 and TCNT4. T X (X: initial setting of GRB3, GRA4, or GRB4. T: initial setting of TCNT3) 6. Set bits STR3 and STR4 in TSTR to 1 to start TCNT3 and TCNT4. Select counter clock 2 Select complementary PWM mode 3 Set TCNTs 4 Set general registers 5 Start counters 6 Complementary PWM mode Note: After exiting complementary PWM mode, to resume operating in complementary PWM mode, follow the entire setup procedure from step 1 again. Figure 8-33 Setup Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode (Example) 230 Clearing Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 8-34 shows a sample procedure for clearing complementary PWM mode. Complementary PWM mode 1. Clear bit CMD1 in TFCR to 0, and set channels 3 and 4 to normal operating mode. 2. After setting channels 3 and 4 to normal operating mode, wait at least one clock count before clearing bits STR3 and STR4 of TSTR to 0 to stop the counter operation of TCNT3 and TCNT4. Clear complementary mode 1 Stop counting 2 Normal operation Figure 8-34 Clearing Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode (Example) 231 Examples of Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 8-35 shows an example of operation in complementary PWM mode. TCNT3 and TCNT4 operate as up/down-counters, counting down from compare match between TCNT3 and GRA3 and counting up from the point at which TCNT4 underflows. During each up-and-down counting cycle, PWM waveforms are generated by compare match with general registers GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4. Since TCNT3 is initially set to a higher value than TCNT4, compare match events occur in the sequence TCNT3, TCNT4, TCNT4, TCNT3. TCNT3 and TCNT4 values GRA3 Down-counting starts at compare match between TCNT3 and GRA3 TCNT3 GRB3 GRA4 GRB4 H'0000 Up-counting starts when TCNT4 underflows TCNT4 Time TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCA4 TOCXA4 TIOCB4 TOCXB4 Figure 8-35 Operation in Complementary PWM Mode (Example 1) (when OLS3 = OLS4 = 1) 232 Figure 8-36 shows examples of waveforms with 0% and 100% duty cycles (in one phase) in complementary PWM mode. In this example the outputs change at compare match with GRB3, so waveforms with duty cycles of 0% or 100% can be output by setting GRB3 to a value larger than GRA3. The duty cycle can be changed easily during operation by use of the buffer registers. For further information see section 8.4.8, Buffering. TCNT3 and TCNT4 values GRA3 GRB3 H'0000 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 0% duty cycle a. 0% duty cycle TCNT3 and TCNT4 values GRA3 Time GRB3 H'0000 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 100% duty cycle b. 100% duty cycle Time Figure 8-36 Operation in Complementary PWM Mode (Example 2) (when OLS3 = OLS4 = 1) 233 In complementary PWM mode, TCNT3 and TCNT4 overshoot and undershoot at the transitions between up-counting and down-counting. The setting conditions for the IMFA bit in channel 3 and the OVF bit in channel 4 differ from the usual conditions. In buffered operation the buffer transfer conditions also differ. Timing diagrams are shown in figures 8-37 and 8-38. TCNT3 N-1 N N+1 N N-1 GRA3 N IMFA Set to 1 Buffer transfer signal (BR to GR) Flag not set GR Buffer transfer No buffer transfer Figure 8-37 Overshoot Timing 234 Underflow TCNT4 H'0001 H'0000 H'FFFF Overflow H'0000 OVF Set to 1 Buffer transfer signal (BR to GR) Flag not set GR Buffer transfer No buffer transfer Figure 8-38 Undershoot Timing In channel 3, IMFA is set to 1 only during up-counting. In channel 4, OVF is set to 1 only when an underflow occurs. When buffering is selected, buffer register contents are transferred to the general register at compare match A3 during up-counting, and when TCNT4 underflows. General Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode: When setting up general registers for complementary PWM mode or changing their settings during operation, note the following points. * Initial settings Do not set values from H'0000 to T - 1 (where T is the initial value of TCNT3). After the counters start and the first compare match A3 event has occurred, however, settings in this range also become possible. * Changing settings Use the buffer registers. Correct waveform output may not be obtained if a general register is written to directly. * Cautions on changes of general register settings Figure 8-39 shows six correct examples and one incorrect example. 235 GRA3 GR H'0000 BR Not allowed GR Figure 8-39 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Example 1) -- Buffer transfer at transition from up-counting to down-counting If the general register value is in the range from GRA3 - T + 1 to GRA3, do not transfer a buffer register value outside this range. Conversely, if the general register value is outside this range, do not transfer a value within this range. See figure 8-40. GRA3 + 1 GRA3 Illegal changes GRA3 - T + 1 GRA3 - T TCNT3 TCNT4 Figure 8-40 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Caution 1) 236 -- Buffer transfer at transition from down-counting to up-counting If the general register value is in the range from H'0000 to T - 1, do not transfer a buffer register value outside this range. Conversely, when a general register value is outside this range, do not transfer a value within this range. See figure 8-41. TCNT3 TCNT4 T T-1 Illegal changes H'0000 H'FFFF Figure 8-41 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Caution 2) 237 -- General register settings outside the counting range (H'0000 to GRA3) Waveforms with a duty cycle of 0% or 100% can be output by setting a general register to a value outside the counting range. When a buffer register is set to a value outside the counting range, then later restored to a value within the counting range, the counting direction (up or down) must be the same both times. See figure 8-42. GRA3 GR H'0000 0% duty cycle Output pin Output pin 100% duty cycle BR GR Write during down-counting Write during up-counting Figure 8-42 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Example 2) Settings can be made in this way by detecting GRA3 compare match or TCNT4 underflow before writing to the buffer register. 238 8.4.7 Phase Counting Mode In phase counting mode the phase difference between two external clock inputs (at the TCLKA and TCLKB pins) is detected, and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly. In phase counting mode, the TCLKA and TCLKB pins automatically function as external clock input pins and TCNT2 becomes an up/down-counter, regardless of the settings of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0, CKEG1, and CKEG0 in TCR2. Settings of bits CCLR1, CCLR0 in TCR2, and settings in TIOR2, TIER2, TSR2, GRA2, and GRB2 are valid. The input capture and output compare functions can be used, and interrupts can be generated. Phase counting is available only in channel 2. Sample Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode: Figure 8-43 shows a sample procedure for setting up phase counting mode. Phase counting mode Select phase counting mode 1 Select flag setting condition 2 1. Set the MDF bit in TMDR to 1 to select phase counting mode. 2. Select the flag setting condition with the FDIR bit in TMDR. 3. Set the STR2 bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Start counter 3 Phase counting mode Figure 8-43 Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode (Example) 239 Example of Phase Counting Mode: Figure 8-44 shows an example of operations in phase counting mode. Table 8-9 lists the up-counting and down-counting conditions for TCNT2. In phase counting mode both the rising and falling edges of TCLKA and TCLKB are counted. The phase difference between TCLKA and TCLKB must be at least 1.5 states, the phase overlap must also be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. See figure 8-45. TCNT2 value Counting up Counting down Time TCLKB TCLKA Figure 8-44 Operation in Phase Counting Mode (Example) Table 8-9 Up/Down Counting Conditions Counting Direction TCLKB TCLKA Low Up-Counting High High Low Down-Counting High Low Low High Phase difference Phase difference Pulse width Pulse width TCLKA TCLKB Phase difference and overlap: at least 1.5 states Pulse width: at least 2.5 states Overlap Overlap Figure 8-45 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode 240 8.4.8 Buffering Buffering operates differently depending on whether a general register is an output compare register or an input capture register, with further differences in reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. Buffering is available only in channels 3 and 4. Buffering operations under the conditions mentioned above are described next. * General register used for output compare The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match. See figure 8-46. Compare match signal BR GR Comparator TCNT Figure 8-46 Compare Match Buffering * General register used for input capture The TCNT value is transferred to the general register at input capture. The previous general register value is transferred to the buffer register. See figure 8-47. Input capture signal BR GR TCNT Figure 8-47 Input Capture Buffering 241 * Complementary PWM mode The buffer register value is transferred to the general register when TCNT3 and TCNT4 change counting direction. This occurs at the following two times: -- When TCNT3 matches GRA3 -- When TCNT4 underflows * Reset-synchronized PWM mode The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match A3. Sample Buffering Setup Procedure: Figure 8-48 shows a sample buffering setup procedure. Buffering Select general register functions 1 Set buffer bits 2 1. Set TIOR to select the output compare or input capture function of the general registers. 2. Set bits BFA3, BFA4, BFB3, and BFB4 in TFCR to select buffering of the required general registers. 3. Set the STR bits to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counters. Start counters 3 Buffered operation Figure 8-48 Buffering Setup Procedure (Example) 242 Examples of Buffering: Figure 8-49 shows an example in which GRA is set to function as an output compare register buffered by BRA, TCNT is set to operate as a periodic counter cleared by GRB compare match, and TIOCA and TIOCB are set to toggle at compare match A and B. Because of the buffer setting, when TIOCA toggles at compare match A, the BRA value is simultaneously transferred to GRA. This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs. Figure 8-50 shows the transfer timing. TCNT value GRB H'0250 H'0200 H'0100 H'0000 BRA GRA TIOCB TIOCA H'0200 H'0250 Counter cleared by compare match B Time H'0100 H'0200 H'0100 H'0200 H'0200 Toggle output Toggle output Compare match A Figure 8-49 Register Buffering (Example 1: Buffering of Output Compare Register) 243 o TCNT Compare match signal Buffer transfer signal BR GR n N N n n+1 Figure 8-50 Compare Match and Buffer Transfer Timing (Example) 244 Figure 8-51 shows an example in which GRA is set to function as an input capture register buffered by BRA, and TCNT is cleared by input capture B. The falling edge is selected as the input capture edge at TIOCB. Both edges are selected as input capture edges at TIOCA. Because of the buffer setting, when the TCNT value is captured into GRA at input capture A, the previous GRA value is simultaneously transferred to BRA. Figure 8-52 shows the transfer timing. TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 Counter cleared by input capture B H'0005 H'0000 TIOCB Time TOICA GRA H'0005 H'0160 BRA H'0005 H'0160 GRB H'0180 Input capture A Figure 8-51 Register Buffering (Example 2: Buffering of Input Capture Register) 245 o TIOC pin Input capture signal TCNT GR BR M m n n M n+1 N n M N n N+1 Figure 8-52 Input Capture and Buffer Transfer Timing (Example) 246 Figure 8-53 shows an example in which GRB3 is buffered by BRB3 in complementary PWM mode. Buffering is used to set GRB3 to a higher value than GRA3, generating a PWM waveform with 0% duty cycle. The BRB3 value is transferred to GRB3 when TCNT3 matches GRA3, and when TCNT4 underflows. TCNT3 and TCNT4 values H'1FFF GRA3 TCNT3 TCNT4 GRB3 H'0999 H'0000 Time BRB3 GRB3 H'0999 H'0999 H'0999 H'1FFF H'1FFF H'1FFF H'0999 H'0999 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Figure 8-53 Register Buffering (Example 4: Buffering in Complementary PWM Mode) 247 8.4.9 ITU Output Timing The ITU outputs from channels 3 and 4 can be disabled by bit settings in TOER or by an external trigger, or inverted by bit settings in TOCR. Timing of Enabling and Disabling of ITU Output by TOER: In this example an ITU output is disabled by clearing a master enable bit to 0 in TOER. An arbitrary value can be output by appropriate settings of the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) of the corresponding input/output port. Figure 8-54 illustrates the timing of the enabling and disabling of ITU output by TOER. T1 o T2 T3 Address TOER address TOER ITU output pin Timer output I/O port ITU output Generic input/output Figure 8-54 Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by Writing to TOER (Example) 248 Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by External Trigger: If the XTGD bit is cleared to 0 in TOCR in reset-synchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode, when an input capture A signal occurs in channel 1, the master enable bits are cleared to 0 in TOER, disabling ITU output. Figure 8-55 shows the timing. o TIOCA1 pin Input capture signal TOER ITU output pins N ITU output ITU output N: Arbitrary setting (H'C1 to H'FF) H'C0 I/O port Generic input/output N ITU output ITU output H'C0 I/O port Generic input/output Figure 8-55 Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by External Trigger (Example) Timing of Output Inversion by TOCR: The output levels in reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM mode can be inverted by inverting the output level select bits (OLS4 and OLS3) in TOCR. Figure 8-56 shows the timing. T1 o T2 T3 Address TOCR address TOCR ITU output pin Inverted Figure 8-56 Timing of Inverting of ITU Output Level by Writing to TOCR (Example) 249 8.5 Interrupts The ITU has two types of interrupts: input capture/compare match interrupts, and overflow interrupts. 8.5.1 Setting of Status Flags Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB at Compare Match: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when TCNT matches a general register (GR). The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when TCNT is updated from the matching count to the next count). Therefore, when TCNT matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next timer clock input. Figure 8-57 shows the timing of the setting of IMFA and IMFB. o TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 GR N Compare match signal IMF IMI Figure 8-57 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Compare Match 250 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by an input capture signal. The TCNT contents are simultaneously transferred to the corresponding general register. Figure 8-58 shows the timing. o Input capture signal IMF TCNT N GR N IMI Figure 8-58 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF): OVF is set to 1 when TCNT overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000 or underflows from H'0000 to H'FFFF. Figure 8-59 shows the timing. 251 o TCNT H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal OVF OVI Figure 8-59 Timing of Setting of OVF 8.5.2 Clearing of Status Flags If the CPU reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag is cleared. Figure 8-60 shows the timing. TSR write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address TSR address IMF, OVF Figure 8-60 Timing of Clearing of Status Flags 252 8.5.3 Interrupt Sources Each ITU channel can generate a compare match/input capture A interrupt, a compare match/input capture B interrupt, and an overflow interrupt. In total there are 15 interrupt sources, all independently vectored. An interrupt is requested when the interrupt request flag and interrupt enable bit are both set to 1. The priority order of the channels can be modified in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB). For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 8-10 lists the interrupt sources. Table 8-10 ITU Interrupt Sources Channel 0 Interrupt Source IMIA0 IMIB0 OVI0 1 IMIA1 IMIB1 OVI1 2 IMIA2 IMIB2 OVI2 3 IMIA3 IMIB3 OVI3 4 IMIA4 IMIB4 OVI4 Description Compare match/input capture A0 Compare match/input capture B0 Overflow 0 Compare match/input capture A1 Compare match/input capture B1 Overflow 1 Compare match/input capture A2 Compare match/input capture B2 Overflow 2 Compare match/input capture A3 Compare match/input capture B3 Overflow 3 Compare match/input capture A4 Compare match/input capture B4 Overflow 4 Low Priority* High Note: * The priority immediately after a reset is indicated. Inter-channel priorities can be changed by settings in IPRA and IPRB. 253 8.6 Usage Notes This section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during ITU operations. Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If a counter clear signal occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. See figure 8-61. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 Figure 8-61 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear 254 Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT word write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. See figure 8-62. TCNT word write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M TCNT write data Figure 8-62 Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment 255 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T2 or T3 state of a TCNT byte write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. The TCNT byte that was not written retains its previous value. See figure 8-63, which shows an increment pulse occurring in the T2 state of a byte write to TCNTH. TCNTH byte write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address TCNTH address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNTH N TCNTH write data M TCNTL X X+1 X Figure 8-63 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment 256 Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T3 state of a general register write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. See figure 8-64. General register write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address GR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 GR N M General register write data Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 8-64 Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match 257 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow or Underflow: If an overflow occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and the counter is not incremented. OVF is set to 1.The same holds for underflow. See figure 8-65. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock Overflow signal TCNT H'FFFF TCNT write data M OVF Figure 8-65 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 258 Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture: If an input capture signal occurs during the T3 state of a general register read cycle, the value before input capture is read. See figure 8-66. General register read cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address GR address Internal read signal Input capture signal GR X M Internal data bus X Figure 8-66 Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture 259 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment: If an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, the counter is cleared according to the input capture signal. The counter is not incremented by the increment signal. The value before the counter is cleared is transferred to the general register. See figure 8-67. o Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT input clock TCNT N H'0000 GR N Figure 8-67 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment 260 Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture: If an input capture signal occurs in the T3 state of a general register write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the general register is not performed. See figure 8-68. General register write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address GR address Internal write signal Input capture signal TCNT M GR M Figure 8-68 Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture Note on Waveform Period Setting: When a counter is cleared by compare match, the counter is cleared in the last state at which the TCNT value matches the general register value, at the time when this value would normally be updated to the next count. The actual counter frequency is therefore given by the following formula: f= o (N + 1) (f: counter frequency. o: system clock frequency. N: value set in general register.) 261 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If a buffer register is used for input capture buffering and an input capture signal occurs in the T3 state of a write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the buffer register is not performed. See figure 8-69. Buffer register write cycle T1 T2 T3 o Address BR address Internal write signal Input capture signal GR N X TCNT value BR M N Figure 8-69 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture 262 Note on Synchronous Preset: When channels are synchronized, if a TCNT value is modified by byte write access, all 16 bits of all synchronized counters assume the same value as the counter that was addressed. (Example) When channels 2 and 3 are synchronized * Byte write to channel 2 or byte write to channel 3 Write A to upper byte of channel 2 TCNT2 TCNT3 W Y X Z TCNT2 TCNT3 A A X X Upper byte Lower byte Write A to lower byte of channel 3 TCNT2 TCNT3 Upper byte Lower byte Y Y A A Upper byte Lower byte * Word write to channel 2 or word write to channel 3 TCNT2 TCNT3 W Y X Z Write AB word to channel 2 or 3 TCNT2 TCNT3 A A B B Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Note on Setup of Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode and Complementary PWM Mode: When setting bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR, take the following precautions: * * Write to bits CMD1 and CMD0 only when TCNT3 and TCNT4 are stopped. Do not switch directly between reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. First switch to normal mode (by clearing bit CMD1 to 0), then select resetsynchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. 263 ITU Operating Modes Table 8-11 (a) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 0) Register Settings TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR0 TCR0 Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization MDF FDIR PWM -- -- -- o ResetComple- SynchroOutput mentary nized BufferLevel PWM PWM ing XTGD Select -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Master Enable -- -- -- IOA o IOB o o* Clear Select o o o Clock Select o o o SYNC0 = 1 -- o o -- -- PWM0 = 1 -- PWM0 = 0 -- --* IOA2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o Output compare B o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture A o -- -- PWM0 = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture B o -- -- PWM0 = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 1 o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o SYNC0 = 1 -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o Legend: o Setting available (valid). -- Setting does not affect this mode. Note: * The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 264 Table 8-11 (b) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 1) Register Settings TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR1 TCR1 Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization MDF FDIR PWM -- -- -- o ResetComple- SynchroOutput mentary nized BufferLevel PWM PWM ing XTGD Select -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Master Enable -- -- -- IOA o IOB o o*1 Clear Select o o o Clock Select o o o SYNC1 = 1 -- o o -- -- PWM1 = 1 -- PWM1 = 0 -- -- IOA2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o Output compare B o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture A o -- -- PWM1 = 0 -- -- -- o*2 -- -- IOA2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture B o -- -- PWM1 = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 1 o -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o SYNC1 = 1 -- -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o Legend: o Setting available (valid). -- Setting does not affect this mode. Notes: 1. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 2. Valid only when channels 3 and 4 are operating in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode. 265 Table 8-11 (c) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 2) Register Settings TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR2 TCR2 Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization MDF FDIR PWM -- -- -- o ResetComple- SynchroOutput mentary nized BufferLevel PWM PWM ing XTGD Select -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Master Enable -- -- -- IOA o IOB o o* Clear Select o o o Clock Select o o o SYNC2 = 1 o o o o o PWM2 = 1 -- PWM2 = 0 -- -- IOA2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o Output compare B o o -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture A o -- -- PWM2 = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Input capture B o -- -- PWM2 = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- IOB2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o o Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear Phase counting mode o o -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 1 o o o -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o SYNC2 = 1 o -- o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o o MDF = 1 o o -- -- -- -- -- -- o o -- Legend: o Setting available (valid). -- Setting does not affect this mode. Note: * The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 266 Table 8-11 (d) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 3) TSNC Synchronization MDF SYNC3 = 1 -- o -- o -- TMDR Complementary PWM o*3 Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A FDIR -- -- -- PWM o PWM3 = 1 CMD1 = 0 PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 Register Settings TFCR TOCR ResetOutput SynchroLevel nized PWM Buffering XTGD Select o o -- -- CMD1 = 0 o -- -- CMD1 = 0 o -- -- TOER Master Enable o*1 o o TIOR3 Clear Select o o o TCR3 Clock Select o o o IOA o IOB o Output compare B o -- -- o CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- o Input capture A o -- -- PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- Input capture B o -- -- PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- EA3 ignored Other bits unrestricted EA3 ignored Other bits unrestricted o*1 -- o*2 IOA2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o IOB2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted IOA2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o IOA2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted o o o o o o o o Counter clearing By compare match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear Complementary PWM mode Reset-synchronized PWM mode Buffering (BRA) Buffering (BRB) o -- -- o o -- -- o Illegal setting: o*4 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 0 o*5 CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 o o o -- -- o*1 o o SYNC3 = 1 -- -- o o*3 o o -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o Illegal setting: CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 1 o o o -- -- o*1 o o CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 1 o o o o*6 o*6 o o o o o*1 -- -- o -- -- o o -- -- o o o BFA3 = 1 -- Other bits unrestricted BFB3 = 1 -- Other bits unrestricted -- -- o*1 o o o o Legend: o Setting available (valid). -- Setting does not affect this mode. Notes: 1. Master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output. 2. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 3. Do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary PWM mode is selected. 4. The counter cannot be cleared by input capture A when reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected. 5. In complementary PWM mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4. 6. Use the input capture A function in channel 1. 267 Table 8-11 (e) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 4) TSNC Synchronization MDF SYNC4 = 1 -- o -- o -- TMDR Complementary PWM o*3 Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A FDIR -- -- -- PWM o PWM4 = 1 CMD1 = 0 PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 Register Settings TFCR TOCR ResetOutput SynchroLevel nized PWM Buffering XTGD Select o o -- -- CMD1 = 0 o -- -- CMD1 = 0 o -- -- TOER Master Enable o*1 o o TIOR4 Clear Select o o o TCR4 Clock Select o o o IOA o IOB o Output compare B o -- -- o CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- o Input capture A o -- -- PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- Input capture B o -- -- PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0 o -- -- EA4 ignored Other bits unrestricted EB4 ignored Other bits unrestricted o*1 -- o*2 IOA2 = 0 o Other bits unrestricted o IOB2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted IOA2 = 1 o Other bits unrestricted o IOB2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted o o o o o o o o Counter clearing By compare match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear Complementary PWM mode Reset-synchronized PWM mode Buffering (BRA) Buffering (BRB) o -- -- o o -- -- o SYNC4 = 1 -- -- o o*3 o o -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- o Illegal setting: CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 Illegal setting: CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 Illegal setting: CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 1 o o*4 o -- -- CCLR1 = 0 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 o CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 0 o*5 CCLR0 = 0 o*6 o o*6 o o*4 o -- -- o*1 o o o*4 o -- -- o*1 o o CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 0 CMD1 = 1 CMD0 = 1 o o o o o o o o o o*1 -- -- o -- -- o o -- -- o o o BFA4 = 1 -- Other bits unrestricted BFB4 = 1 -- Other bits unrestricted -- -- o*1 o o o o Legend: o Setting available (valid). -- Setting does not affect this mode. Notes: 1. Master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output. 2. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 3. Do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary PWM mode is selected. 4. When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected, TCNT4 operates independently and the counter clearing function is available. Waveform output is not affected. 5. In complementary PWM mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4. 6. TCR4 settings are valid in reset-synchronized PWM mode, but TCNT4 operates independently, without affecting waveform output. 268 Section 9 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller 9.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has a built-in programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit integrated timer-pulse unit (ITU) as a time base. The TPC pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 to group 0) that can operate simultaneously and independently. 9.1.1 Features TPC features are listed below. * 16-bit output data Maximum 16-bit data can be output. TPC output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis. * Four output groups Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to four different 4-bit outputs. * Selectable output trigger signals Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare-match signals of four ITU channels. * Non-overlap mode A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs. 269 9.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 9-1 shows a block diagram of the TPC. ITU compare match signals PADDR Control logic NDERA TPMR PBDDR NDERB TPCR TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 TP10 TP 9 TP 8 TP 7 TP 6 TP 5 TP 4 TP 3 TP 2 TP 1 TP 0 Legend TPMR: TPCR: NDERB: NDERA: PBDDR: PADDR: NDRB: NDRA: PBDR: PADR: Pulse output pins, group 3 PBDR Pulse output pins, group 2 NDRB Internal data bus Pulse output pins, group 1 PADR Pulse output pins, group 0 NDRA TPC output mode register TPC output control register Next data enable register B Next data enable register A Port B data direction register Port A data direction register Next data register B Next data register A Port B data register Port A data register Figure 9-1 TPC Block Diagram 270 9.1.3 TPC Pins Table 9-1 summarizes the TPC output pins. Table 9-1 TPC Pins Name TPC output 0 TPC output 1 TPC output 2 TPC output 3 TPC output 4 TPC output 5 TPC output 6 TPC output 7 TPC output 8 TPC output 9 TPC output 10 TPC output 11 TPC output 12 TPC output 13 TPC output 14 TPC output 15 Symbol TP0 TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Group 3 pulse output Group 2 pulse output Group 1 pulse output Function Group 0 pulse output 271 9.1.4 Registers Table 9-2 summarizes the TPC registers. Table 9-2 TPC Registers Address*1 H'FFD1 H'FFD3 H'FFD4 H'FFD6 H'FFA0 H'FFA1 H'FFA2 H'FFA3 H'FFA5/ H'FFA7*3 H'FFA4 H'FFA6*3 Name Port A data direction register Port A data register Port B data direction register Port B data register TPC output mode register TPC output control register Next data enable register B Next data enable register A Next data register A Next data register B Abbreviation PADDR PADR PBDDR PBDR TPMR TPCR NDERB NDERA NDRA NDRB R/W W R/(W)*2 W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'F0 H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Bits used for TPC output cannot be written. 3. The NDRA address is H'FFA5 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output groups 0 and 1 by settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRA address is H'FFA7 for group 0 and H'FFA5 for group 1. Similarly, the address of NDRB is H'FFA4 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output groups 2 and 3 by settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRB address is H'FFA6 for group 2 and H'FFA4 for group 3. 272 9.2 Register Descriptions 9.2.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port A. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PA7 DDR PA6 DDR PA5 DDR PA4 DDR PA3 DDR PA2 DDR PA1 DDR PA0 DDR Port A data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port A pins Port A is multiplexed with pins TP7 to TP0. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must be set to 1. For further information about PADDR, see section 7.10, Port A. 9.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR) PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 0 and 1, when these TPC output groups are used. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PA 7 0 R/(W)* 6 PA 6 0 R/(W)* 5 PA 5 0 R/(W)* 4 PA 4 0 R/(W)* 3 PA 3 0 R/(W)* 2 PA 2 0 R/(W)* 1 PA 1 0 R/(W)* 0 PA 0 0 R/(W)* Port A data 7 to 0 These bits store output data for TPC output groups 0 and 1 Note: * Bits selected for TPC output by NDERA settings become read-only bits. For further information about PADR, see section 7.10, Port A. 273 9.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port B. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PB7 DDR PB6 DDR PB5 DDR PB4 DDR PB3 DDR PB2 DDR PB1 DDR PB0 DDR Port B data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port B pins Port B is multiplexed with pins TP15 to TP8. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must be set to 1. For further information about PBDDR, see section 7.11, Port B. 9.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR) PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 2 and 3, when these TPC output groups are used. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PB 7 0 R/(W)* 6 PB 6 0 R/(W)* 5 PB 5 0 R/(W)* 4 PB 4 0 R/(W)* 3 PB 3 0 R/(W)* 2 PB 2 0 R/(W)* 1 PB 1 0 R/(W)* 0 PB 0 0 R/(W)* Port B data 7 to 0 These bits store output data for TPC output groups 2 and 3 Note: * Bits selected for TPC output by NDERB settings become read-only bits. For further information about PBDR, see section 7.11, Port B. 274 9.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA) NDRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups 1 and 0 (pins TP7 to TP0). During TPC output, when an ITU compare match event specified in TPCR occurs, NDRA contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PADR. The address of NDRA differs depending on whether TPC output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. NDRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRA address is H'FFA5. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FFA7 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Next data 7 to 4 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Next data 3 to 0 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 0 Address H'FFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 275 Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRA (group 1) is H'FFA5 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is H'FFA7. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFA5 and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FFA7 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Next data 7 to 4 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Reserved bits Address H'FFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Reserved bits Next data 3 to 0 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 0 276 9.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB) NDRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups 3 and 2 (pins TP15 to TP8). During TPC output, when an ITU compare match event specified in TPCR occurs, NDRB contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PBDR. The address of NDRB differs depending on whether TPC output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. NDRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRB address is H'FFA4. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FFA6 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Next data 15 to 12 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Next data 11 to 8 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 2 Address H'FFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 277 Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRB (group 3) is H'FFA4 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FFA6. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFA4 and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FFA6 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Next data 15 to 12 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Reserved bits Address H'FFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Reserved bits Next data 11 to 8 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 2 278 9.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA) NDERA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 1 and 0 (TP7 to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDER7 0 R/W 6 NDER6 0 R/W 5 NDER5 0 R/W 4 NDER4 0 R/W 3 NDER3 0 R/W 2 NDER2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W NDER1 NDER0 Next data enable 7 to 0 These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 1 and 0 If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERA, then when the ITU compare match event selected in the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRA value is automatically transferred to the corresponding PADR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from NDRA to PADR and the output value does not change. NDERA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 1 and 0 (TP7 to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bits 7 to 0 NDER7 to NDER0 0 1 Description TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA7 to PA0) TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA7 to PA0) (Initial value) 279 9.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB) NDERB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 3 and 2 (TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 NDER8 0 R/W NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 Next data enable 15 to 8 These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 3 and 2 If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERB, then when the ITU compare match event selected in the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRB value is automatically transferred to the corresponding PBDR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from NDRB to PBDR and the output value does not change. NDERB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 3 and 2 (TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bits 7 to 0 NDER15 to NDER8 0 1 Description TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB7 to PB0) TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB7 to PB0) (Initial value) 280 9.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR) TPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for TPC outputs on a group-by-group basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 These bits select the compare match Group 2 compare event that triggers TPC output group 3 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP15 to TP12 ) the compare match event that triggers Group 1 compare TPC output group 2 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP11 to TP8 ) the compare match event that triggers Group 0 compare TPC output group 1 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP7 to TP4 ) the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0 ) TPCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 281 Bits 7 and 6--Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12). Bit 7 G3CMS1 0 Bit 6 G3CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8). Bit 5 G2CMS1 0 Bit 4 G2CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 (Initial value) 282 Bits 3 and 2--Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4). Bit 3 G1CMS1 0 Bit 2 G1CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0). Bit 1 G0CMS1 0 Bit 0 G0CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 (Initial value) 283 9.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR) TPMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for each group. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV Reserved bits Group 3 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 3 (TP15 to TP12 ) Group 2 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) Group 1 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) Group 0 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 0 (TP3 to TP0 ) The output trigger period of a non-overlapping TPC output waveform is set in general register B (GRB) in the ITU channel selected for output triggering. The non-overlap margin is set in general register A (GRA). The output values change at compare match A and B. For details see section 9.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output. TPMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 284 Bit 3--Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 3 (TP15 to TP12). Bit 3 G3NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 3 (output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel) (Initial value) Bit 2--Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 2 (TP11 to TP8). Bit 2 G2NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 2 (output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel) (Initial value) Bit 1--Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 1 (TP7 to TP4). Bit 1 G1NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 1 (output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel) (Initial value) Bit 0--Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 0 (TP3 to TP0). Bit 0 G0NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 0 (output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel) (Initial value) 285 9.3 Operation 9.3.1 Overview When corresponding bits in PADDR or PBDDR and NDERA or NDERB are set to 1, TPC output is enabled. The TPC output initially consists of the corresponding PADR or PBDR contents. When a compare-match event selected in TPCR occurs, the corresponding NDRA or NDRB bit contents are transferred to PADR or PBDR to update the output values. Figure 9-2 illustrates the TPC output operation. Table 9-3 summarizes the TPC operating conditions. DDR Q NDER Q Output trigger signal C Q TPC output pin DR D Q NDR D Internal data bus Figure 9-2 TPC Output Operation Table 9-3 TPC Operating Conditions NDER 0 DDR 0 1 1 0 1 Pin Function Generic input port Generic output port Generic input port (but the DR bit is a read-only bit, and when compare match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the DR bit) TPC pulse output Sequential output of up to 16-bit patterns is possible by writing new output data to NDRA and NDRB before the next compare match. For information on non-overlapping operation, see section 9.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output. 286 9.3.2 Output Timing If TPC output is enabled, NDRA/NDRB contents are transferred to PADR/PBDR and output when the selected compare match event occurs. Figure 9-3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A. o TCNT N N+1 GRA Compare match A signal N NDRB n PBDR TP8 to TP15 m m n n Figure 9-3 Timing of Transfer of Next Data Register Contents and Output (Example) 287 9.3.3 Normal TPC Output Sample Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output: Figure 9-4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal TPC output. Normal TPC output Select GR functions Set GRA value ITU setup Select counting operation Select interrupt request 1 2 3 4 1. Set initial output data Select port output Port and TPC setup Enable TPC output Select TPC output trigger Set next TPC output data 5 6 7 8 9 Set TIOR to make GRA an output compare register (with output inhibited). 2. Set the TPC output trigger period. 3. Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. 4. Enable the IMFA interrupt in TIER. 5. Set the initial output values in the DR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output. 6. Set the DDR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 7. Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 8. Select the ITU compare match event to be used as the TPC output trigger in TPCR. 9. Set the next TPC output values in the NDR bits. 10. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. 11. At each IMFA interrupt, set the next output values in the NDR bits. ITU setup Start counter 10 Compare match? Yes Set next TPC output data No 11 Figure 9-4 Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output (Example) 288 Example of Normal TPC Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 9-5 shows an example in which the TPC is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. TCNT value TCNT GRA Compare match H'0000 NDRB 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 40 Time PBDR 00 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 * * * * The ITU channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that GRA is an output compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. The trigger period is set in GRA. The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TIER to enable the compare match A interrupt. H'F8 is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set in TPCR to select compare match in the ITU channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. Output data H'80 is written in NDRB. The timer counter in this ITU channel is started. When compare match A occurs, the NDRB contents are transferred to PBDR and output. The compare match/input capture A (IMFA) interrupt service routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRB. Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30, H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive IMFA interrupts. Figure 9-5 Normal TPC Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) 289 9.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output: Figure 9-6 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping TPC output. Non-overlapping TPC output Select GR functions Set GR values ITU setup Select counting operation Select interrupt requests 3 4 1 2 1. Set TIOR to make GRA and GRB output compare registers (with output inhibited). 2. Set the TPC output trigger period in GRB and the non-overlap margin in GRA. 3. Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. 4. Enable the IMFA interrupt in TIER. 5. Set the initial output values in the DR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output. 6. Set the DDR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 7. Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 8. In TPCR, select the ITU compare match event to be used as the TPC output trigger. 9. In TPMR, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. 10. Set the next TPC output values in the NDR bits. 11. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. 12. At each IMFA interrupt, write the next output value in the NDR bits. Set initial output data Set up TPC output Enable TPC transfer Port and TPC setup Select TPC transfer trigger Select non-overlapping groups Set next TPC output data 5 6 7 8 9 10 ITU setup Start counter 11 Compare match A? Yes Set next TPC output data No 12 Figure 9-6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example) 290 Example of Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary NonOverlapping Output): Figure 9-7 shows an example of the use of TPC output for four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output. TCNT value GRB GRA H'0000 NDRB 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time TCNT PBDR 00 95 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 Non-overlap margin TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 TP10 TP9 TP8 * The ITU channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that GRA and GRB are output compare registers and the counter will be cleared by compare match B. The TPC output trigger period is set in GRB. The non-overlap margin is set in GRA. The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TIER to enable IMFA interrupts. * H'FF is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set Bits G3NOV and G2NOV are set to 1 in TPMR to select non-overlapping output. Output data H'95 is written in NDRB. * The timer counter in this ITU channel is started. When compare match B occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. When compare match A occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value of GRA). The IMFA interrupt service routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRB. * Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained by writing H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive IMFA interrupts. Figure 9-7 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Pulse Output) 291 9.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture TPC output can be triggered by ITU input capture as well as by compare match. If GRA functions as an input capture register in the ITU channel selected in TPCR, TPC output will be triggered by the input capture signal. Figure 9-8 shows the timing. o TIOC pin Input capture signal NDR N DR M N Figure 9-8 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture (Example) 292 9.4 Usage Notes 9.4.1 Operation of TPC Output Pins TP0 to TP15 are multiplexed with ITU pin functions. When ITU output is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for TPC output. The data transfer from NDR bits to DR bits takes place, however, regardless of the usage of the pin. Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. 9.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit values to DR bits takes place as follows. 1. 2. NDR bits are always transferred to DR bits at compare match A. At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred if their value is 1. Figure 9-9 illustrates the non-overlapping TPC output operation. DDR Q NDER Q Compare match A Compare match B C Q TPC output pin DR D Q NDR D Internal data bus Figure 9-9 Non-Overlapping TPC Output 293 Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before compare match A. NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin). This can be accomplished by having the IMFA interrupt service routine write the next data in NDR, or by having the IMFA interrupt activate the DMAC. The next data must be written before the next compare match B occurs. Figure 9-10 shows the timing relationships. Compare match A Compare match B NDR write NDR write NDR DR 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR in this interval Do not write to NDR in this interval Do not write to NDR in this interval 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR in this interval Figure 9-10 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing 294 Section 10 Watchdog Timer 10.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT). The WDT has two selectable functions: it can operate as a watchdog timer to supervise system operation, or it can operate as an interval timer. As a watchdog timer, it generates a reset signal for the H8/3032 Series chip if a system crash allows the timer counter (TCNT) to overflow before being rewritten. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is requested at each TCNT overflow. 10.1.1 Features WDT features are listed below. * Selection of eight counter clock sources o/2, o/32, o/64, o/128, o/256, o/512, o/2048, or o/4096 * * Interval timer option Timer counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt. The reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation. An interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. * Watchdog timer reset signal resets the entire H8/3032 Series internally, and can also be output externally. The reset signal generated by timer counter overflow during watchdog timer operation resets the entire H8/3032 Series internally. An external reset signal can be output from the RESO pin to reset other system devices simultaneously. 295 10.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 10-1 shows a block diagram of the WDT. Overflow TCNT Interrupt signal (interval timer) Interrupt control TCSR Read/ write control Internal data bus RSTCSR Internal clock sources o/2 o/32 Reset (internal, external) Reset control o/64 Clock Clock selector o/128 o/256 o/512 o/2048 o/4096 Legend TCNT: Timer counter TCSR: Timer control/status register RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Figure 10-1 WDT Block Diagram 10.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 10-1 describes the WDT output pin. Table 10-1 WDT Pin Name Reset output Abbreviation RESO I/O Output* Function External output of the watchdog timer reset signal Note: * Open-drain output. 296 10.1.4 Register Configuration Table 10-2 summarizes the WDT registers. Table 10-2 WDT Registers Address*1 Write*2 H'FFA8 Read H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFAB Name Timer control/status register Timer counter Reset control/status register Abbreviation TCSR TCNT RSTCSR R/W R/(W)*3 R/W R/(W)*3 Initial Value H'18 H'00 H'3F Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Write word data starting at this address. 3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 297 10.2 Register Descriptions 10.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT is an 8-bit readable and writable* up-counter. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from an internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0. Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password. For details see section 10.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 298 10.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable*1 register. Its functions include selecting the timer mode and clock source. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)*2 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select These bits select the TCNT clock source Reserved bits Timer enable Selects whether TCNT runs or halts Timer mode select Selects the mode Overflow flag Status flag indicating overflow Bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 by a reset. In software standby mode bits 2 to 0 are not initialized, but retain their previous values. Notes: 1. TCSR is write-protected by a password. For details see section 10.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 299 Bit 7--Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates that the timer counter has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF [Setting condition] Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00 (Initial value) Bit 6--Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether to use the WDT as a watchdog timer or interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request when TCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset signal when TCNT overflows. Bit 6 WT/IT 0 1 Description Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal (Initial value) Bit 5--Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted. Bit 5 TME 0 1 Description TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted TCNT is counting (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 300 Bits 2 to 0--Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2/1/0): These bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by prescaling the system clock (o), for input to TCNT. Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description o/2 o/32 o/64 o/128 o/256 o/512 o/2048 o/4096 (Initial value) 10.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable*1 register that indicates when a reset signal has been generated by watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the reset signal. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 WRST 0 R/(W)*2 6 RSTOE 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Reserved bits Reset output enable Enables or disables external output of the reset signal Watchdog timer reset Indicates that a reset signal has been generated Bits 7 and 6 are initialized by input of a reset signal at the RES pin. They are not initialized by reset signals generated by watchdog timer overflow. Notes: 1. RSTCSR is write-protected by a password. For details see section 10.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 301 Bit 7--Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST): During watchdog timer operation, this bit indicates that TCNT has overflowed and generated a reset signal. This reset signal resets the entire H8/3003 chip internally. If bit RSTOE is set to 1, this reset signal is also output (low) at the RESO pin to initialize external system devices. Bit 7 WRST 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Cleared to 0 by reset signal input at RES pin, or by writing 0 (Initial value) [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflow generates a reset signal during watchdog timer operation Bit 6--Reset Output Enable (RSTOE): Enables or disables external output at the RESO pin of the reset signal generated if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. Bit 6 RSTOE 0 1 Description Reset signal is not output externally Reset signal is output externally (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 302 10.2.4 Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written by byte instructions. Figure 10-2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. The write data must be contained in the lower byte of the written word. The upper byte must contain H'5A (password for TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. TCNT write Address H'FFA8* 15 H'5A 87 Write data 0 TCSR write Address H'FFA8* 15 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Figure 10-2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR 303 Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written by a word transfer instruction. It cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. Figure 10-3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. To write 0 in the WRST bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower byte. The H'00 in the lower byte clears the WRST bit in RSTCSR to 0. To write to the RSTOE bit, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. Writing this word transfers a write data value into the RSTOE bit. Writing 0 in WRST bit Address H'FFAA* 15 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Writing to RSTOE bit Address H'FFAA* 15 H'5A 87 Write data 0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Figure 10-3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: These registers are read like other registers. Byte access instructions can be used. The read addresses are H'FFA8 for TCSR, H'FFA9 for TCNT, and H'FFAB for RSTCSR, as listed in table 10-3. Table 10-3 Read Addresses of TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR Address* H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAB Register TCSR TCNT RSTCSR Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 304 10.3 Operation Operations when the WDT is used as a watchdog timer and as an interval timer are described below. 10.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation Figure 10-4 illustrates watchdog timer operation. To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in TCSR. Software must prevent TCNT overflow by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. If TCNT fails to be rewritten and overflows due to a system crash etc., the H8/3032 Series is internally reset for a duration of 518 states. The watchdog reset signal can be externally output from the RESO pin to reset external system devices. The reset signal is output externally for 132 states. External output can be enabled or disabled by the RSTOE bit in RSTCSR. A watchdog reset has the same vector as a reset generated by input at the RES pin. Software can distinguish a RES reset from a watchdog reset by checking the WRST bit in RSTCSR. If a RES reset and a watchdog reset occur simultaneously, the RES reset takes priority. WDT overflow H'FF TCNT count value H'00 TME set to 1 OVF = 1 Start Internal reset signal H'00 written in TCNT Reset H'00 written in TCNT 518 states RESO 132 states Figure 10-4 Watchdog Timer Operation 305 10.3.2 Interval Timer Operation Figure 10-5 illustrates interval timer operation. To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear bit WT/IT to 0 and set bit TME to 1 in TCSR. An interval timer interrupt request is generated at each TCNT overflow. This function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals. H'FF TCNT count value Time t H'00 WT/ IT = 0 TME = 1 Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Figure 10-5 Interval Timer Operation 306 10.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) Figure 10-6 shows the timing of setting of the OVF flag in TCSR. The OVF flag is set to 1 when TCNT overflows. At the same time, a reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation, or an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. o TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 10-6 Timing of Setting of OVF 307 10.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST) The WRST bit in RSTCSR is valid when bits WT/IT and TME are both set to 1 in TCSR. Figure 10-7 shows the timing of setting of WRST and the internal reset timing. The WRST bit is set to 1 when TCNT overflows and OVF is set to 1. At the same time an internal reset signal is generated for the entire H8/3032 Series chip. This internal reset signal clears OVF to 0, but the WRST bit remains set to 1. The reset routine must therefore clear the WRST bit. o TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF WDT internal reset WRST Figure 10-7 Timing of Setting of WRST Bit and Internal Reset 308 10.4 Interrupts During interval timer operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. 10.5 Usage Notes Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to TCNT, the write takes priority and the timer count is not incremented. See figure 10-8. Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT T1 o T2 T3 TCNT Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 10-8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Changing CKS2 to CKS0 Values: Halt TCNT by clearing the TME bit to 0 in TCSR before changing the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 309 310 Section 11 Serial Communication Interface 11.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has a serial communication interface (SCI). The SCI can communicate in asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, and has a multiprocessor communication function for serial communication among two or more processors. 11.1.1 Features SCI features are listed below. * a. Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode for serial communication Asynchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized one character at a time. The SCI can communicate with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART), asynchronous communication interface adapter (ACIA), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous serial communication. It can also communicate with two or more other processors using the multiprocessor communication function. There are twelve selectable serial data communication formats. -- -- -- -- -- -- b. Data length: Stop bit length: Parity bit: Multiprocessor bit: Receive error detection: Break detection: 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits even, odd, or none 1 or 0 parity, overrun, and framing errors by reading the RxD level directly when a framing error occurs Synchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. The SCI can communicate with other chips having a synchronous communication function. There is one serial data communication format. -- Data length: 8 bits -- Receive error detection: overrun errors 311 * Full duplex communication The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the SCI can transmit and receive simultaneously. The transmitting and receiving sections are both double-buffered, so serial data can be transmitted and received continuously. * * Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates Selectable transmit/receive clock sources: internal clock from baud rate generator, or external clock from the SCK pin. Four types of interrupts Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. * 312 11.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Bus interface BRR Baud rate generator Clock External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Internal data bus Module data bus RDR RxD RSR TDR TSR SSR SCR SMR Transmit/ receive control TxD o o/4 o/16 o/64 Parity generate Parity check SCK Legend RSR: Receive shift register RDR: Receive data register TSR: Transmit shift register TDR: Transmit data register SMR: Serial mode register SCR: Serial control register SSR: Serial status register BRR: Bit rate register Figure 11-1 SCI Block Diagram 313 11.1.3 Input/Output Pins The SCI has serial pins for each channel as listed in table 11-1. Table 11-1 SCI Pins Name Serial clock pin Receive data pin Transmit data pin Abbreviation SCK RxD TxD I/O Input/output Input Output Function SCI clock input/output SCI receive data input SCI transmit data output 11.1.4 Register Configuration The SCI has internal registers as listed in table 11-2. These registers select asynchronous or synchronous mode, specify the data format and bit rate, and control the transmitter and receiver sections. Table 11-2 Registers Channel 0 Address*1 H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 1 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 H'FFBA H'FFBB H'FFBC H'FFBD Name Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Abbreviation SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R Initial Value H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 314 11.2 Register Descriptions 11.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) RSR is the register that receives serial data. Bit Initial value Read/Write -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The SCI loads serial data input at the RxD pin into RSR in the order received, LSB (bit 0) first, thereby converting the data to parallel data. When 1 byte has been received, it is automatically transferred to RDR. The CPU cannot read or write RSR directly. 11.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is the register that stores received serial data. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R When the SCI finishes receiving 1 byte of serial data, it transfers the received data from RSR into RDR for storage. RSR is then ready to receive the next data. This double buffering allows data to be received continuously. RDR is a read-only register. Its contents cannot be modified by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 315 11.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is the register that transmits serial data. Bit Initial value Read/Write -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The SCI loads transmit data from TDR into TSR, then transmits the data serially from the TxD pin, LSB (bit 0) first. After transmitting one data byte, the SCI automatically loads the next transmit data from TDR into TSR and starts transmitting it. If the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR, however, the SCI does not load the TDR contents into TSR. The CPU cannot read or write TSR directly. 11.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it moves transmit data written in TDR from TDR into TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission is possible by writing the next transmit data in TDR during serial transmission from TSR. The CPU can always read and write TDR. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. 316 11.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is an 8-bit register that specifies the SCI serial communication format and selects the clock source for the baud rate generator. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 1/0 These bits select the baud rate generator's clock source Multiprocessor mode Selects the multiprocessor function Stop bit length Selects the stop bit length Parity mode Selects even or odd parity Parity enable Selects whether a parity bit is added Character length Selects character length in asynchronous mode Communication mode Selects asynchronous or synchronous mode The CPU can always read and write SMR. SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 317 Bit 7--Communication Mode (C/A): Selects whether the SCI operates in asynchronous or synchronous mode. Bit 7 C/A 0 1 Description Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode (Initial value) Bit 6--Character Length (CHR): Selects 7-bit or 8-bit data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode the data length is 8 bits regardless of the CHR setting. Bit 6 CHR 0 1 Description 8-bit data 7-bit data* (Initial value) Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) in TDR is not transmitted. Bit 5--Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables the addition of a parity bit to transmit data, and the checking of the parity bit in receive data. In synchronous mode the parity bit is neither added nor checked, regardless of the PE setting. Bit 5 PE 0 1 Description Parity bit not added or checked Parity bit added and checked* (Initial value) Note: * When PE is set to 1, an even or odd parity bit is added to transmit data according to the even or odd parity mode selected by the O/E bit, and the parity bit in receive data is checked to see that it matches the even or odd mode selected by the O/E bit. 318 Bit 4--Parity Mode (O/E): Selects even or odd parity. The O/E bit setting is valid in asynchronous mode when the PE bit is set to 1 to enable the adding and checking of a parity bit. The O/E setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when parity adding and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode. Bit 4 O/E 0 1 Description Even parity*1 Odd parity*2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. When even parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an even number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must have an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. 2. When odd parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an odd number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must have an odd number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. Bit 3--Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects one or two stop bits in asynchronous mode. This setting is used only in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode no stop bit is added, so the STOP bit setting is ignored. Bit 3 STOP 0 1 Description One stop bit*1 Two stop bits*2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. One stop bit (with value 1) is added at the end of each transmitted character. 2. Two stop bits (with value 1) are added at the end of each transmitted character. In receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 1 it is treated as a stop bit. If the second stop bit is 0 it is treated as the start bit of the next incoming character. 319 Bit 2--Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects a multiprocessor format. When a multiprocessor format is selected, parity settings made by the PE and O/E bits are ignored. The MP bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode. It is ignored in synchronous mode. For further information on the multiprocessor communication function, see section 11.3.3, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Bit 2 MP 0 1 Description Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1/0): These bits select the clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. Four clock sources are available: o, o/4, o/16, and o/64. For the relationship between the clock source, bit rate register setting, and baud rate, see section 11.2.8, Bit Rate Register. Bit 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Description o o/4 o/16 o/64 (Initial value) 320 11.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) SCR enables the SCI transmitter and receiver, enables or disables serial clock output in asynchronous mode, enables or disables interrupts, and selects the transmit/receive clock source. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W Clock enable 1/0 These bits select the SCI clock source Transmit end interrupt enable Enables or disables transmitend interrupts (TEI) Multiprocessor interrupt enable Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts Receive enable Enables or disables the receiver Transmit enable Enables or disables the transmitter Receive interrupt enable Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupts (RXI) and receive-error interrupts (ERI) Transmit interrupt enable Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupts (TXI) The CPU can always read and write SCR. SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 321 Bit 7--Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) requested when the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1 due to transfer of serial transmit data from TDR to TSR. Bit 7 TIE 0 1 Description Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled* Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled (Initial value) Note: * TXI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the TIE bit to 0. Bit 6--Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR due to transfer of serial receive data from RSR to RDR; also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI). Bit 6 RIE 0 1 Description Receive-end (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled (Initial value) Receive-end (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the RIE bit to 0. Bit 5--Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial transmitting operations. Bit 5 TE 0 1 Description Transmitting disabled*1 Transmitting enabled*2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. The TDRE bit is locked at 1 in SSR. 2. In the enabled state, serial transmitting starts when the TDRE bit in SSR is cleared to 0 after writing of transmit data into TDR. Select the transmit format in SMR before setting the TE bit to 1. 322 Bit 4--Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial receiving operations. Bit 4 RE 0 1 Description Receiving disabled*1 Receiving enabled*2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags. These flags retain their previous values. 2. In the enabled state, serial receiving starts when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. Select the receive format in SMR before setting the RE bit to 1. Bit 3--Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only if the MP bit is set to 1 in SMR. The MPIE setting is ignored in synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 MPIE 0 Description Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) [Clearing conditions] The MPIE bit is cleared to 0. MPB = 1 in received data. (Initial value) 1 Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled* Receive-data-full interrupts (RXI), receive-error interrupts (ERI), and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. Note: * The SCI does not transfer receive data from RSR to RDR, does not detect receive errors, and does not set the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR. When it receives data in which MPB = 1, the SCI sets the MPB bit to 1 in SSR, automatically clears the MPIE bit to 0, enables RXI and ERI interrupts (if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR), and allows the FER and ORER flags to be set. 323 Bit 2--Transmit-End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) requested if TDR does not contain new transmit data when the MSB is transmitted. Bit 2 TEIE 0 1 Description Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled* Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled* (Initial value) Note: * TEI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing the TDRE flag to 0, thereby also clearing the TEND flag to 0; or by clearing the TEIE bit to 0. Bits 1 and 0--Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1/0): These bits select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. Depending on the settings of CKE1 and CKE0, the SCK pin can be used for generic input/output, serial clock output, or serial clock input. The CKE0 setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the SCI is internally clocked (CKE1 = 0). The CKE0 setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when an external clock source is selected (CKE1 = 1). Select the SCI operating mode in SMR before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits. For further details on selection of the SCI clock source, see table 11-9 in section 11.3, Operation. Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 Description Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 1 0 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 1 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin available for generic input/output *1 Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output *1 Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output *2 Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output External clock, SCK pin used for clock input *3 External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input External clock, SCK pin used for clock input *3 External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input Notes: 1. Initial value 2. The output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate. 3. The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate. 324 11.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status flags that indicate SCI operating status. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor bit transfer Value of multiprocessor bit to be transmitted Multiprocessor bit Stores the received multiprocessor bit value Transmit end Status flag indicating end of transmission Parity error Status flag indicating detection of a receive parity error Framing error Status flag indicating detection of a receive framing error Overrun error Status flag indicating detection of a receive overrun error Receive data register full Status flag indicating that data has been received and stored in RDR Transmit data register empty Status flag indicating that transmit data has been transferred from TDR into TSR and new data can be written in TDR Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 325 The CPU can always read and write SSR, but cannot write 1 in the TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER flags. These flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read while set to 1. The TEND and MPB flags are read-only bits that cannot be written. SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that the SCI has loaded transmit data from TDR into TSR and the next serial transmit data can be written in TDR. Bit 7 TDRE 0 Description TDR contains valid transmit data [Clearing conditions] Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0. TDR does not contain valid transmit data [Setting conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. The TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. TDR contents are loaded into TSR, so new data can be written in TDR. (Initial value) 1 Bit 6--Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that RDR contains new receive data. Bit 6 RDRF 0 Description RDR does not contain new receive data [Clearing conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. Software reads RDRF while it is set to 1, then writes 0. The DMAC reads data from RDR. RDR contains new receive data [Setting condition] When serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR. (Initial value) 1 Note: The RDR contents and RDRF flag are not affected by detection of receive errors or by clearing of the RE bit to 0 in SCR. They retain their previous values. If the RDRF flag is still set to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error occurs and receive data is lost. 326 Bit 5--Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an overrun error. Bit 5 ORER 0 Description Receiving is in progress or has ended normally [Clearing conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. Software reads ORER while it is set to 1, then writes 0. A receive overrun error occurred*2 [Setting condition] Reception of the next serial data ends when RDRF = 1. (Initial value)*1 1 Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ORER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. RDR continues to hold the receive data before the overrun error, so subsequent receive data is lost. Serial receiving cannot continue while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. Bit 4--Framing Error (FER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing error in asynchronous mode. Bit 4 FER 0 Description Receiving is in progress or has ended normally [Clearing conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. Software reads FER while it is set to 1, then writes 0. A receive framing error occurred*2 [Setting condition] The stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to be 0. (Initial value)*1 1 Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the FER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. When the stop bit length is 2 bits, only the first bit is checked. The second stop bit is not checked. When a framing error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but does not set the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. 327 Bit 3--Parity Error (PER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a parity error in asynchronous mode. Bit 3 PER 0 Description Receiving is in progress or has ended normally*1 [Clearing conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. Software reads PER while it is set to 1, then writes 0. (Initial value) 1 A receive parity error occurred*2 [Setting condition] The number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does not match the even or odd parity setting of O/E in SMR. Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the PER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. When a parity error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but does not set the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. Bit 2--Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted TDR did not contain new transmit data, so transmission has ended. The TEND flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. Bit 2 TEND 0 Description Transmission is in progress [Clearing conditions] Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the TDRE flag. End of transmission [Setting conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. The TE bit is cleared to 0 in SCR. TDRE is 1 when the last bit of a serial character is transmitted. (Initial value) 1 328 Bit 1--Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in receive data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. MPB is a read-only bit and cannot be written. Bit 1 MPB 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0* Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 (Initial value) Note: * If the RE bit is cleared to 0 when a multiprocessor format is selected, MPB retains its previous value. Bit 0--Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added to transmit data when a multiprocessor format is selected for transmitting in asynchronous mode. The MPBT setting is ignored in synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not selected, or when the SCI is not transmitting. Bit 0 MPBT 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 (Initial value) 11.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in SMR that select the baud rate generator clock source, determines the serial communication bit rate. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W The CPU can always read and write BRR. BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. The two SCI channels have independent baud rate generator control, so different values can be set in the two channels. Table 11-3 shows examples of BRR settings in asynchronous mode. Table 11-4 shows examples of BRR settings in synchronous mode. 329 Table 11-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode o (MHz) 2 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 141 103 207 103 51 25 12 6 2 1 1 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 8.51 0 -18.62 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.097152 N 148 108 217 108 54 26 13 6 2 1 1 Error (%) -0.04 0.21 0.21 0.21 -0.70 1.14 -2.48 -2.48 13.78 4.86 -14.67 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.4576 N 174 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 3 1 1 Error (%) -0.26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22.88 0 n 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 212 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 4 2 -- 3 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 -2.34 0 -- o (MHz) 3.6864 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N 64 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 5 -- 2 Error (%) 0.70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 6 3 2 4 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 0 8.51 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.9152 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 Error (%) 0.31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1.70 0 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 1.73 0 1.73 330 Table 11-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont) o (MHz) 6 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 Error (%) -0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 0 -2.34 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6.144 N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.40 0 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7.3728 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 6 5 Error (%) -0.07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5.33 0 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 6 8 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0 -6.99 o (MHz) 9.8304 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) -0.26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1.70 0 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 0 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 212 155 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 11 9 12 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 0 -2.34 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.288 N 217 159 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 11 9 Error (%) 0.08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.40 0 331 Table 11-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont) o (MHz) 14 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 248 181 90 181 90 181 90 45 22 13 10 Error (%) -0.17 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -0.93 -0.93 0 3.57 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.7456 N 64 191 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 14 11 Error (%) 0.70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1.70 0 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0 0.16 332 Table 11-4 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode o (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5 k 5k 10 k 25 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1M 2M 2.5 M 4M Note: Settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. Legend Blank: No setting available --: Setting possible, but error occurs *: Continuous transmit/receive not possible The BRR setting is calculated as follows: Asynchronous mode: N= o 64 x 22n-1 o 8 x 22n-1 x B xB x 106 - 1 2 n 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n -- 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* n -- 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 8 N -- 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0* -- n -- -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 0 10 N -- -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 -- -- 0* n -- 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 16 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 1 -- 0* Synchronous mode: N= B: N: o: n: x 106 - 1 Bit rate (bits/s) BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) System clock frequency (MHz) Baud rate generator clock source (n = 0, 1, 2, 3) (For the clock sources and values of n, see the table below.) 333 SMR Settings n 0 1 2 3 Clock Source o o/4 o/16 o/64 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows. o x 106 Error (%) = (N + 1) x B x 64 x 22n-1 -1 x 100 334 Table 11-5 indicates the maximum bit rates in asynchronous mode for various system clock frequencies. Tables 11-6 and 11-7 indicate the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Table 11-5 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies (Asynchronous Mode) Settings o (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 62500 65536 76800 93750 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 307200 312500 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 335 Table 11-6 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) o (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.5000 0.5243 0.6144 0.7500 0.9216 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 1.5000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 3.0000 3.0720 3.5000 3.6864 4.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 31250 32768 38400 46875 57600 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 218750 230400 250000 336 Table 11-7 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) o (MHz) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.3333 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 2.3333 2.6667 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 333333.3 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 2333333.3 2666666.7 337 11.3 Operation 11.3.1 Overview The SCI has an asynchronous mode in which characters are synchronized individually, and a synchronous mode in which communication is synchronized with clock pulses. Serial communication is possible in either mode. Asynchronous or synchronous mode and the communication format are selected in SMR, as shown in table 11-8. The SCI clock source is selected by the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 11-9. Asynchronous Mode * * Data length is selectable: 7 or 8 bits. Parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable. So is the stop bit length (1 or 2 bits). These selections determine the communication format and character length. In receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors, parity errors, overrun errors, and the break state. An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source. -- When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal with a frequency matching the bit rate. -- When an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency 16 times the bit rate. (The on-chip baud rate generator is not used.) Synchronous Mode * * * The communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length. In receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors. An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source. -- When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and outputs a serial clock signal to external devices. -- When an external clock is selected, the SCI operates on the input serial clock. The on-chip baud rate generator is not used. * * 338 Table 11-8 SMR Settings and Serial Communication Formats SCI Communication Format SMR Settings Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3 C/A CHR MP PE STOP Mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 -- 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- Synchronous mode 8-bit data Absent Asynchronous mode (multiprocessor format) 8-bit data Present Absent Present 7-bit data Absent Asynchronous mode Data Length 8-bit data Multiprocessor Bit Absent Parity Bit Absent Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits Present 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 7-bit data 1 bit 2 bits None Table 11-9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection SMR SCR Settings SCI Transmit/Receive Clock Mode Asynchronous mode Clock Source Internal SCK Pin Function SCI does not use the SCK pin Outputs a clock with frequency matching the bit rate External Inputs a clock with frequency 16 times the bit rate Outputs the serial clock Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0 C/A CKE1 CKE0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Synchronous mode Internal External Inputs the serial clock 339 11.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends with a stop bit. Serial communication is synchronized one character at a time. The transmitting and receiving sections of the SCI are independent, so full duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and receiver are both double buffered, so data can be written and read while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving. Figure 11-2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication the communication line is normally held in the mark (high) state. The SCI monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state, indicating a start bit. One serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (LSB first), parity bit (high or low), and stop bit (high), in that order. When receiving in asynchronous mode, the SCI synchronizes at the falling edge of the start bit. The SCI samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. Receive data is latched at the center of each bit. 1 Serial data 0 Start bit 1 bit (LSB) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 (MSB) D7 0/1 Parity bit 1 Idle (mark) state 1 1 Transmit or receive data 7 bits or 8 bits One unit of data (character or frame) Stop bit 1 bit or 1 bit or no bit 2 bits Figure 11-2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example: 8-Bit Data with Parity and 2 Stop Bits) 340 Communication Formats: Table 11-10 shows the 12 communication formats that can be selected in asynchronous mode. The format is selected by settings in SMR. Table 11-10 Serial Communication Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 PE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- -- -- -- MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S S S S S S S S S Serial Communication Format and Frame Length 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP STOP STOP P P STOP STOP STOP P P STOP STOP STOP MPB STOP STOP STOP STOP 11 12 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 8 bit data S S S 8 bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP MPB STOP MPB STOP STOP Legend S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit 341 Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI transmit/receive clock. The clock source is selected by the C/A bit in SMR and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. See table 11-9. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, it must have a frequency equal to 16 times the desired bit rate. When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the SCK pin. The frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. The phase is aligned as in figure 11-3 so that the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit. 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 O/I 1 1 1 frame Figure 11-3 Phase Relationship between Output Clock and Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode) Transmitting and Receiving Data SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows. When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and initializes TSR. Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags and RDR, which retain their previous contents. When an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent operation. SCI operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped. Figure 11-4 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI. 342 Start of initialization Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (leaving TE and RE bits cleared to 0) 1 1. Select the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0. If clock output is selected in asynchronous mode, clock output starts immediately after the setting is made in SCR. 2. Select the communication format in SMR. 3. Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. This step is not necessary when an external clock is used. 4. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive 1 bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR. Set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary. Setting the TE or RE bit enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. Select communication format in SMR 2 Set value in BRR Wait 3 1 bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary No 4 Transmitting or receiving Figure 11-4 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization 343 Transmitting Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 11-5 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. 1 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. 2. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. 3. To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. 4. To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the DR bit to 0 (DDR and DR are I/O port registers), then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR. Initialize Start transmitting Read TDRE flag in SSR 2 No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR All data transmitted? Yes No 3 Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes Output break signal? Yes Clear DR bit to 0, set DDR bit to 1 Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR No 4 End Figure 11-5 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data 344 In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin: -- Start bit: One 0 bit is output. -- Transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first. -- Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor bit is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. -- Stop bit: One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. -- Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. * The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads new data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time. * Figure 11-6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in asynchronous mode. 1 Start bit 0 Data D0 D1 D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 Data D0 D1 D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 Idle (mark) state TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and clears TDRE flag to 0 1 frame TXI interrupt request TEI interrupt request Figure 11-6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data with Parity and 1 Stop Bit) 345 Receiving Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 11-7 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize 1 Start receiving Read ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR 2 PER RER ORER = 1? No Yes 3 Error handling (continued on next page) Read RDRF flag in SSR 4 No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR 1. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. 2., 3. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER, PER, and FER flags all to 0. Receiving cannot resume if any of the ORER, PER, and FER flags remains set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. 4. SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that RDRF is set to 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. 5. To continue receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the stop bit of the current frame is received. No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR End 5 Figure 11-7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (1) 346 3 Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR Yes No PER = 1? Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags to 0 in SSR End Figure 11-7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (2) 347 In receiving, the SCI operates as follows. * The SCI monitors the receive data line. When it detects a start bit, the SCI synchronizes internally and starts receiving. Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB. The parity bit and stop bit are received. * * After receiving, the SCI makes the following checks: -- Parity check: The number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity setting of the O/E bit in SMR. -- Stop bit check: The stop bit value must be 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first stop bit is checked. -- Status check: The RDRF flag must be 0 so that receive data can be transferred from RSR into RDR. If these checks all pass, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in RDR. If one of the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 11-11. Note: When a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. In receiving, the RDRF flag is not set to 1. Be sure to clear the error flags. * When the RDRF flag is set to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) is requested. If the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested. Table 11-11 Receive Error Conditions Receive Error Overrun error Abbreviation ORER Condition Receiving of next data ends while RDRF flag is still set to 1 in SSR Stop bit is 0 Parity of receive data differs from even/odd parity setting in SMR Data Transfer Receive data not transferred from RSR to RDR Receive data transferred from RSR to RDR Receive data transferred from RSR to RDR Framing error Parity error FER PER 348 Figure 11-8 shows an example of SCI receive operation in asynchronous mode. 1 Start bit 0 Data D0 D1 D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 Data D0 D1 D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 Idle (mark) state RDRF FER RXI request 1 frame RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF flag to 0 Framing error, ERI request Figure 11-8 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit) 11.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format). In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID. A serial communication cycle consists of an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending cycles from data-sending cycles. The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0. Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. When they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the data with their IDs. The receiving processor with a matching ID continues to receive further incoming data. Processors with IDs not matching the received data skip further incoming data until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Multiple processors can send and receive data in this way. Figure 11-9 shows an example of communication among different processors using a multiprocessor format. 349 Communication Formats: Four formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is selected. For details see table 11-8. Clock: See the description of asynchronous mode. Transmitting processor Serial communication line Receiving processor A (ID = 01) Receiving processor B Receiving processor C Receiving processor D (ID = 02) (ID = 03) (ID = 04) Serial data H'01 (MPB = 1) ID-sending cycle: receiving processor address H'AA (MPB = 0) Data-sending cycle: data sent to receiving processor specified by ID Legend MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 11-9 Example of Communication among Processors using Multiprocessor Format (Sending Data H'AA to Receiving Processor A) 350 Transmitting and Receiving Data Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 11-10 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start transmitting 1 Read TDRE flag in SSR TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data in TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 No No 2 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. 2. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR. Also set the MPBT flag to 0 or 1 in SSR. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. 3. To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. 4. To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the DR bit to 0 (DDR and DR are I/O port registers), then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR. All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR 3 TEND = 1? Yes Output break signal? Yes Clear DR bit to 0, set DDR bit to 1 Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR No No 4 End Figure 11-10 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data 351 In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. * Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin: -- -- -- -- -- * Start bit: Transmit data: Multiprocessor bit: Stop bit: Mark state: One 0 bit is output. 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first. One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output. One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag in SSR to 1, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time. Figure 11-11 shows an example of SCI transmit operation using a multiprocessor format. Multiprocessor bit 1 Multiprocessor bit Data D0 D1 D7 0/1 Stop bit 1 1 Start bit 0 Data D0 D1 D7 0/1 Stop Start bit bit 1 0 Serial data Idle (mark) state TDRE TEND TXI request TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and clears TDRE flag to 0 1 frame TXI request TEI request Figure 11-11 Example of SCI Transmit Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit) 352 Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 11-12 shows a sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start receiving 1 Set MPIE bit to 1 in SCR 2 Read ORER and FER flags in SSR Yes FER PRER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data from RDR No Own ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR 3 1. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. 2. ID receive cycle: set the MPIE bit to 1 in SCR. 3. SCI status check and ID check: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read data from RDR and compare with the processor's own ID. If the ID does not match, set the MPIE bit to 1 again and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the ID matches, clear the RDRF flag to 0. 4. SCI status check and data receiving: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read data from RDR. 5. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER and FER flags both to 0. Receiving cannot resume while either the ORER or FER flag remains set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. FER ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes 4 No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data from RDR No No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR End 5 Error handling (continued on next page) Figure 11-12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (1) 353 5 Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR Yes Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags to 0 in SSR End Figure 11-12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (2) 354 Figure 11-13 shows an example of SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format. 1 Start bit 0 Data (ID1) MPB D7 1 Stop Start Data (data1) bit bit 1 0 MPB D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 D0 D1 D0 D1 Idle (mark) state MPIE RDRF RDR value RXI request RXI handler reads (multiprocessor RDR data and clears interrupt), MPIE = 0 RDRF flag to 0 ID1 Not own ID, so MPIE bit is set to 1 again No RXI request, RDR not updated a. Own ID does not match data 1 Start bit 0 Data (ID2) MPB D7 1 Stop Start Data (data2) bit bit 1 0 MPB D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 D0 D1 D0 D1 Idle (mark) state MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 ID2 Data 2 RXI request RXI interrupt handler Own ID, so receiving MPIE bit is set (multiprocessor reads RDR data and continues, with data to 1 again interrupt), MPIE = 0 clears RDRF flag to 0 received by RXI interrupt handler b. Own ID matches data Figure 11-13 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit) 355 11.3.4 Synchronous Operation In synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses. This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication. The SCI transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in progress. Figure 11-14 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication. Transfer direction One unit (character or frame) of serial data * Serial clock LSB Serial data Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transmitting or receiving Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don't care * Figure 11-14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication In synchronous serial communication, each data bit is placed on the communication line from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rise of the serial clock. In each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from LSB (first) to MSB (last). After output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the MSB. In synchronous mode the SCI receives data by synchronizing with the rise of the serial clock. Communication Format: The data length is fixed at 8 bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added. Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the SCK pin can be selected by clearing or setting the CKE1 bit in SCR. See table 11-9. When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the SCK pin. Eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state. When the SCI is only receiving, it receives in units of two characters, so it outputs 16 clock pulses. To receive in units of one character, an external clock source must be selected. 356 Transmitting and Receiving Data SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows. When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. Clearing the TE bit to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and initializes TSR. Clearing the RE bit to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORE flags and RDR, which retain their previous contents. Figure 11-15 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI. Start of initialization Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, CKE1, and CKE0 bits in SCR (leaving TE and RE bits cleared to 0) 1 1. Select the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0. 2. Select the communication format in SMR. 3. Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. This step is not necessary when an external clock is used. 4. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary. Setting the TE or RE bit enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. 2 Select communication format in SMR 3 Set value in BRR Wait 1 bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE or RE to 1 in SCR Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary No 4 Start transmitting or receiving Figure 11-15 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization 357 Transmitting Serial Data (Synchronous Mode): Figure 11-16 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize 1 Start transmitting Read TDRE flag in SSR 2 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. 2. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. 3. To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR All data transmitted? Yes No 3 Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR End Figure 11-16 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting 358 In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. If clock output is selected, the SCI outputs eight serial clock pulses. If an external clock source is selected, the SCI outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. Data is output from the TxD pin in order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7). * The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads data from TDR into TSR and begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, and after transmitting the MSB, holds the TxD pin in the MSB state. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time. After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state. * * 359 Figure 11-17 shows an example of SCI transmit operation. Transmit direction Serial clock Serial data TDRE TEND TXI request Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and clears TDRE flag to 0 1 frame TXI request TEI request Figure 11-17 Example of SCI Transmit Operation 360 Receiving Serial Data: Figure 11-18 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. When switching from asynchronous mode to synchronous mode, make sure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are cleared to 0. If the FER or PER flag is set to 1 the RDRF flag will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled. Initialize 1 1. Start receiving Read ORER flag in SSR 2 ORER = 1? No Yes 3 Error handling 4 Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. 2., 3. Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, then after executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the ORER flag remains set to 1. 4. SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. 5. To continue receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. 5 No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR End Figure 11-18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (1) 361 3 Error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag to 0 in SSR End Figure 11-18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (2) In receiving, the SCI operates as follows. * * The SCI synchronizes with serial clock input or output and initializes internally. Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB. After receiving the data, the SCI checks that the RDRF flag is 0 so that receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check passes, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in RDR. If the check does not pass (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 11-11. * After setting the RDRF flag to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a receivedata-full interrupt (RXI). If the ORER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1, the SCI requests a receive-error interrupt (ERI). 362 Figure 11-19 shows an example of SCI receive operation. Receive direction Serial clock Serial data RDRF Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 ORER RXI request RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF flag to 0 1 frame RXI request Overrun error, ERI request Figure 11-19 Example of SCI Receive Operation Transmitting and Receiving Serial Data Simultaneously (Synchronous Mode): Figure 11-20 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously and indicates the procedure to follow. 363 Initialize Start transmitting and receiving 1 Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR 2 Read ORER flag in SSR Yes ORER = 1? 3 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data from RDR and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR Error handling 4 No End of transmitting and receiving? Yes Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR 5 1. SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin and receive data input function of the RxD pin are selected, enabling simultaneous transmitting and receiving. 2. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Notification that the TDRE flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the TXI interrupt. 3. Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, then after executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the ORER flag remains set to 1. 4. SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. 5. To continue transmitting and receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also check that the TDRE flag is (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically. End Note: * When switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, clear the TE and RE bits both to 0, then set the TE and RE bits both to 1. Figure 11-20 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting 364 11.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI has four interrupt request sources: TEI (transmit-end interrupt), ERI (receive-error interrupt), RXI (receive-data-full interrupt), and TXI (transmit-data-empty interrupt). Table 11-12 lists the interrupt sources and indicates their priority. These interrupts can be enabled and disabled by the TIE, TEIE, and RIE bits in SCR. Each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt controller. The TXI interrupt is requested when the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR. The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. The RXI interrupt is requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. The ERI interrupt is requested when the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 in SSR. Table 11-12 SCI Interrupt Sources Interrupt ERI RXI TXI TEI Description Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Receive data register full (RDRF) Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Transmit end (TEND) Low Priority High 365 11.5 Usage Notes Note the following points when using the SCI. TDR Write and TDRE Flag: The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag indicating the loading of transmit data from TDR into TSR. The SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 when it transfers data from TDR to TSR. Data can be written into TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. If new data is written in TDR when the TDRE flag is 0, the old data stored in TDR will be lost because this data has not yet been transferred to TSR. Before writing transmit data in TDR, be sure to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1. Simultaneous Multiple Receive Errors: Table 11-13 indicates the state of SSR status flags when multiple receive errors occur simultaneously. When an overrun error occurs the RSR contents are not transferred to RDR, so receive data is lost. Table 11-13 SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data SSR Status Flags RDRF 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 o: FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Transfer RSR RDR x o o Receive Errors Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error x x o x Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR. x Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR. 366 Break Detection and Processing: Break signals can be detected by reading the RxD pin directly when a framing error (FER) is detected. In the break state the input from the RxD pin consists of all 0s, so the FER flag is set and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. In the break state the SCI receiver continues to operate, so if the FER flag is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again. Sending a Break Signal: When the TE bit is cleared to 0 the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, the level and direction (input or output) of which are determined by DR and DDR bits. This feature can be used to send a break signal. After the serial transmitter is initialized, the DR value substitutes for the mark state until the TE bit is set to 1 (the TxD pin function is not selected until the TE bit is set to 1). The DDR and DR bits should therefore both be set to 1 beforehand. To send a break signal during serial transmission, clear the DR bit to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0 the transmitter is initialized, regardless of its current state, so the TxD pin becomes an output port outputting the value 0. Receive Error Flags and Transmitter Operation (Synchronous Mode Only): When a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1 the SCI will not start transmitting, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags to 0. Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode and Receive Margin: In asynchronous mode the SCI operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. In receiving, the SCI synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. Receive data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. See figure 11-21. 367 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal base clock 7 15 0 7 15 0 Receive data (RxD) Start bit D0 D1 Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Figure 11-21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode The receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as in equation (1). M = | (0.5 - M: N: D: L: F: | D - 0.5 | 1 ) - (L - 0.5) F - (1 + F) | x 100%...................(1) N 2N Receive margin (%) Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 16) Clock duty cycle (D = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute deviation of clock frequency From equation (1), if F = 0 and D = 0.5 the receive margin is 46.875%, as given by equation (2). D = 0.5, F = 0 M = [0.5 - 1/(2 x 16)] x 100% = 46.875%.................................................................................................(2) This is a theoretical value. A reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20% to 30%. 368 Restrictions in Synchronous Mode: When an external clock source is used in synchronous mode, after TDR is reset, wait at least 5 clock counts (5o) before inputting the transmit clock. If the clock is input four states after the reset of TDR or earlier, an operation error may occur (figure 11-22). SCK t TDRE D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Note: When using an external clock, make sure t is 5 clock cycles or greater. Figure 11-22 Transmission in Synchronous Mode (Example) 369 370 Section 12 A/D Converter 12.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series includes a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter with a selection of up to eight analog input channels. 12.1.1 Features A/D converter features are listed below. * * * 10-bit resolution Eight input channels Selectable analog conversion voltage range The analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference voltage at the VREF pin. * High-speed conversion Conversion time: maximum 8.4 s per channel (with 16 MHz system clock) * Two conversion modes Single mode: A/D conversion of one channel Scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels * Four 16-bit data registers A/D conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the channels. * * * Sample-and-hold function A/D conversion can be externally triggered A/D interrupt requested at end of conversion At the end of A/D conversion, an A/D end interrupt (ADI) can be requested. 371 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12-1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. Module data bus Bus interface ADDRC ADDRD ADDRA ADDRB ADCSR + - Analog multiplexer Comparator Control circuit Sample-andhold circuit ADCR On-chip data bus AVCC V REF AV SS 10-bit D/A AN 0 AN 1 AN 2 AN 3 AN 4 AN 5 AN 6 AN 7 Successiveapproximations register o/8 o/16 ADI ADTRG Legend ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Figure 12-1 A/D Converter Block Diagram 372 12.1.3 Input Pins Table 12-1 summarizes the A/D converter's input pins. The eight analog input pins are divided into two groups: group 0 (AN0 to AN3), and group 1 (AN4 to AN7). AVCC and AVSS are the power supply for the analog circuits in the A/D converter. VREF is the A/D conversion reference voltage. Table 12-1 A/D Converter Pins Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Reference voltage pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 A/D external trigger input pin Abbreviation I/O AVCC AVSS VREF AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 ADTRG Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Group 1 analog inputs Function Analog power supply Analog ground and reference voltage Analog reference voltage Group 0 analog inputs 373 12.1.4 Register Configuration Table 12-2 summarizes the A/D converter's registers. Table 12-2 A/D Converter Registers Address*1 H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 Name A/D data register A (high) A/D data register A (low) A/D data register B (high) A/D data register B (low) A/D data register C (high) A/D data register C (low) A/D data register D (high) A/D data register D (low) A/D control/status register A/D control register Abbreviation ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR R/W R R R R R R R R R/(W)*2 R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'7E Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address 2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 374 12.2 Register Descriptions 12.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) Bit ADDRn Initial value Read/Write (n = A to D) 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result Reserved bits The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the results of A/D conversion. An A/D conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the A/D data register corresponding to the selected channel. The upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the upper byte of the A/D data register. The lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. Bits 5 to 0 of an A/D data register are reserved bits that always read 0. Table 12-3 indicates the pairings of analog input channels and A/D data registers. The CPU can always read and write the A/D data registers. The upper byte can be read directly, but the lower byte is read through a temporary register (TEMP). For details see section 12.3, CPU Interface. The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. Table 12-3 Analog Input Channels and A/D Data Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 A/D Data Register ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD 375 12.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ADF 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W 0 CH0 0 R/W Channel select 2 to 0 These bits select analog input channels Clock select Selects the A/D conversion time Scan mode Selects single mode or scan mode A/D start Starts or stops A/D conversion A/D interrupt enable Enables and disables A/D end interrupts A/D end flag Indicates end of A/D conversion Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the A/D converter. ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 376 Bit 7--A/D End Flag (ADF): Indicates the end of A/D conversion. Bit 7 ADF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading ADF while ADF = 1, then writing 0 in ADF [Setting conditions] Single mode: A/D conversion ends Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels (Initial value) Bit 6--A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables the interrupt (ADI) requested at the end of A/D conversion. Bit 6 ADIE 0 1 Description A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is disabled A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--A/D Start (ADST): Starts or stops A/D conversion. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. It can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the ADTRG pin. Bit 5 ADST 0 1 Description A/D conversion is stopped (Initial value) Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode. 377 Bit 4--Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode. For further information on operation in these modes, see section 12.4, Operation. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion mode. Bit 4 SCAN 0 1 Description Single mode Scan mode (Initial value) Bit 3--Clock Select (CKS): Selects the A/D conversion time. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion time. Bit 3 CKS 0 1 Description Conversion time = 266 states (maximum) Conversion time = 134 states (maximum) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit select the analog input channels. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before changing the channel selection. Group Selection CH2 0 CH1 0 Channel Selection CH0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Single Mode AN0 (Initial value) AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Description Scan Mode AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0 to AN2 AN0 to AN3 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4 to AN6 AN4 to AN7 378 12.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TRGE 0 R/W 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- Reserved bits Trigger enable Enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion. ADCR is initialized to H'7F by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Trigger Enable (TRGE): Enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion. Bit 7 TRGE 0 1 Description A/D conversion cannot be externally triggered (Initial value) A/D conversion starts at the falling edge of the external trigger signal (ADTRG) Bits 6 to 0--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. 379 12.3 CPU Interface ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the CPU by an 8-bit data bus. Therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the CPU, the lower byte is read through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). An A/D data register is read as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred directly to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred into TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU. When reading an A/D data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. Figure 12-2 shows the data flow for access to an A/D data register. Upper-byte read CPU (H'AA) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Lower-byte read CPU (H'40) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Figure 12-2 A/D Data Register Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) 380 12.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 12.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) Single mode should be selected when only one A/D conversion on one channel is required. A/D conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. When conversion ends the ADF bit is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is also set to 1, an ADI interrupt is requested at this time. To clear the ADF flag to 0, first read ADCSR, then write 0 in ADF. When the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed. Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure 12-3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH2 = CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRB. At the same time the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 in the ADF flag. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB). Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 381 Figure 12-3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) Set * ADIE A/D conversion starts ADST Clear * ADF State of channel 0 (AN 0) State of channel 1 (AN 1) State of channel 2 (AN 2) State of channel 3 (AN 3) ADDRA Read conversion result ADDRB A/D conversion result 1 Read conversion result A/D conversion result 2 Idle A/D conversion 1 Set * Set * Clear * Idle Idle A/D conversion 2 Idle Idle 382 Idle ADDRC ADDRD Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 12.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0, AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the A/D data registers corresponding to the channels. When the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1. A/D conversion will start again from the first channel in the group. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel selection is changed. Typical operations when three channels in group 0 (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described next. Figure 12-4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2). When conversion of all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an ADI interrupt is requested at this time. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel (AN0). 2. 3. 4. 5. 383 Continuous A/D conversion Set *1 ADST Clear* 1 ADF A/D conversion time State of channel 0 (AN 0) State of channel 1 (AN 1) State of channel 2 (AN 2) State of channel 3 (AN 3) Transfer ADDRA A/D conversion result 1 A/D conversion result 4 Idle A/D conversion 1 Clear*1 Figure 12-4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) Idle A/D conversion 4 Idle Idle A/D conversion 2 Idle A/D conversion 5 *2 Idle Idle A/D conversion 3 Idle 384 Idle ADDRB A/D conversion result 2 ADDRC A/D conversion result 3 ADDRD Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. Data currently being converted is ignored. 12.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 12-5 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 12-4 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 12-5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 12-4. In scan mode, the values given in table 12-4 apply to the first conversion. In the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when CKS = 0 or 128 states when CKS = 1. (1) o Address bus (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD t SPL t CONV Legend (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address tD : Synchronization delay t SPL : Input sampling time t CONV: A/D conversion time Figure 12-5 A/D Conversion Timing 385 Table 12-4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 Symbol Synchronization delay Input sampling time A/D conversion time tD tSPL tCONV Min 10 -- 259 Typ -- 80 -- Max 17 -- 266 Min 6 -- 131 CKS = 1 Typ -- 40 -- Max 9 -- 134 Note: Values in the table are numbers of states. 12.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGE bit is set to 1 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A high-to-low transition at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as if the ADST bit had been set to 1 by software. Figure 12-6 shows the timing. o ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 12-6 External Trigger Input Timing 386 12.5 Interrupts The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR. 12.6 Usage Notes When using the A/D converter, note the following points: Analog Input Voltage Range: During A/D conversion, the voltages input to the analog input pins ANn should be in the range AVSS ANn VREF. (n = 0 to 7) AVCC and AVSS Input Voltages: AVSS should have the following values: AVSS = VSS. If the A/D converter is not used, the values should be AVCC = VCC and AVSS = VSS. VREF Input Range: The analog reference voltage input at the VREF pin should be in the range VREF AVCC. If the A/D converter is not used, the value should be VREF = VCC. 387 388 Section 13 RAM 13.1 Overview The H8/3032 has 2 kbytes of on-chip static RAM, the H8/3031 has 1 kbyte, and the H8/3030 has 512 bytes. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two states, making the RAM suitable for rapid data transfer. The H8/3032 on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'FF710 to H'FFF0F in modes 1 and 3, and addresses H'F7 10 to H'FF0F in mode 2. The H8/3031 on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'FFB10 to H'FFF0F in modes 1 and 3, and addresses H'FB10 to H'FF0F in mode 2. The H8/3030 on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'FFD10 to H'FFF0F in modes 1 and 3, and addresses H'FD10 to H'FF0F in mode 2. The RAM enable bit (RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM. 13.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 13-1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. On-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) On-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) Bus interface H'FB10* H'FB12 On-chip RAM H'FB11* H'FB13* H'FF0E* Even addresses Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address H'FF0F* Odd addresses Figure 13-1 RAM Block Diagram (H8/3031 in Mode 2) 389 13.1.2 Register Configuration The on-chip RAM is controlled by the system control register (SYSCR). Table 13-1 gives the address and initial value of SYSCR. Table 13-1 RAM Control Register Address* H'FFF2 Name System control register Abbreviation SYSCR R/W R/W Initial Value H'0B Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address 390 13.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable bit Enables or disables on-chip RAM Reserved bit NMI edge select User bit enable Standby timer select 2 to 0 Software standby One function of SYSCR is to enable or disable access to the on-chip RAM. The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details about the other bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register. Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized at the rising edge of the input at the RES pin. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) 391 13.3 Operation 13.3.1 Mode 1 When the RAME bit is set to 1 in mode 1, accesses to addresses H'FF710 to H'FFF0F of the H8/3032, to addresses H'FFB10 to H'FFF0F of the H8/3031, and to addresses H'FFD10 to H'FFF0F of the H8/3030 are directed to the on-chip RAM space. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, accesses to such addresses are directed to the off-chip address space. 13.3.2 Modes 2 and 3 When the RAME bit is set to 1 in modes 2 and 3, accesses to addresses H'F710 to H'FF0F of the H8/3032, to addresses H'FB10 to H'FF0F of the H8/3031, and to addresses H'FD10 to H'FF0F of the H8/3030 are directed to the on-chip RAM space. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, read accesses to such addresses always return H'FF and write accesses are ignored. Note that these addresses represent the lower 16 bits of the address. 392 Section 14 ROM 14.1 Overview The H8/3030 has 16 kbytes of on-chip ROM, the H8/3031 has 32 kbytes, and the H8/3032 has 64 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two states, enabling rapid data transfer. The PROM version of the H8/3032 can be set to PROM mode and programmed with a generalpurpose PROM programmer. 14.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of the ROM. On-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) On-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) H'0000 H'0002 On-chip ROM H'0001 H'0003 H'FFFE Even addresses H'FFFF Odd addresses Figure 14-1 ROM Block Diagram (H8/3032) 393 14.2 PROM Mode 14.2.1 PROM Mode Setting In PROM mode, the H8/3032 version with on-chip PROM suspends its microcontroller functions, enabling the on-chip PROM to be programmed. The programming method is the same as for the HN27C101, except that page programming is not supported. Table 14-1 indicates how to select PROM mode. Table 14-1 Selecting PROM Mode Pins Two mode pins (MD1and MD0) STBY pin P51 and P50 High Setting Low 14.2.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map The PROM is programmed using a general-purpose PROM programmer with a socket adapter to convert to 32 pins. Table 14-2 lists the socket adapter for each package option. Figure 14-2 shows the pin assignments of the socket adapter. Figure 14-3 shows a memory map in PROM mode. Table 14-2 Socket Adapter Microcontroller H8/3032 Package 80-pin QFP (FP-80A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) Socket Adapter HS3032ESH01H HS3032ESN01H The size of the H8/3032 PROM is 64 kbytes. Figure 14-3 shows a memory map in PROM mode. H'FF data should be specified for unused address areas in the on-chip PROM. When programming the H8/3032 with a PROM programmer, set the address range to H'0000 to H'FFFF and specify H'FF data for addresses H'10000 and up. If H'10000 and higher addresses are programmed by mistake, it may become impossible to program or verify the PROM. Attempts to program in page-programming mode may have the same result. 394 H8/3032 FP-80A, TFP-80C 57 49 43 69 70 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 68 67 21 53 44 45 47 58 12 30 50 Pin RESO NMI P60 P80 P81 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P50 P51 AVCC VREF VCC VCC MD0 MD1 STBY AVSS VSS VSS VSS Pin VPP EA 9 EA15 EA16 PGM EO0 EO1 EO2 EO3 EO4 EO5 EO6 EO7 EA 0 EA 1 EA 2 EA 3 EA 4 EA 5 EA 6 EA 7 EA 8 OE EA 10 EA 11 EA 12 EA 13 EA 14 CE VCC PROM Socket HN27C101 (32 pins) 1 26 3 2 31 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 27 24 23 25 4 28 29 22 32 VSS 16 Note: Pins not shown in this diagram should be left open. Legend V PP : EO 7 to EO0 : EA16 to EA 0 : OE: CE: PGM: Programming voltage (12.5 V) Data input/output Address input Output enable Chip enable Program Figure 14-2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments 395 Address in MCU mode H'0000 Address in PROM mode H'0000 On-chip PROM H'FFFF H'FFFF Missing area * H'1FFFF H'1FFFF Note: * If read in PROM mode, this area returns H'FF output data. Figure 14-3 H8/3032 Memory Map in PROM Mode 396 14.3 Programming Table 14-3 indicates how to select the program, verify, and other modes in PROM mode. Table 14-3 Mode Selection in PROM Mode Pins Mode Program Verify Program inhibited CE L L L L H H Legend L: Low voltage level H: High voltage level VPP: VPP voltage level VCC: VCC voltage level OE H L L H L H PGM L H L H L H VPP VPP VPP VPP VCC VCC VCC VCC EO7 to EO0 Data input Data output High impedance EA16 to EA0 Address input Address input Address input Read/write specifications are the same as for the standard HN27C101 EPROM, except that page programming is not supported. Do not select page programming mode. A PROM programmer that supports only page-programming mode cannot be used. When selecting a PROM programmer, check that it supports a byte-at-a-time high-speed programming mode. Be sure to set the address range to H'0000 to H'FFFF. 14.3.1 Programming and Verification An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to program and verify PROM data. This procedure programs the chip quickly without subjecting it to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability. Unused address areas contain H'FF data. Figure 14-4 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart. Tables 14-4 and 14-5 list the electrical characteristics of the chip during programming. Figure 14-5 shows a timing chart. 397 Start Set programming/verification mode VCC = 6.0 V 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V 0.3 V Address = 0 n=0 n + 1 n No Yes n < 25 Program with t PW = 0.2 ms 5% No Verification OK? Yes Program with t OPW = 0.2n ms No Address + 1 address Last address? Yes Set read mode VCC = 5.0 V 0.25 V, VPP = VCC No Fail All addresses read? Yes End Figure 14-4 High-Speed Programming Flowchart 398 Table 14-4 DC Characteristics --Preliminary-- (Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Input high voltage Input low voltage Output high voltage Output low voltage Input leakage current VCC current VPP current EO7 to EO0, EA16 to EA0, OE, CE, PGM EO7 to EO0, EA16 to EA0, OE, CE, PGM EO7 to EO0 EO7 to EO0 EO7 to EO0, EA16 to EA0, OE, CE, PGM Symbol VIH Min 2.4 Typ -- Max VCC + 0.3 Unit V Test Conditions VIL -0.3 -- 0.8 V VOH VOL |ILI| 2.4 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.45 2 V V A IOH = -200 A IOL = 1.6 mA Vin = 5.25 V/0.5 V ICC IPP -- -- -- -- 40 40 mA mA 399 Table 14-5 AC Characteristics (Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V 0.3 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Address setup time OE setup time Data setup time Address hold time Data hold time Data output disable time VPP setup time Programming pulse width PGM pulse width for overwrite programming VCC setup time CE setup time Data output delay time Symbol tAS tOES tDS tAH tDH tDF *2 Min 2 2 2 0 2 -- 2 0.19 0.19 2 2 0 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.20 -- -- -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- 130 -- 0.21 5.25 -- -- 150 Unit s s s s s ns s ms ms s s ns Test Conditions Figure 14-5*1 tVPS tPW tOPW*3 tVCS tCES tOE Notes: 1. Input pulse level: 0.8 V to 2.2 V Input rise time and fall time 20 ns Timing reference levels: 1.0 V and 2.0 V for input; 0.8 V and 2.0 V for output 2. tDF is defined at the point where the output is in the open state and the output level cannot be read. 3. tOPW is defined by the value given in the flowchart. 400 Program Address tAS Data tDS VPP VPP VCC VCC+1 VCC tVCS tVPS Input data tDH Verify tAH Output data tDF VCC CE tCES PGM tPW OE tOPW* tOES tOE Note: * t OPW is defined by the value given in the flowchart. Figure 14-5 PROM Program/Verify Timing 401 14.3.2 Programming Precautions * Program with the specified voltages and timing. The programming voltage (VPP) in PROM mode is 12.5 V. Applied voltages in excess of the rated values can permanently destroy the chip. Be particularly careful about the PROM programmer's overshoot characteristics. If the PROM programmer is set to Hitachi HN27C101 specifications, VPP will be 12.5 V. * Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. Don't touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. Select the programming mode carefully. The chip cannot be programmed in page programming mode. The H8/3032 PROM size is 64 kbytes. Set the address range to H'0000 to H'FFFF. When programming, assign H'FF data to the unused address area (H'10000 to H'1FFFF). * * * 402 14.4 Reliability of Programmed Data A highly effective way to improve data retention characteristics is to bake the programmed chips at 150C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with PROM memory cells prone to early failure. Figure 14-6 shows the recommended screening procedure. Program chip and verify programmed data Bake chip for 24 to 48 hours at 125C to 150C with power off Read and check program Install Figure 14-6 Recommended Screening Procedure If a series of programming errors occurs while the same PROM programmer is in use, stop programming and check the PROM programmer and socket adapter for defects. Please inform Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during or after programming or in screening of program data after high-temperature baking. 403 404 Section 15 Clock Pulse Generator 15.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (o) and other internal clock signals (o/2 to o/4096). The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator circuit, a duty adjustment circuit, and prescalers. 15.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. CPG XTAL Oscillator EXTAL Duty adjustment circuit Prescalers o o/2 to o/4096 Figure 15-1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator 405 15.2 Oscillator Circuit Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock signal. 15.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as in the example in figure 15-2. The damping resistance Rd should be selected according to table 15-1. An AT-cut parallelresonance crystal should be used. C L1 EXTAL XTAL Rd C L2 C L1 = C L2 = 10 pF to 22 pF Figure 15-2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) Table 15-1 Damping Resistance Value Frequency (MHz) Rd () 2 1k 4 500 8 200 10 0 12 0 16 0 Crystal Resonator: Figure 15-3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. The crystal resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 15-2. CL L XTAL Rs EXTAL CO AT-cut parallel-resonance type Figure 15-3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit 406 Table 15-2 Crystal Resonator Parameters Frequency (MHz) Rs max () Co (pF) 2 500 4 120 8 80 10 70 7 pF max 12 60 16 50 Use a crystal resonator with a frequency equal to the system clock frequency (o). Notes on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted: Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 15-4. When the board is designed, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Avoid C L2 Signal A Signal B H8/3032 Series XTAL EXTAL C L1 Figure 15-4 Example of Incorrect Board Design 407 15.2.2 External Clock Input Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 15-5. In example b, the clock should be held high in standby mode. If the XTAL pin is left open, the stray capacitance should not exceed 10 pF. EXTAL External clock input XTAL Open a. XTAL pin left open EXTAL External clock input XTAL 74HC04 b. Complementary clock input at XTAL pin Figure 15-5 External Clock Input (Examples) 408 External Clock: The external clock frequency should be equal to the system clock frequency (o). Table 15-3 and figure 15-6 indicate the clock timing. Table 15-3 Clock Timing VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Item External clock rise time External clock fall time External clock input duty (a/tcyc) o clock duty (b/tcyc) Symbol tEXr tEXf -- Min -- -- 30 40 -- 40 Max 10 10 70 60 60 VCC = 5.0 V 10% Min -- -- 30 40 40 Max 5 5 70 60 60 Unit Test Conditions ns ns % % % o 5 MHz o < 5 MHz Figure 15-6 Figure 15-6 Figure 15-16 tcyc a EXTAL VCC x 0.5 tEXr tEXf tcyc b o VCC x 0.5 Figure 15-6 External Clock Input Timing 409 15.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (o). 15.4 Prescalers The prescalers divide the system clock (o) to generate internal clocks (o/2 to o/4096). 410 Section 16 Power-Down State 16.1 Overview The H8/3032 Series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by halting CPU functions. The power-down state includes the following three modes: * * * Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Table 16-1 indicates the methods of entering and exiting these power-down modes and the status of the CPU and on-chip supporting modules in each mode. Table 16-1 Power-Down State State Mode Sleep mode Entering Conditions Clock CPU Halted CPU Supporting Registers Functions RAM Held Active Held I/O Ports Held Exiting Conditions * Interrupt * RES * STBY * * * * NMI IRQ0 to IRQ2 RES STBY SLEEP instruc- Active tion executed while SSBY = 0 in SYSCR SLEEP instruc- Halted tion executed while SSBY = 1 in SYSCR Halted Software standby mode Halted Held Halted and reset Halted and reset Held Held Hardware Low input at standby STBY pin mode Halted Undeter mined Held* High * STBY impedance * RES Note: * The RAME bit must be cleared to 0 in SYSCR before the transition from the program execution state to hardware standby mode. Legend SYSCR: System control register SSBY: Software standby bit 411 16.2 Register Configuration The H8/3032 Series' system control register (SYSCR) controls the power-down state. Table 16-2 summarizes this register. Table 16-2 Control Register Address* H'FFF2 Name System control register Abbreviation SYSCR R/W R/W Initial Value H'0B Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 16.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Reserved bit NMI edge select User bit enable Standby timer select 2 to 0 These bits select the waiting time at exit from software standby mode Software standby Enables transition to software standby mode SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bit 7 (SSBY) and bits 6 to 4 (STS2 to STS0) control the power-down state. For information on the other SYSCR bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register. 412 Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. When software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1 after the return to normal operation. To clear this bit, write 0. Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules wait for the clock to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. If the clock is generated by a crystal resonator, set these bits according to the clock frequency so that the waiting time will be at least 8 ms. See table 16-3. If an external clock is used, any setting is permitted. Bit 6 STS2 0 Bit 5 STS1 0 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 -- -- Description Waiting time = 8192 states Waiting time = 16384 states Waiting time = 32768 states Waiting time = 65536 states Waiting time = 131072 states Illegal setting (Initial value) 413 16.3 Sleep Mode 16.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode When the SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (SYSCR), execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. Immediately after executing the SLEEP instruction the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal registers are retained. The on-chip supporting modules do not halt in sleep mode. 16.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode Sleep mode is exited by an interrupt, or by input at the RES or STBY pin. Exit by Interrupt: An interrupt terminates sleep mode and causes a transition to the interrupt exception handling state. Sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt source in an on-chip supporting module if the interrupt is disabled in the on-chip supporting module. Sleep mode is not exited by an NMI interrupt if masked in the CPU. Exit by RES Input: Low input at the RES pin exits from sleep mode to the reset state. Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin exits from sleep mode to hardware standby mode. 414 16.4 Software Standby Mode 16.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode To enter software standby mode, execute the SLEEP instruction while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. In software standby mode, current dissipation is reduced to an extremely low level because the CPU, clock, and on-chip supporting modules all halt. The on-chip supporting modules are reset. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, however, CPU register contents and on-chip RAM data are retained. The settings of the I/O ports are also held. 16.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode Software standby mode can be exited by input of an external interrupt at the NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 pin, or by input at the RES or STBY pin. Exit by Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 interrupt request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins operating. After the oscillator settling time selected by bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clock signals are supplied to the entire H8/3032 Series chip, software standby mode ends, and interrupt exception handling begins. Software standby mode is not exited if the interrupt enable bits of interrupts IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2 are cleared to 0, or if these interrupts are masked in the CPU. Exit by RES Input: When the RES input goes low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are supplied immediately to the entire H8/3032 Series chip. The RES signal must be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to stabilize. When RES goes high, the CPU starts reset exception handling. Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin causes a transition to hardware standby mode. 415 16.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode Bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR should be set as follows. Crystal Resonator: Set STS2 to STS0 so that the waiting time (for the clock to stabilize) is at least 8 ms. Table 16-3 indicates the waiting times that are selected by STS2 to STS0 settings at various system clock frequencies. External Clock: Any value may be set in the clock-halving version. Normally the minimum value (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = 1) is recommended. In the 1:1 clock version, any value other than the minimum value may be set. Table 16-3 Clock Frequency and Waiting Time for Clock to Settle Waiting STS2 STS1 STS0 Time 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 16 MHZ 12 MHz 10 MHz 8 MHz 0.51 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 0.65 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 6 MHz 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 21.8 4 MHz 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 2 MHz 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 65.5 Unit ms Illegal setting : Recommended setting Note: * This setting cannot be used in the 1:1 clock version. 416 16.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode Figure 16-1 shows an example in which software standby mode is entered at the fall of NMI and exited at the rise of NMI. With the NMI edge select bit (NMIEG) cleared to 0 in SYSCR (selecting the falling edge), an NMI interrupt occurs. Next the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (selecting the rising edge) and the SSBY bit is set to 1; then the SLEEP instruction is executed to enter software standby mode. Software standby mode is exited at the next rising edge of the NMI signal . Clock oscillator o NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI interrupt handler NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 Software standby mode (powerdown state) Oscillator settling time (tosc2) NMI exception handling SLEEP instruction Figure 16-1 NMI Timing for Software Standby Mode (Example) 16.4.5 Note The I/O ports retain their existing states in software standby mode. If a port is in the high output state, its output current is not reduced. 417 16.5 Hardware Standby Mode 16.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode Regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin goes low. Hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting all functions of the CPU and on-chip supporting modules. All modules are reset except the on-chip RAM. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state. Clear the RAME bit to 0 in SYSCR before STBY goes low to retain on-chip RAM data. The inputs at the mode pins (MD1 to MD0) should not be changed during hardware standby mode. 16.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode Hardware standby mode is exited by inputs at the STBY and RES pins. While RES is low, when STBY goes high, the clock oscillator starts running. RES should be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to settle. When RES goes high, reset exception handling begins, followed by a transition to the program execution state. 16.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode Figure 16-2 shows the timing relationships for hardware standby mode. To enter hardware standby mode, first drive RES low, then drive STBY low. To exit hardware standby mode, first drive STBY high, wait for the clock to settle, then bring RES from low to high. Clock oscillator RES STBY Oscillator settling time Reset exception handling Figure 16-2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing 418 Section 17 Electrical Characteristics 17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 17-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 17-1 Absolute Maximum Ratings --Preliminary-- Item Power supply voltage Programming voltage Input voltage (except port 7) Input voltage (port 7) Reference voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC VPP VIN VIN VREF AVCC VAN Topr Tstg Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to +13.5 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 Storage temperature -55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V V C C C Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. 419 17.2 Electrical Characteristics 17.2.1 DC Characteristics Table 17-2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 17-3 lists the permissible output currents. Table 17-2 DC Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82, PB0 to PB3 RES, STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Output high voltage All output pins VOH VIL Symbol VT VT - + + - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 Typ -- -- -- Max -- Unit Test Conditions V VCC x 0.7 V -- V VCC + 0.3 V VT - VT VIH VCC - 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- 2.0 2.0 -- -- VCC + 0.3 V AVCC + 0.3 V VCC + 0.3 V -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V VCC - 0.5 -- 3.5 -- -- -- V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA Note: * If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 420 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Output low voltage Symbol All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, 5 and B RESO Input leakage STBY, NMI, current RES, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 to B RESO -IP CIN |ITS1| |IIN| Min -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- Max 0.4 1.0 0.4 1.0 Unit V V V A Test Conditions IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 10 mA IOL = 2.6 mA VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0 V VIN = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 16 MHz f = 16 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta -- -- -- -- 1.0 1.0 A A -- 50 -- -- ICC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 45 32 0.01 -- 10.0 300 50 15 60 45 5.0 20.0 A A pF Input pull-up Ports 2 and 5 current Input NMI capacitance All input pins except NMI Current Normal dissipation*2 operation Sleep mode Standby mode*3 mA mA A A Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 4.5 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 421 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Analog power During A/D supply current conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion Idle RAM standby voltage VRAM AICC Symbol AICC Min -- -- -- -- 2.0 Typ 1.2 0.01 0.3 0.01 -- Max 2.0 5.0 0.6 5.0 -- Unit Test Conditions mA A mA A V VREF = 5.0 V Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM < VCC < 4.5 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82, PB0 to PB3 RES, STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Symbol VT VT VT - + +- Min VCC x 0.2 -- Typ -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit Test Conditions V V V V VT- VCC x 0.07 -- VCC x 0.9 -- VIH VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V AVCC + 0.3 V V Note: * If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 422 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Output high voltage Output low voltage All output pins VOH All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, 5 and B Symbol VIL Min -0.3 -0.3 Typ -- -- Max Unit Test Conditions VCC x 0.1 V VCC x 0.2 V 0.8 VCC - 0.5 -- VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V V V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA VCC 4 V, IOL = 5 mA, 4 V VCC 5.5 V, IOL = 10 mA IOL = 1.6 mA VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V RESO Input leakage STBY, NMI, current RES, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 to B RESO -IP |ITS1| |IIN| -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V A -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- 1.0 1.0 10.0 300 A A A A Input pull-up Ports 2 current and 5 Note: * If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 423 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input capacitance NMI All input pins except NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Standby mode*3 Analog power During A/D supply current conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion Idle RAM standby voltage VRAM AICC AICC ICC*4 Symbol CIN Min -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 Typ -- -- 12 (3.0 V) 8 (3.0 V) 0.01 -- 1.0 1.2 0.01 0.2 0.3 0.01 -- Max 50 15 31.8 (5.5 V) 23.0 (5.5 V) 5.0 20.0 2.0 -- 5.0 0.4 -- 5.0 -- mA mA A A mA mA A mA mA A V VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V Unit Test Conditions pF VIN = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 8 MHz f = 8 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V Current dissipation*2 Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 2.7 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.7 (mA/MHz * V) x VCC x f [normal mode] ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.5 (mA/MHz * V) x VCC x f [sleep mode] 424 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82, PB0 to PB3 RES, STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, P83, PB4 to PB7 Output high voltage All output pins VOH VIL Symbol VT- VT+ VIH Min VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.9 Typ -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit Test Conditions V V V V VT+ - VT- VCC x 0.07 -- -- VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V AVCC + 0.3 V V -0.3 -0.3 -- -- VCC x 0.1 V VCC x 0.2 V 0.8 V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA VCC - 0.5 -- VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- Note: * If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 425 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Output low voltage Symbol All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, 5 and B Min -- -- Typ -- -- Max 0.4 1.0 Unit V V Test Conditions IOL = 1.6 mA VCC 4 V IOL = 5 mA, 4 V < VCC 5.5 V IOL = 10 mA IOL = 1.6 mA VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VIN = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V RESO Input leakage STBY, NMI, current RES, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 to B RESO -IP |ITS1| |IIN| -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V A -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- 1.0 1.0 10.0 300 A A A A Input pull-up Pors 2 current and 5 Note: * If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 426 Table 17-2 DC Characteristics (cont) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Input capacitance NMI All input pins except NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Standby mode*3 Analog power During A/D supply current conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion Idle RAM standby voltage VRAM AICC AICC ICC*4 Symbol CIN Min -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 Typ -- -- 15 (3.0 V) 10 (3.0 V) 0.01 -- 1.0 1.2 0.01 0.2 0.3 0.01 -- Max 50 15 39.5 (5.5 V) 28.5 (5.5 V) 5.0 20.0 2.0 -- 5.0 0.4 -- 5.0 -- mA mA A A mA mA A mA mA A V VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V Unit Test Conditions pF VIN = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V Current dissipation*2 Notes: 1. If the A/D converter is not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC - 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM VCC < 3.0 V, VIHmin = VCC x 0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V. 4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows: ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.7 (mA/MHz * V) x VCC x f [normal mode] ICCmax = 1.0 (mA) + 0.5 (mA/MHz * V) x VCC x f [sleep mode] 427 Table 17-3 Permissible Output Currents (1) Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Ports 1, 2, 5 and B Other output pins Total of 28 pins including ports 1, 2, 5 and B Total of all output pins, including the above Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) All output pins Total of all output pins IOH IOH IOL Symbol IOL Min -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 2.0 80 120 2.0 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 17-3. 2. When driving a darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 17-1 and 17-2. 428 H8/3032 Series 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 17-1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) H8/3032 Series Ports 5 and B 600 LED Figure 17-2 LED Drive Circuit (Example) 429 17.2.2 AC Characteristics Bus timing parameters are listed in table 17-4. Control signal timing parameters are listed in table 17-5. Timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 17-6. Table 17-4 Bus Timing (1) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item Clock cycle time Clock low pulse width Clock high pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time Address delay time Address hold time Address strobe delay time Write strobe delay time Strobe delay time Write data strobe pulse width 1 Write data strobe pulse width 2 Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Symbol tCYC tCL tCH tCR tCF tAD tAH tASD tWSD tSD tWSW1* tWSW2* tAS1 tAS2 tRDS tRDH Min 125 40 40 -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 85 150 20 80 50 0 Max 500 -- -- 20 20 60 -- 60 60 60 -- -- -- -- -- -- Condition B 10 MHz Min 100 40 30 -- -- -- 20 -- -- -- 60 110 15 65 35 0 Max 500 -- -- 15 15 50 -- 40 50 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- Condition C 16 MHz Min 62.5 20 20 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 35 65 10 40 20 0 Max 500 -- -- 10 10 30 -- 30 30 30 -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 17-4, Figure 17-5 430 Table 17-4 Bus Timing (cont) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 Write data hold time Read data access time 1 Read data access time 2 Read data access time 3 Read data access time 4 Precharge time Wait setup time Wait hold time Symbol tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 tWDH tACC1* tACC2* tACC3* tACC4* tPCH* tWTS tWTH Min -- 90 5 25 -- -- -- -- 85 40 10 Max 75 -- -- -- 110 230 55 160 -- -- -- Condition B 10 MHz Min -- 40 -10 20 -- -- -- -- 60 40 10 Max 75 -- -- -- 100 200 50 150 -- -- -- Condition C 16 MHz Min -- 15 -5 20 -- -- -- -- 40 25 5 Max 60 -- -- -- 55 115 25 85 -- -- -- ns Figure 17-6 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 17-4, Figure 17-5 Note is on next page. 431 Note: At 8 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. tACC1 = 1.5 x tcyc - 78 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 x tcyc - 40 (ns) tACC2 = 2.5 x tcyc - 83 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 x tcyc - 38 (ns) tACC3 = 1.0 x tcyc - 70 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 x tcyc - 40 (ns) tACC4 = 2.0 x tcyc - 90 (ns) At 10 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. tACC1 = 1.5 x tcyc - 50 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 x tcyc - 40 (ns) tACC2 = 2.5 x tcyc - 50 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 x tcyc - 40 (ns) tACC3 = 1.0 x tcyc - 50 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 x tcyc - 40 (ns) tACC4 = 2.0 x tcyc - 50 (ns) At 16 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. tACC1 = 1.5 x tcyc - 39 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 x tcyc - 28 (ns) tACC2 = 2.5 x tcyc - 41 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 x tcyc - 28 (ns) tACC3 = 1.0 x tcyc - 38 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 x tcyc - 23 (ns) tACC4 = 2.0 x tcyc - 40 (ns) 432 Table 17-5 Control Signal Timing Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item RES setup time RES pulse width RESO output delay time RESO output pulse width NMI setup time (NMI, IRQ4 to IRQ0) NMI hold time (NMI, IRQ4 to IRQ0) Interrupt pulse width (NMI, IRQ4 to IRQ0 when exiting software standby mode) Clock oscillator settling time at reset (crystal) Clock oscillator settling time in software standby (crystal) Symbol tRESS tRESW tRESD tRESOW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW Min 200 10 -- 132 200 10 200 Max -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Condition B 10 MHz Min 200 10 -- 132 200 10 200 Max -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Condition C 16 MHz Min 200 10 -- 132 150 10 200 Max -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Unit ns tCYC ns tCYC ns Figure 17-9 Figure 17-8 Test Conditions Figure 17-7 tOSC1 tOSC2 20 8 -- -- 20 8 -- -- 20 8 -- -- ms Figure 17-10 Figure 16-1 433 Table 17-6 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item ITU Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer Single clock edge pulse Both width edges SCI Input Asynclock chronous cycle Synchronous Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Input clock pulse width Symbol tTOCD tTICS tTCKS tTCKWH tTCKWL tSCYC tSCYC tSCKR tSCKF tSCKW Min -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 -- -- 0.4 Max 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.5 0.6 Condition B 10 MHz Min -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 -- -- 0.4 Max 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.5 0.6 Condition C 16 MHz Min -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 -- -- 0.4 Max 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.5 0.6 tSCYC Figure 17-14 tCYC Figure 17-13 Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 17-12 434 Table 17-6 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (cont) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item SCI Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous clock input) Receive data hold time (synchronous clock output) Ports and TPC Output data delay time Input data setup time (synchronous) Input data hold time (synchronous) Symbol tTXD tRXS Min -- 100 Max 100 -- Condition B 10 MHz Min -- 100 Max 100 -- Condition C 16 MHz Min -- 100 Max 100 -- Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 17-15 tRXH 100 -- 100 -- 100 -- tRXH 0 -- 0 -- 0 -- tPWD tPRS -- 50 100 -- -- 50 100 -- -- 50 100 -- ns Figure 17-11 tPRH 50 -- 50 -- 50 -- 435 5V C = 90 pF: ports 5, 6, 8, A19 to A0, D7 to D0, o, AS , RD, WR C = 30 pF: ports 9, A, B R L = 2.4 k R H = 12 k C RH Input/output timing measurement levels * Low: 0.8 V * High: 2.0 V RL H8/3032 Series output pin Figure 17-3 Output Load Circuit 436 17.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 17-7 lists the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 17-7 A/D Converter Characteristics Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 10 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A 8 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signalsource impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Min 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 16.8 20 10*1 5*2 6.0 4.0 4.0 0.5 8.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Min 10 -- -- -- Condition B 10 MHz Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 13.4 20 10*1 5*3 6.0 4.0 4.0 0.5 8.0 Min 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Condition C 16 MHz Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 8.4 20 10*4 5*5 3.0 2.0 2.0 0.5 4.0 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Unit bits s pF k The value is for 4.0 AVCC 5.5. The value is for 2.7 AVCC < 4.0. The value is for 3.0 AVCC < 4.0. The value is for o 12 MHz. The value is for o > 12 MHz. 437 17.3 Operational Timing This section shows timing diagrams. 17.3.1 Bus Timing Bus timing is shown as follows: * Basic bus cycle: two-state access Figure 17-4 shows the timing of the external two-state access cycle. * Basic bus cycle: three-state access Figure 17-5 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle. * Basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state Figure 17-6 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle with one wait state inserted. 438 T1 tcyc tCH o tCF tAD A19 to A 0 tCR tCL T2 tPCH tASD AS tAS1 tPCH tASD RD (read) tAS1 tACC1 D7 to D0 (read) tASD WR (write) tAS1 tWSW1 tWDD D7 to D0 (write) tWDS1 tWDH tSD tAH tRDS tRDH tACC3 tSD tAH tACC3 tSD tAH tPCH Figure 17-4 Basic Bus Cycle: Two-State Access 439 T1 o T2 T3 A19 to A0 tACC4 AS tACC4 RD (read) tACC2 D7 to D0 (read) tWSD WR (write) tAS2 tWDS2 D7 to D0 (write) tWSW2 tRDS Figure 17-5 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access 440 T1 o T2 TW T3 A19 to A0 AS RD (read) D7 to D0 (read) WR (write) D7 to D0 (write) tWTS WAIT tWTH tWTS tWTH Figure 17-6 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access with One Wait State 441 17.3.2 Control Signal Timing Control signal timing is shown as follows: * Reset input timing Figure 17-7 shows the reset input timing. * Reset output timing Figure 17-8 shows the reset output timing. * Interrupt input timing Figure 17-9 shows the input timing for NMI and IRQ4 to IRQ0. o tRESS RES tRESW tRESS Figure 17-7 Reset Input Timing o tRESD RESO tRESOW tRESD Figure 17-8 Reset Output Timing 442 o tNMIS NMI tNMIS IRQ E tNMIS IRQ L IRQ E : Edge-sensitive IRQ I IRQ L : Level-sensitive IRQ I (I = 0 to 4) tNMIW NMI IRQ J (J = 0 to 2) tNMIH tNMIH Figure 17-9 Interrupt Input Timing 443 17.3.3 Clock Timing Clock timing is shown as follows: * Oscillator settling timing Figure 17-10 shows the oscillator settling timing. o VCC STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 Figure 17-10 Oscillator Settling Timing 17.3.4 TPC and I/O Port Timing TPC and I/O port timing is shown as follows. T1 o tPRS Ports 1 to 3, 5, A, and B (read) Ports 1 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, A, and B (write) T2 T3 tPRH tPWD Figure 17-11 TPC and I/O Port Input/Output Timing 444 17.3.5 ITU Timing ITU timing is shown as follows: * ITU input/output timing Figure 17-12 shows the ITU input/output timing. * ITU external clock input timing Figure 17-13 shows the ITU external clock input timing. o tTOCD Output compare*1 tTICS Input capture*2 Notes: 1. TIOCA0 to TIOCA4, TIOCB0 to TIOCB4, TOCXA4, TOCXB4 2. TIOCA0 to TIOCA4, TIOCB0 to TIOCB4 Figure 17-12 ITU Input/Output Timing tTCKS o tTCKS TCLKA to TCLKD tTCKWL tTCKWH Figure 17-13 ITU Clock Input Timing 445 17.3.6 SCI Input/Output Timing SCI timing is shown as follows: * SCI input clock timing Figure 17-14 shows the SCI input clock timing. * SCI input/output timing (synchronous mode) Figure 17-15 shows the SCI input/output timing in synchronous mode. tSCKW SCK tSCKR tSCKR tSCYC Figure 17-14 SCK Input Clock Timing tSCYC SCK tTXD TxD (transmit data) RxD (receive data) tRXS tRXH Figure 17-15 SCI Input/Output Timing in Synchronous Mode 446 Appendix A Instruction Set A.1 Instruction List Operand Notation Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERd ERs ERn (EAd) (EAs) PC SP CCR N Z V C disp + - x / ( ), < > Description General destination register General source register General register General destination register (address register or 32-bit register) General source register (address register or 32-bit register) General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Program counter Stack pointer Condition code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Displacement Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right Addition of the operands on both sides Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left Multiplication of the operands on both sides Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right Logical AND of the operands on both sides Logical OR of the operands on both sides Exclusive logical OR of the operands on both sides NOT (logical complement) Contents of operand Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers (R0 to R7 and E0 to E7). 447 Condition Code Notation Symbol * 0 1 -- Description Changed according to execution result Undetermined (no guaranteed value) Cleared to 0 Set to 1 Not affected by execution of the instruction Varies depending on conditions, described in notes 448 Table A-1 Instruction Set 1. Data transfer instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd Operation #xx:8 Rd8 Rs8 Rd8 @ERs Rd8 @(d:16, ERs) Rd8 @(d:24, ERs) Rd8 @ERs RD8 ERs32+1 ERs32 @aa:8 Rd8 @aa:16 Rd8 @aa:24 Rd8 Rs8 @ERd Rd8 @(d:16, ERd) Rd8 @(d:24, ERd) ERd32-1 ERd32 Rs8 @ERd Rs8 @aa:8 Rs8 @aa:16 Rs8 @aa:24 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C B B B B 2 2 2 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 2 2 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 2 2 4 6 B 8 0-- 10 B 2 0-- 6 MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @ERd B B B B B 2 4 6 2 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 4 6 8 4 6 B 8 0-- 10 B 2 0-- 6 MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.W @ERs+, Rd B B B 2 4 6 4 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 4 6 8 4 2 4 6 W #xx:16 Rd16 W Rs16 Rd16 W @ERs Rd16 W @(d:16, ERs) Rd16 W @(d:24, ERs) Rd16 W @ERs Rd16 ERs32+2 @ERd32 W @aa:16 Rd16 8 0-- 10 2 0-- 6 MOV.W @aa:16, Rd 4 0-- 6 449 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic MOV.W @aa:24, Rd MOV.W Rs, @ERd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @-ERd Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C W @aa:24 Rd16 W Rs16 @ERd W Rs16 @(d:16, ERd) W Rs16 @(d:24, ERd) W ERd32-2 ERd32 Rs16 @ERd W Rs16 @aa:16 W Rs16 @aa:24 L L L L #xx:32 Rd32 ERs32 ERd32 @ERs ERd32 @(d:16, ERs) ERd32 @(d:24, ERs) ERd32 @ERs ERd32 ERs32+4 ERs32 @aa:16 ERd32 @aa:24 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd ERs32 @(d:16, ERd) ERs32 @(d:24, ERd) ERd32-4 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd ERs32 @aa:16 ERs32 @aa:24 4 6 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 2 ---- 4 ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 8 4 6 8 0-- 10 2 0-- 6 MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, Rd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd 4 6 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 6 8 6 2 8 10 L 10 0-- 14 L 4 0-- 10 MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:24, ERd MOV.L ERs, @ERd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd L L L L 6 8 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 10 12 8 10 L 10 0-- 14 L 4 0-- 10 MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 POP.W Rn L L 6 8 0-- 0-- 0-- 10 12 6 W @SP Rn16 SP+2 SP L @SP ERn32 SP+4 SP POP.L ERn 0-- 10 450 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic PUSH.W Rn Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C W SP-2 SP Rn16 @SP L SP-4 SP ERn32 @SP Cannot be used in the H8/3032 Series Cannot be used in the H8/3032 Series 4 2 ---- 4 ---- 0-- 6 PUSH.L ERn 0-- 10 MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16 B Cannot be used in the H8/3032 Series Cannot be used in the H8/3032 Series B 4 2. Arithmetic instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd Operation Rd8+#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8+Rs8 Rd8 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C B B 2 2 4 2 6 -- -- --1 --1 --2 2 2 4 2 6 W Rd16+#xx:16 Rd16 W Rd16+Rs16 Rd16 L ERd32+#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32+ERs32 ERd32 Rd8+#xx:8 +C Rd8 Rd8+Rs8 +C Rd8 ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 ERd32+4 ERd32 Rd8+1 Rd8 ADD.L ERs, ERd L 2 --2 -- 2 ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd ADDX.B Rs, Rd ADDS.L #1, ERd ADDS.L #2, ERd ADDS.L #4, ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1, Rd INC.W #2, Rd B B L L L B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -- ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- -- -- -- W Rd16+1 Rd16 W Rd16+2 Rd16 451 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn TIable A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic INC.L #1, ERd INC.L #2, ERd DAA Rd Operation ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8-Rs8 Rd8 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C L L B 2 2 2 ---- ---- --* -- --1 -- -- *-- 2 2 2 SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd B 2 4 2 6 2 4 2 6 W Rd16-#xx:16 Rd16 W Rd16-Rs16 Rd16 L ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32-ERs32 ERd32 Rd8-#xx:8-C Rd8 Rd8-Rs8-C Rd8 ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 ERd32-4 ERd32 Rd8-1 Rd8 --1 --2 SUB.L ERs, ERd L 2 --2 -- 2 SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd SUBX.B Rs, Rd SUBS.L #1, ERd SUBS.L #2, ERd SUBS.L #4, ERd DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1, Rd DEC.W #2, Rd DEC.L #1, ERd DEC.L #2, ERd DAS.Rd B B L L L B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -- ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --* -- -- -- -- -- *-- W Rd16-1 Rd16 W Rd16-2 Rd16 L L B ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (unsigned multiplication) MULXU. B Rs, Rd B 2 ------------ 14 MULXU. W Rs, ERd W Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (unsigned multiplication) B Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (signed multiplication) 2 ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- 22 MULXS. B Rs, Rd 4 16 MULXS. W Rs, ERd W Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (signed multiplication) B Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (unsigned division) 4 24 DIVXU. B Rs, Rd 2 ----6 7 ---- 14 452 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic DIVXU. W Rs, ERd Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C W ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (unsigned division) B Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (signed division) 2 ----6 7 ---- 22 DIVXS. B Rs, Rd 4 ----8 7 ---- 16 DIVXS. W Rs, ERd W ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (signed division) B B Rd8-#xx:8 Rd8-Rs8 4 2 4 ----8 7 ---- 24 CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd EXTU.W Rd -- 2 -- --1 2 --1 --2 2 2 2 2 2 --2 -- -- -- 2 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 W Rd16-#xx:16 W Rd16-Rs16 L L B ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32-ERs32 0-Rd8 Rd8 6 W 0-Rd16 Rd16 L 0-ERd32 ERd32 W 0 ( ---- 0 0-- EXTU.L ERd 2 ---- 0 ---- ---- 0-- 2 EXTS.W Rd W ( 2 0-- 2 EXTS.L ERd 2 0-- 2 453 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 3. Logic instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd Operation Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C B B 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 W Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 W Rd16Rs16 Rd16 L L B B ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 W Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 W Rd16Rs16 Rd16 L L B B ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 W Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 W Rd16Rs16 Rd16 L L B ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8 Rd8 W Rd16 Rd16 L Rd32 Rd32 454 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 4. Shift instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 0 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 0 2 2 2 0 MSB LSB C 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 2 2 455 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 5. Bit manipulation instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BNOT #xx:3, Rd Operation (#xx:3 of Rd8) 1 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 1 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1 (Rn8 of Rd8) 1 (Rn8 of @ERd) 1 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 1 (#xx:3 of Rd8) 0 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 0 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0 (Rn8 of Rd8) 0 (Rn8 of @ERd) 0 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 0 (#xx:3 of Rd8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) (#xx:3 of @ERd) (#xx:3 of @ERd) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of Rd8) (Rn8 of Rd8) (Rn8 of @ERd) (Rn8 of @ERd) (Rn8 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) Z (#xx:3 of @ERd) Z (#xx:3 of @aa:8) Z (Rn8 of @Rd8) Z (Rn8 of @ERd) Z (Rn8 of @aa:8) Z (#xx:3 of Rd8) C @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 BNOT #xx:3, @ERd B 4 ------------ 8 BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 B 4 ------------ 8 BNOT Rn, Rd B 2 ------------ 2 BNOT Rn, @ERd B 4 ------------ 8 BNOT Rn, @aa:8 B 4 ------------ ------ ---- 8 BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BLD #xx:3, Rd B B B B B B B 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ---------- 456 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) @ERn Condition Code I HN Z V C Mnemonic BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @REd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR #xx:3, Rd BIOR #xx:3, @ERd BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 Operation (#xx:3 of @ERd) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 6 6 2 6 6 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 457 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @aa #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 6. Branching instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:8 BHI d:16 BLS d:8 BLS d:16 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:8 BNE d:16 BEQ d:8 BEQ d:16 BVC d:8 BVC d:16 BVS d:8 BVS d:16 BPL d:8 BPL d:16 BMI d:8 BMI d:16 BGE d:8 BGE d:16 BLT d:8 BLT d:16 BGT d:8 BGT d:16 Operation If condition Always is true then PC PC+d else Never next; CZ=0 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 4 2 4 2 4 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 CZ=1 2 4 C=0 2 4 C=1 2 4 Z=0 2 4 Z=1 2 4 V=0 2 4 V=1 2 4 N=0 2 4 N=1 2 4 NV = 0 2 4 NV = 1 Z (NV) =0 2 4 2 4 458 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic BLE d:8 BLE d:16 Operation If condition is true then PC PC+d else next; Z (NV) =1 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C -- -- 2 4 ------------ ------------ 4 6 JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 BSR d:8 -- PC ERn -- PC aa:24 -- PC @aa:8 -- PC @-SP PC PC+d:8 -- PC @-SP PC PC+d:16 -- PC @-SP PC @ERn -- PC @-SP PC @aa:24 -- PC @-SP PC @aa:8 -- PC @SP+ 2 4 2 2 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 8 6 4 6 10 8 BSR d:16 4 ------------ 8 10 JSR @ERn 2 ------------ 6 JSR @aa:24 4 ------------ 8 10 JSR @@aa:8 2 ------------ 8 12 RTS 2 ------------ 8 10 459 Advanced 8 @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 7. System control instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic TRAPA #x:2 Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C -- PC @-SP CCR @-SP 2 ------------ 14 16 RTE 10 SLEEP ------------ 2 LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC @ERs, CCR LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR LDC @ERs+, CCR 2 2 6 8 W @ERs CCR W @(d:16, ERs) CCR W @(d:24, ERs) CCR W @ERs CCR ERs32+2 ERs32 W @aa:16 CCR W @aa:24 CCR B CCR Rd8 2 10 12 4 8 LDC @aa:16, CCR LDC @aa:24, CCR STC CCR, Rd STC CCR, @ERd STC CCR, @(d:16, ERs) STC CCR, @(d:24, ERs) STC CCR, @-ERs 6 8 8 10 2 6 8 ------------ 4 6 ------------ ------------ W CCR @ERd W CCR @(d:16, ERd) W CCR @(d:24, ERd) W ERd32-2 ERd32 CCR @ERd W CCR @aa:16 W CCR @aa:24 B B B CCR#xx:8 CCR CCR#xx:8 CCR CCR#xx:8 CCR 2 2 2 10 ------------ 12 4 ------------ 8 STC CCR, @aa:16 STC CCR, @aa:24 ANDC #xx:8, CCR ORC #xx:8, CCR XORC #xx:8, CCR NOP 6 8 ------------ ------------ 8 10 2 2 2 2 -- PC PC+2 2 ------------ 460 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont) 8. Block transfer instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ No. of States *1 Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic EEPMOV. B Operation @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C -- if R4L 0 then repeat @R5 @R6 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4L-1 R4L until R4L=0 else next -- if R4 0 then repeat @R5 @R6 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4L-1 R4 until R4=0 else next 4 ------------ 8+ 4n*2 EEPMOV. W 4 ------------ 8+ 4n*2 Notes: 1. The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. For other cases see section A.3, Number of States Required for Execution. 2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. 1 Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. 2 Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. 3 Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. 4 Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value. 5 The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in synchronization with the E clock is variable. 6 Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. 7 Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. 8 Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. 461 Advanced @(d, PC) Implied Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn A.2 Operation Code Maps Table A-2 Operation Code Map (1) Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL 1 Table A.2 (2) 2 STC 3 LDC 4 ORG OR.B 5 XORC XOR.B Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1. 6 ANDC AND.B 7 LDC Table A.2 (2) 8 ADD SUB 9 A B C MOV CMP D E ADDX SUBX F Table A.2 (2) Table A.2 (2) AL AH 0 1 2 3 4 0 NOP Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) (2) (2) BRA BRN BHI BLS BCC RTS OR.W BCS BSR XOR.W BXOR BIXOR BNE RTE AND.W BAND BIAND BEQ TRAPA BST BVC Table A.2 (2) MOV.B BVS BPL JMP BMI BGE BSR MOV BLT BGT JSR BLE 462 5 6 MULXU.B DIVXU.B MULXU.W DIVXU.W BSET 7 BNOT BCLR BTST BOR BIOR BIST BLD Table A.2 Table A.2 MOV.B/W EEPMOV (2) (2) BILD Table A.2 (3) 8 9 A B C D E F ADD ADDX CMP SUBX OR XOR AND MOV Table A-2 Operation Code Map (2) Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL 1 2 3 4 LDC/STC 5 6 7 8 SLEEP 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 (3) BH AH AL 01 0A 0B 0F 10 11 12 13 17 1A 1B 1F 58 79 7A 0 MOV INC ADDS DAA SHLL SHLR ROTXL ROTXR NOT DEC SUBS DAS BRA MOV MOV Table A.2 Table A.2 (3) (3) ADD INC INC ADDS MOV INC INC SHLL SHLR ROTXL ROTXR NOT EXTU EXTU SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR NEG SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR NEG SUB EXTS EXTS 463 DEC DEC SUB CMP.L DEC DEC BRN ADD ADD BHI CMP CMP BLS SUB SUB BCC OR OR BCS XOR XOR BNE AND AND BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Table A-2 Operation Code Map (3) Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte AH AL BH BL CH CL DH DL Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1. C AH ALBH BLCH 01406 01C05 01D05 01F06 7Cr06 * 1 BTST BOR BTST BIOR 7Dr06 * 1 7Dr07 * 1 7Eaa6 * 2 7Eaa7 * 2 7Faa6 * 2 7Faa7 * 2 BSET BSET BNOT BNOT BCLR BIST BCLR BSET BSET BNOT BNOT BCLR BIST BCLR BTST BOR BTST BIOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BXOR BAND BLD BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BXOR BAND BLD MULXS DIVXS MULXS DIVXS OR XOR AND 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F LDC STC LBC STC LDC STC LDC STC 464 7Cr07 * 1 Notes: 1. r is the register designation field. 2. aa is the absolute address field. A.3 Number of States Required for Execution The tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the H8/300H CPU. Table A-3 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. Table A-2 indicates the number of states required per cycle according to the bus size. The number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: Number of states = I x SI + J x SJ + K x SK + L x SL + M x SM + N x SN Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution Examples: Advanced mode, stack located in external address space, on-chip supporting modules accessed with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 16-bit bus width. BSET #0, @FFFFFC7:8 From table A-3, I = L = 2 and J = K = M = N = 0 From table A-2, SI = 4 and SL = 3 Number of states = 2 x 4 + 2 x 3 = 14 JSR @@30 From table A-3, I = J = K = 2 and L = M = N = 0 From table A-2, SI = SJ = SK = 4 Number of states = 2 x 4 + 2 x 4 + 2 x 4 = 24 465 Table A-2 Number of States per Cycle Access Conditions On-Chip Supporting Module Cycle Instruction fetch Branch address read Stack operation Byte data access Word data access Internal operation SI SJ SK SL SM SN 1 3 6 2 4 3+m 6 + 2m On-Chip Memory 2 8-Bit Bus 6 16-Bit Bus 3 External Device 8-Bit Bus 16-Bit Bus 2-State 3-State 2-State 3-State Access Access Access Access 4 6 + 2m 2 3+m Legend m: Number of wait states inserted into external device access 466 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd ADD.L ERs, ERd ADDS #1/2/4, ERd ADDX #xx:8, Rd ADDX Rs, Rd AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd ANDC #xx:8, CCR BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 BGT d:8 BLE d:8 ADDS ADDX AND ANDC BAND Bcc 467 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic Bcc BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:16 BLS d:16 BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:16 BEQ d:16 BVC d:16 BVS d:16 BPL d:16 BMI d:16 BGE d:16 BLT d:16 BGT d:16 BLE d:16 BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR #xx:8, Rd BIOR #xx:8, @ERd BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8 BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BLD #xx:3, Rd BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR BIAND BILD BIOR BIST BIXOR BLD 468 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd BNOT #xx:3, @ERd BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT Rn, Rd BNOT Rn, @ERd BNOT Rn, @aa:8 BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BSR d:8 Normal Advanced BSR d:16 Normal Advanced BST BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @ERd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd DAA Rd DAS Rd BOR BSET BSR BTST BXOR CMP DAA DAS 469 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2n + 2*1 2n + 2*1 12 20 12 20 Instruction Mnemonic DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2, Rd DEC.L #1/2, ERd DIVXS.B Rs, Rd DIVXS.W Rs, ERd DIVXU.B Rs, Rd DIVXU.W Rs, ERd EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2, Rd INC.L #1/2, ERd JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 Normal DIVXS DIVXU EEPMOV EXTS EXTU INC JMP Advanced 2 JSR JSR @ERn Normal 2 Advanced 2 JSR @aa:24 Normal 2 Advanced 2 JSR @@aa:8 Normal 2 Advanced 2 LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC @ERs, CCR LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR LDC @ERs+, CCR LDC @aa:16, CCR LDC @aa:24, CCR 1 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 470 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 4 Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @-ERd MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.W @ERs+, Rd MOV.W @aa:16, Rd MOV.W @aa:24, Rd MOV.W Rs, @ERd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @-ERd MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, ERd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:24, ERd MOV.L ERs, @ERd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 471 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 12 20 12 20 Instruction Mnemonic MOVFPE MOVTPE MULXS MULXU NEG MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*2 2 MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16*2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd ORC #xx:8, CCR POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd RTE NOP NOT OR ORC POP PUSH ROTL 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 ROTR ROTXL ROTXR RTE 2 472 Table A-3 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont) Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N Normal 2 1 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic RTS RTS Advanced 2 SHAL SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd SLEEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SHAR SHLL SHLR SLEEP STC STC CCR, Rd 1 STC CCR, @ERd 2 STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd) 3 STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd) 5 STC CCR, @-ERd 2 STC CCR, @aa:16 3 STC CCR, @aa:24 4 SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd SUB.L ERs, ERd SUBS #1/2/4, ERd SUBX #xx:8, Rd SUBX Rs, Rd TRAPA #x:2 Normal 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SUB SUBS SUBX TRAPA 4 4 Advanced 2 XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd XORC #xx:8, CCR 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 XORC Notes: 1. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. The source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each. 2. Not available in the H8/3032 Series. 473 Appendix B Register Field B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names Data Bus Width Bit Names Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name Address Register (low) Name H'1C H'1D H'1E H'1F H'20 H'21 H'22 H'23 H'24 H'25 H'26 H'27 H'28 H'29 H'2A H'2B H'2C H'2D H'2E H'2F H'30 H'31 H'32 H'33 H'34 H'35 H'36 H'37 H'38 H'39 H'3A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Legend DMAC: DMA controller (Continued on next page) 474 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width Address Register (low) Name H'3B H'3C H'3D H'3E H'3F H'40 H'41 H'42 H'43 H'44 H'45 H'46 H'47 H'48 H'49 H'4A H'4B H'4C H'4D H'4E H'4F H'50 H'51 H'52 H'53 H'54 H'55 H'56 H'57 H'58 H'59 H'5A H'5B H'5C H'5D H'5E H'5F -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit Names Bit 7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module Name (Continued on next page) 475 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 -- -- -- -- -- Address Register (low) Name H'60 H'61 H'62 H'63 H'64 H'65 H'66 H'67 H'68 H'69 H'6A H'6B H'6C H'6D H'6E H'6F H'70 H'71 H'72 H'73 H'74 H'75 H'76 H'77 H'78 H'79 H'7A H'7B H'7C H'7D H'7E H'7F H'80 H'81 TSTR TSNC TMDR TFCR TCR0 TIOR0 TIER0 TSR0 TCNT0H TCNT0L GRA0H GRA0L GRB0H GRB0L TCR1 TIOR1 TIER1 TSR1 TCNT1H TCNT1L GRA1H GRA1L GRB1H GRB1L TCR2 TIOR2 TIER2 TSR2 TCNT2H TCNT2L GRA2H GRA2L GRB2H GRB2L Bit Names Bit 7 -- -- Bit 6 -- -- MDF -- CCLR1 IOB2 -- -- Bit 5 -- -- FDIR CMD1 CCLR0 IOB1 -- -- Bit 4 STR4 Bit 3 STR3 Bit 2 STR2 Bit 1 STR1 Bit 0 STR0 Module Name ITU (all channels) SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 PWM4 CMD0 PWM3 BFB4 PWM2 BFA4 PWM1 BFB3 TPSC1 IOA1 IMIEB IMFB PWM0 BFA3 TPSC0 IOA0 IMIEA IMFA CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 IOB0 -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 OVIE OVF ITU channel 0 16 16 8 8 8 8 16 -- -- -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 -- -- CCLR0 IOB1 -- -- CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 IOB0 -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 OVIE OVF TPSC1 IOA1 IMIEB IMFB TPSC0 IOA0 IMIEA IMFA ITU channel 1 16 16 8 8 8 8 16 -- -- -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 -- -- CCLR0 IOB1 -- -- CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 IOB0 -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 OVIE OVF TPSC1 IOA1 IMIEB IMFB TPSC0 IOA0 IMIEA IMFA ITU channel 2 16 16 Legend ITU: 16-bit integrated timer unit (Continued on next page) 476 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 16 Address Register (low) Name H'82 H'83 H'84 H'85 H'86 H'87 H'88 H'89 H'8A H'8B H'8C H'8D H'8E H'8F H'90 H'91 H'92 H'93 H'94 H'95 H'96 H'97 H'98 H'99 H'9A H'9B H'9C H'9D H'9E H'9F TCR3 TIOR3 TIER3 TSR3 TCNT3H TCNT3L GRA3H GRA3L GRB3H GRB3L BRA3H BRA3L BRB3H BRB3L TOER TOCR TCR4 TIOR4 TIER4 TSR4 TCNT4H TCNT4L GRA4H GRA4L GRB4H GRB4L BRA4H BRA4L BRB4H BRB4L Bit Names Bit 7 -- -- -- -- Bit 6 CCLR1 IOB2 -- -- Bit 5 CCLR0 IOB1 -- -- Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 TPSC1 IOA1 IMIEB IMFB Bit 0 TPSC0 IOA0 IMIEA IMFA Module Name ITU channel 3 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 IOB0 -- -- -- -- -- IOA2 OVIE OVF 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 -- -- EXB4 -- CCLR0 IOB1 -- -- EXA4 XTGD IOB0 -- -- EB3 -- EB4 -- EA4 OLS4 TPSC1 IOA1 IMIEB IMFB EA3 OLS3 TPSC0 IOA0 IMIEA IMFA ITU (all channels) ITU channel 4 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 -- -- -- IOA2 OVIE OVF 16 16 16 16 Legend ITU: 16-bit integrated timer unit (Continued on next page) 477 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'A5 NDRA*1 NDRB*1 NDRA*1 TCSR*2 TCNT*2 -- RSTCSR*3 8 -- -- -- -- SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR -- -- 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 8 8 H'A6 8 8 H'A7 8 8 H'A8 H'A9 H'AA H'AB H'AC H'AD H'AE H'AF H'B0 H'B1 H'B2 H'B3 H'B4 H'B5 H'B6 H'B7 8 8 -- WRST -- -- -- -- C/A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- O/E -- -- -- -- -- -- STOP -- -- -- -- -- -- MP -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS1 -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS0 SCI channel 0 Address Register (low) Name H'A0 H'A1 H'A2 H'A3 H'A4 TPMR TPCR NDERB NDERA NDRB*1 Bit Names Bit 7 -- Bit 6 -- Bit 5 -- Bit 4 -- Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name TPC G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER8 NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 NDER1 NDER0 NDR15 NDR15 NDR7 NDR7 -- -- -- -- OVF NDR14 NDR14 NDR6 NDR6 -- -- -- -- WT/IT NDR13 NDR13 NDR5 NDR5 -- -- -- -- TME NDR12 NDR12 NDR4 NDR4 -- -- -- -- -- NDR11 -- NDR3 -- -- NDR11 -- NDR3 -- NDR10 -- NDR2 -- -- NDR10 -- NDR2 CKS2 NDR9 -- NDR1 -- -- NDR9 -- NDR1 CKS1 NDR8 -- NDR0 -- -- NDR8 -- NDR0 CKS0 WDT RSTOE -- -- -- -- -- CHR -- -- -- -- PE Notes: 1. The address depends on the output trigger setting. 2. For write access to TCSR and TCNT, see section 10.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 3. For write access to RSTCSR, see section 10.2.4, Notes on Register Access. Legend TPC: Programmable timing pattern controller WDT: Watchdog timer SCI: Serial communication interface (Continued on next page) 478 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width Address Register (low) Name H'B8 H'B9 H'BA H'BB H'BC H'BD H'BE H'BF H'C0 H'C1 H'C2 H'C3 H'C4 H'C5 H'C6 H'C7 H'C8 H'C9 H'CA H'CB H'CC H'CD H'CE H'CF H'D0 H'D1 H'D2 H'D3 H'D4 H'D5 H'D6 H'D7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR -- P3DR -- P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR -- P8DDR P7DR P8DR P9DDR PADDR P9DR PADR PBDDR PCDDR PBDR PCDR Bit Names Bit 7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 Module Name 8 8 8 8 8 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR P17 P27 -- P16 P26 -- P36 -- P15 P25 -- P35 -- P14 P24 -- P34 -- P13 P23 -- P33 -- P12 P22 -- P32 -- P11 P21 -- P31 -- P10 P20 -- P30 -- P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR P37 -- 8 Port 3 8 8 8 8 P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR -- P57 -- -- -- P56 -- -- -- P76 -- -- P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR -- P55 P65 -- -- P75 -- -- P54 P64 -- P53 P63 -- P52 -- -- -- P51 -- -- P60DDR P50 P60 -- Port 5 Port 6 Port 5 Port 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- P77 -- -- P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR P74 -- P73 P83 P72 P82 P71 P81 P70 P80 P90DDR P90 PA0 Port 8 Port 7 Port 8 Port 9 Port A Port 9 Port A Port B P94DDR -- P94 PA4 -- PA3 P92DDR -- P92 PA2 -- PA1 PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR -- PA7 -- PA6 -- PA5 PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR PB7 PC7 PB6 PC6 PB5 PC5 PB4 PC4 PB3 PC3 PB2 PC2 PB1 PC1 PB0 PC0 PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR Port C Port B Port C (Continued on next page) 479 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width Address Register (low) Name H'D8 H'D9 H'DA H'DB H'DC H'DD H'DE H'DF H'E0 H'E1 H'E2 H'E3 H'E4 H'E5 H'E6 H'E7 H'E8 H'E9 H'EA H'EB H'EC H'ED H'EE H'EF P2PCR -- -- P5PCR -- -- -- -- ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR -- -- ABWCR ASTCR WCR WCER Bit Names Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name Port 2 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8 -- -- -- -- -- 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 ADF TRGE -- -- 8 8 8 8 ABW7 AST7 -- WCE7 -- -- -- -- -- -- AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE -- -- -- ABW6 AST6 -- WCE6 -- -- -- -- -- -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- ADST -- -- -- ABW5 AST5 -- WCE5 -- -- -- -- -- -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- SCAN -- -- -- ABW4 AST4 -- WCE4 -- -- -- -- P53PCR P52PCR P51PCR P50PCR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- CKS -- -- -- ABW3 AST3 WMS1 WCE3 -- -- -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- CH2 -- -- -- ABW2 AST2 WMS0 WCE2 -- -- -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- CH1 -- -- -- ABW1 AST1 WC1 WCE1 -- -- -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- CH0 -- -- -- ABW0 AST0 WC0 WCE0 Port 5 A/D Bus controller Legend A/D: A/D converter (Continued on next page) 480 (Continued from preceding page) Data Bus Width Address Register (low) Name H'F0 H'F1 H'F2 H'F3 H'F4 H'F5 H'F6 H'F7 H'F8 H'F9 H'FA H'FB H'FC H'FD H'FE H'FF -- MDCR SYSCR -- ISCR IER ISR -- IPRA IPRB -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit Names Bit 7 -- Bit 6 -- -- STS2 -- -- -- -- -- IPRA6 IPRB6 -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 5 -- -- STS1 -- -- -- -- -- IPRA5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- STS0 -- Bit 3 -- -- UE -- Bit 2 -- -- NMIEG -- Bit 1 -- MDS1 -- -- Bit 0 -- MDS0 RAME -- I Interrupt controller System control Module Name 8 8 -- SSBY -- 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC IRQ4E IRQ4F -- IPRA4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- IRQ3E IRQ3F -- IPRA3 IPRB3 -- -- -- -- -- -- IRQ2E IRQ2F -- IPRA2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- IRQ1E IRQ1F -- IPRA1 IPRB1 -- -- -- -- -- -- IRQ0E IRQ0F -- IPRA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8 8 IPRA7 IPRB7 -- -- -- -- -- -- Interrupt controller 481 B.2 Register Descriptions Register acronym Register name Address to which the register is mapped Name of on-chip supporting module TSTR Timer Start Register H'60 ITU (all channels) Bit numbers Bit 7 -- Initial value Read/Write 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 STR4 0 R/W 3 STR3 0 R/W 2 STR2 0 R/W 1 STR1 0 R/W 0 STR0 0 R/W Initial bit values Names of the bits. Dashes (--) indicate reserved bits. Possible types of access R W Read only Write only Counter start 0 0 TCNT0 is halted 1 TCNT0 is counting Counter start 1 0 TCNT1 is halted 1 TCNT1 is counting Counter start 2 0 TCNT2 is halted 1 TCNT2 is counting Counter start 3 0 TCNT3 is halted 1 TCNT3 is counting Counter start 4 0 TCNT4 is halted 1 TCNT4 is counting R/W Read and write Full name of bit Descriptions of bit settings 482 TSTR--Timer Start Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 STR4 0 R/W 3 STR3 0 R/W H'60 2 STR2 0 R/W ITU (all channels) 1 STR1 0 R/W 0 STR0 0 R/W Counter start 0 0 TCNT0 is halted 1 TCNT0 is counting Counter start 1 0 TCNT1 is halted 1 TCNT1 is counting Counter start 2 0 TCNT2 is halted 1 TCNT2 is counting Counter start 3 0 TCNT3 is halted 1 TCNT3 is counting Counter start 4 0 TCNT4 is halted 1 TCNT4 is counting 483 TSNC--Timer Synchro Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 SYNC4 0 R/W 3 SYNC3 0 R/W H'61 2 SYNC2 0 R/W ITU (all channels) 1 SYNC1 0 R/W 0 SYNC0 0 R/W Timer sync 0 0 TCNT0 operates independently 1 TCNT0 is synchronized Timer sync 1 0 TCNT1 operates independently 1 TCNT1 is synchronized Timer sync 2 0 TCNT2 operates independently 1 TCNT2 is synchronized Timer sync 3 0 TCNT3 operates independently 1 TCNT3 is synchronized Timer sync 4 0 TCNT4 operates independently 1 TCNT4 is synchronized 484 TMDR--Timer Mode Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 MDF 0 R/W 5 FDIR 0 R/W 4 PWM4 0 R/W 3 PWM3 0 R/W H'62 2 PWM2 0 R/W ITU (all channels) 1 PWM1 0 R/W 0 PWM0 0 R/W PWM mode 0 0 Channel 0 operates normally 1 Channel 0 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 1 0 Channel 1 operates normally 1 Channel 1 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 2 0 Channel 2 operates normally 1 Channel 2 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 3 0 Channel 3 operates normally 1 Channel 3 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 4 0 Channel 4 operates normally 1 Channel 4 operates in PWM mode Flag direction 0 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows or underflows 1 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows Phase counting mode flag 0 Channel 2 operates normally 1 Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode 485 TFCR--Timer Function Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 CMD1 0 R/W 4 CMD0 0 R/W 3 BFB4 0 R/W H'63 2 BFA4 0 R/W ITU (all channels) 1 BFB3 0 R/W 0 BFA3 0 R/W Buffer mode A3 0 GRA3 operates normally 1 GRA3 is buffered by BRA3 Buffer mode B3 0 GRB3 operates normally 1 GRB3 is buffered by BRB3 Buffer mode A4 0 GRA4 operates normally 1 GRA4 is buffered by BRA4 Buffer mode B4 0 GRB4 operates normally 1 GRB4 is buffered by BRB4 Combination mode 1 and 0 Bit 5 Bit 4 CMD1 CMD0 Operating Mode of Channels 3 and 4 0 0 Channels 3 and 4 operate normally 1 0 1 Channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary PWM mode 1 Channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized PWM mode 486 TCR0--Timer Control Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'64 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W ITU0 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Timer prescaler 2 to 0 Bit 2 Bit 0 Bit 1 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Clock edge 1 and 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 1 1 -- TCNT Clock Source Internal clock: o Internal clock: o/2 Internal clock: o/4 Internal clock: o/8 External clock A: TCLKA input External clock B: TCLKB input External clock C: TCLKC input External clock D: TCLKD input Counted Edges of External Clock Rising edges counted Falling edges counted Both edges counted Counter clear 1 and 0 Bit 6 Bit 5 CCLR1 CCLR0 TCNT Clear Source 0 0 TCNT is not cleared 1 TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture 1 0 TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture 1 Synchronous clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers 487 TIOR0--Timer I/O Control Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'65 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W ITU0 0 IOA0 0 R/W I/O control A2 to A0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 I/O control B2 to B0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 GRA Function GRA is an output compare register GRA is an input capture register No output at compare match 0 output at GRA compare match 1 output at GRA compare match Output toggles at GRA compare match GRA captures rising edge of input GRA captures falling edge of input GRA captures both edges of input GRB Function GRB is an output compare register GRB is an input capture register No output at compare match 0 output at GRB compare match 1 output at GRB compare match Output toggles at GRB compare match GRB captures rising edge of input GRB captures falling edge of input GRB captures both edges of input 488 TIER0--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'66 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W ITU0 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A 0 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is disabled 1 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is enabled Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B 0 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is disabled 1 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is enabled Overflow interrupt enable 0 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled 1 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled 489 TSR0--Timer Status Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'67 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* ITU0 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Input capture/compare match flag A 0 [Clearing condition] Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as a compare match register. TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input capture signal, when GRA functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match flag B 0 [Clearing condition] Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as a compare match register. TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input capture signal, when GRB functions as an input capture register. Overflow flag 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 490 TCNT0 H/L--Timer Counter 0 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 H'68, H'69 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 ITU0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Up-counter GRA0 H/L--General Register A0 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'6A, H'6B 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU0 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register GRB0 H/L--General Register B0 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'6C, H'6D 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU0 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register TCR1--Timer Control Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'6E 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W ITU1 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 491 TIOR1--Timer I/O Control Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'6F 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W ITU1 0 IOA0 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TIER1--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'70 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W ITU1 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TSR1--Timer Status Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'71 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* ITU1 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Notes: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TCNT1 H/L--Timer Counter 1 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 H'72, H'73 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 ITU1 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 492 GRA1 H/L--General Register A1 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'74, H'75 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. GRB1 H/L--General Register B1 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'76, H'77 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TCR2--Timer Control Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'78 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W ITU2 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Notes: 1. Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 2. When channel 2 is used in phase counting mode, the counter clock source selection by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 is ignored. 493 TIOR2--Timer I/O Control Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'79 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W ITU2 0 IOA0 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 494 TIER2--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'7A 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W ITU2 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TSR2--Timer Status Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'7B 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* ITU2 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Overflow flag Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000 or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TCNT2 H/L--Timer Counter 2 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 H'7C, H'7D 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 ITU2 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Phase counting mode: up/down counter Other modes: up-counter 495 GRA2 H/L--General Register A2 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'7E, H'7F 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU2 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. GRB2 H/L--General Register B2 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'80, H'81 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU2 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TCR3--Timer Control Register 3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 CKEG1 0 R/W 3 CLEG0 0 R/W H'82 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W ITU3 0 TPSC0 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TIOR3--Timer I/O Control Register 3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'83 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W ITU3 0 IOA0 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. 496 TIER3--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'84 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W ITU3 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TSR3--Timer Status Register 3 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'85 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* ITU3 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Overflow flag Bit functions are the same as for ITU0 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000 or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TCNT3 H/L--Timer Counter 3 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 H'86, H'87 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 ITU3 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Complementary PWM mode: up/down counter Other modes: up-counter 497 GRA3 H/L--General Register A3 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'88, H'89 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU3 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register (can be buffered) GRB3 H/L--General Register B3 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'8A, H'8B 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU3 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register (can be buffered) BRA3 H/L--Buffer Register A3 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'8C, H'8D 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU3 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Used to buffer GRA BRB3 H/L--Buffer Register B3 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'8E, H'8F 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU3 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Used to buffer GRB 498 TOER--Timer Output Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 EXB4 1 R/W 4 EXA4 1 R/W 3 EB3 1 R/W H'90 2 EB4 1 R/W ITU (all channels) 1 EA4 1 R/W 0 EA3 1 R/W Master enable TIOCA3 0 TIOCA 3 output is disabled regardless of TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings 1 TIOCA 3 is enabled for output according to TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings Master enable TIOCA4 0 TIOCA 4 output is disabled regardless of TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings 1 TIOCA 4 is enabled for output according to TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings Master enable TIOCB4 0 TIOCB4 output is disabled regardless of TIOR4 and TFCR settings 1 TIOCB4 is enabled for output according to TIOR4 and TFCR settings Master enable TIOCB3 0 TIOCB 3 output is disabled regardless of TIOR3 and TFCR settings 1 TIOCB 3 is enabled for output according to TIOR3 and TFCR settings Master enable TOCXA4 0 TOCXA 4 output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings 1 TOCXA 4 is enabled for output according to TFCR settings Master enable TOCXB4 0 TOCXB4 output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings 1 TOCXB4 is enabled for output according to TFCR settings 499 TOCR--Timer Output Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 XTGD 1 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'91 2 -- 1 -- ITU (all channels) 1 OLS4 1 R/W 0 OLS3 1 R/W Output level select 3 0 TIOCB 3 , TOCXA 4 , and TOCXB 4 outputs are inverted 1 TIOCB 3 , TOCXA 4 , and TOCXB 4 outputs are not inverted Output level select 4 0 TIOCA 3 , TIOCA 4, and TIOCB4 outputs are inverted 1 TIOCA 3 , TIOCA 4, and TIOCB4 outputs are not inverted External trigger disable 0 Input capture A in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM mode * 1 External triggering is disabled Note: * When an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in TOER are cleared to 0, disabling ITU output. 500 TCR4--Timer Control Register 4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'92 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W ITU4 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TIOR4--Timer I/O Control Register 4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- H'93 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W ITU4 0 IOA0 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TIER4--Timer Interrupt Enable Register 4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'94 2 OVIE 0 R/W 1 IMIEB 0 R/W ITU4 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. TSR4--Timer Status Register 4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'95 2 OVF 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB 0 R/(W)* ITU4 0 IMFA 0 R/(W)* Notes: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0. * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 501 TCNT4 H/L--Timer Counter 4 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 H'96, H'97 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 ITU4 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3. GRA4 H/L--General Register A4 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'98, H'99 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU4 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3. GRB4 H/L--General Register B4 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'9A, H'9B 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU4 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3. BRA4 H/L--Buffer Register A4 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'9C, H'9D 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU4 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3. 502 BRB4 H/L--Buffer Register B4 H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 H'9E, H'9F 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 ITU4 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3. TPMR--TPC Output Mode Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 R/W H'A0 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 TPC G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV R/W Group 0 non-overlap 0 Normal TPC output in group 0. Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel. 1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel Group 1 non-overlap 0 Normal TPC output in group 1. Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel. 1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel Group 2 non-overlap 0 Normal TPC output in group 2. Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel. 1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel Group 3 non-overlap 0 Normal TPC output in group 3. Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel. 1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel 503 TPCR--TPC Output Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W H'A1 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 TPC G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 R/W Group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 ITU Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 Group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 ITU Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 Group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 5 Bit 4 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 ITU Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 Group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 G3CMS1 G3CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 ITU Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3 504 NDERB--Next Data Enable Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'A2 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W TPC 0 NDER8 0 R/W NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 Next data enable 15 to 8 Bits 7 to 0 NDER15 to NDER8 Description 0 TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB 7 to PB 0 ) TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are enabled 1 (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB 7 to PB 0 ) NDERA--Next Data Enable Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDER7 0 R/W 6 NDER6 0 R/W 5 NDER5 0 R/W 4 NDER4 0 R/W 3 NDER3 0 R/W H'A3 2 NDER2 0 R/W 1 NDER1 0 R/W TPC 0 NDER0 0 R/W Next data enable 7 to 0 Bits 7 to 0 NDER7 to NDER0 Description 0 TPC outputs TP 7 to TP0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA 7 to PA 0) TPC outputs TP 7 to TP0 are enabled 1 (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA 7 to PA 0) 505 NDRB--Next Data Register B * Same output trigger for TPC output groups 2 and 3 H'A4/H'A6 TPC Address H'FFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Next output data for TPC output group 3 Next output data for TPC output group 2 Address H'FFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- * Different output triggers for TPC output groups 2 and 3 Address H'FFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Next output data for TPC output group 3 Address H'FFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Next output data for TPC output group 2 506 NDRA--Next Data Register A * Same output trigger for TPC output groups 0 and 1 H'A5/H'A7 TPC Address H'FFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Next output data for TPC output group 1 Next output data for TPC output group 0 Address H'FFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- * Different output triggers for TPC output groups 0 and 1 Address H'FFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Next output data for TPC output group 1 Address H'FFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Next output data for TPC output group 0 507 TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/ IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'A8 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W WDT 0 CKS0 0 R/W Timer enable 0 Timer disabled * TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted 1 Timer enabled * TCNT is counting * CPU interrupt requests are enabled Timer mode select 0 Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts 1 Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal Overflow flag 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00 Clock select 2 to 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 o/2 o/32 o/64 o/128 o/256 o/512 o/2048 o/4096 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 508 TCNT--Timer Counter H'A9 (read), H'A8 (write) 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W WDT Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Count value RSTCSR--Reset Control/Status Register H'AB (read), H'AA (write) 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- WDT Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 WRST 0 R/(W)* 6 RSTOE 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Reset output enable 0 Reset signal is not output externally 1 Reset signal is output externally Watchdog timer reset 0 [Clearing condition] Reset signal input at RES pin, or 0 written by software 1 [Setting condition] TCNT overflow generates a reset signal Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 509 SMR--Serial Mode Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 C/ A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 7 O/ E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W H'B0 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 SCI CKS0 0 R/W Multiprocessor mode 0 Multiprocessor function disabled 1 Multiprocessor format selected Stop bit length 0 One stop bit 1 Two stop bits Parity mode 0 Even parity 1 Odd parity Parity enable 0 Parity bit is not added or checked 1 Parity bit is added and checked Character length 0 8-bit data 1 7-bit data Communication mode 0 Asynchronous mode 1 Synchronous mode Clock select 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Source 0 0 o clock 1 o/4 clock o/16 clock 0 1 o/64 clock 1 510 BRR--Bit Rate Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W H'B1 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 SCI R/W Serial communication bit rate setting 511 SCR--Serial Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W H'B2 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W SCI 0 CKE0 0 R/W Clock enable 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 CKE1 CKE2 Clock Selection and Output 0 0 Asynchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin available for generic input Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output Asynchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output 1 Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output Asynchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for clock input 1 0 Synchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input Asynchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for clock input 1 Synchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input Transmit-end interrupt enable 0 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled 1 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled Multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) 1 Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled Transmit enable 0 Transmitting is disabled 1 Transmitting is enabled Receive enable 0 Transmitting is disabled 1 Transmitting is enabled Receive interrupt enable 0 Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled 1 Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled Transmit interrupt enable 0 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled 1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled 512 TDR--Transmit Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W H'B3 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 SCI R/W Serial transmit data 513 SSR--Serial Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* H'B4 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R SCI 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor bit 0 Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 1 Transmit end 0 1 Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 Multiprocessor bit transfer 0 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 1 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 [Clearing conditions] Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE. [Setting conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. TE is cleared to 0 in SCR. TDRE is 1 when last bit of serial character is transmitted. Parity error 0 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. Read PER when PER = 1, then write 0 in PER. [Setting condition] Parity error: (parity of receive data does not match parity setting of O/ E in SMR) [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. Read ORER when ORER = 1, then write 0 in ORER. [Setting condition] Overrun error (reception of next serial data ends when RDRF = 1) Framing error 0 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. Read FER when FER = 1, then write 0 in FER. [Setting condition] Framing error (stop bit is 0) 1 1 Overrun error Receive data register full 0 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. Read RDRF when RDRF = 1, then write 0 in RDRF. [Setting condition] Serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR 0 1 1 Transmit data register empty 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE. [Setting conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode. TE is 0 in SCR Data is transferred from TDR to TSR, enabling new data to be written in TDR. Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 514 RDR--Receive Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'B5 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R SCI Serial receive data P1DDR--Port 1 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'C0 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 1 0 0 W P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Port 1 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output P2DDR--Port 2 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'C1 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 2 0 0 W P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Port 2 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output 515 P1DR--Port 1 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P17 0 R/W 6 P16 0 R/W 5 P15 0 R/W 4 P14 0 R/W 3 P13 0 R/W H'C2 2 P12 0 R/W 1 P11 0 R/W Port 1 0 P10 0 R/W Data for port 1 pins P2DR--Port 2 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P27 0 R/W 6 P26 0 R/W 5 P25 0 R/W 4 P24 0 R/W 3 P23 0 R/W H'C3 2 P22 0 R/W 1 P21 0 R/W Port 2 0 P20 0 R/W Data for port 2 pins P3DDR--Port 3 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'C4 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 3 0 0 W P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Port 3 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output 516 P3DR--Port 3 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P37 0 R/W 6 P36 0 R/W 5 P35 0 R/W 4 P34 0 R/W 3 P33 0 R/W H'C6 2 P32 0 R/W 1 P31 0 R/W Port 3 0 P30 0 R/W Data for port 3 pins P5DDR--Port 5 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 W H'C8 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 5 0 0 W P5 3 DDR P5 2 DDR P5 1 DDR P5 0 DDR Port 5 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output 517 P6DDR--Port 6 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'C9 2 -- 0 W 1 -- 0 W Port 6 0 P60DDR 0 W P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR Port 6 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output P5DR--Port 5 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 P5 3 0 R/W H'CA 2 P5 2 0 R/W 1 P5 1 0 R/W Port 5 0 P5 0 0 R/W Data for port 5 pins P6DR--Port 6 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 0 R/W 5 P6 5 0 R/W 4 P6 4 0 R/W 3 P6 3 0 R/W H'CB 2 -- 0 R/W 1 -- 0 R/W Port 6 0 P6 0 0 R/W Data for port 6 pins 518 P8DDR--Port 8 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 0 W 3 0 W H'CD 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 8 0 0 W P8 4 DDR P8 3 DDR P8 2 DDR P8 1 DDR P8 0 DDR Port 8 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output P7DR--Port 7 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77 --* R 6 P76 --* R 5 P75 --* R 4 P74 --* R 3 P73 --* R H'CE 2 P72 --* R 1 P71 --* R Port 7 0 P70 --* R Data for port 7 pins Note: * Determined by pins P7 7 to P7 0 . P8DR--Port 8 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 R/W 3 P8 3 0 R/W H'CF 2 P8 2 0 R/W 1 P8 1 0 R/W Port 8 0 P8 0 0 R/W Data for port 8 pins 519 P9DDR--Port 9 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 W 4 P9 4 DDR 0 W 3 -- 0 W H'D0 2 P9 2 DDR 0 W 1 -- 0 W Port 9 0 P9 0 DDR 0 W Port 9 input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output PADDR--Port A Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'D1 2 0 W 1 0 W Port A 0 0 W PA7 DDR PA6 DDR PA5 DDR PA4 DDR PA3 DDR PA2 DDR PA1 DDR PA0 DDR Port A input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output P9DR--Port 9 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 R/W 4 P9 4 0 R/W 3 -- 0 R/W H'D2 2 P9 2 0 R/W 1 -- 0 R/W Port 9 0 P9 0 0 R/W Data for port 9 pins 520 PADR--Port A Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PA 7 0 R/W 6 PA 6 0 R/W 5 PA 5 0 R/W 4 PA 4 0 R/W 3 PA 3 0 R/W H'D3 2 PA 2 0 R/W 1 PA 1 0 R/W Port A 0 PA 0 0 R/W Data for port A pins PBDDR--Port B Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W H'D4 2 0 W 1 0 W Port B 0 0 W PB7 DDR PB6 DDR PB5 DDR PB4 DDR PB3 DDR PB2 DDR PB1 DDR PB0 DDR Port B input/output select 0 Generic input 1 Generic output PBDR--Port B Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PB 7 0 R/W 6 PB 6 0 R/W 5 PB 5 0 R/W 4 PB 4 0 R/W 3 PB 3 0 R/W H'D6 2 PB 2 0 R/W 1 PB 1 0 R/W Port B 0 PB 0 0 R/W Data for port B pins 521 P2PCR--Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'D8 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W Port 2 0 0 R/W P2 7 PCR P2 6 PCR P2 5 PCR P2 4 PCR P2 3 PCR P2 2 PCR P2 1 PCR P2 0 PCR Port 2 input pull-up control 7 to 0 0 Input pull-up transistor is off 1 Input pull-up transistor is on Note: Valid when the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). P5PCR--Port 5 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 0 R/W H'DB 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W Port 5 0 0 R/W P5 3 PCR P5 2 PCR P5 1 PCR P5 0 PCR Port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 0 Input pull-up transistor is off 1 Input pull-up transistor is on Note: Valid when the corresponding P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). ADDRA H/L--A/D Data Register A H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R H'E0, H'E1 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R A/D 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- ADDRAH A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRAL 522 ADDRB H/L--A/D Data Register B H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R H'E2, H'E3 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R A/D 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- ADDRBH A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRBL ADDRC H/L--A/D Data Register C H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R H'E4, H'E5 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R A/D 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- ADDRCH A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRCL ADDRD H/L--A/D Data Register D H/L Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R H'E6, H'E7 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R A/D 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- ADDRDH A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRDL 523 ADCR--A/D Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TRGE 0 R/W 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- H'E9 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- A/D Trigger enable 0 A/D conversion cannot be externally triggered 1 A/D conversion starts at the fall of the external trigger signal (ADTRG ) 524 ADCSR--A/D Control/Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ADF 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W H'E8 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W 0 A/D CH0 0 R/W Clock select 0 Conversion time = 266 states (maximum) 1 Conversion time = 134 states (maximum) Channel select 2 to 0 Channel Group Selection Selection CH2 CH1 CH0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Scan mode 0 Single mode 1 Scan mode Description Single Mode Scan Mode AN 0 AN 0 AN 1 AN 0, AN 1 AN 2 AN 0 to AN 2 AN 3 AN 0 to AN 3 AN 4 AN 4 AN 5 AN 4, AN 5 AN 6 AN 4 to AN 6 AN 7 AN 4 to AN 7 A/D start 0 A/D conversion is stopped 1 Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode A/D interrupt enable 0 A/D end interrupt request is disabled 1 A/D end interrupt request is enabled A/D end flag 0 [Clearing condition] Read ADF while ADF = 1, then write 0 in ADF 1 [Setting conditions] Single mode: A/D conversion ends Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear flag. 525 ASTCR--Access State Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 AST7 1 R/W 6 AST6 1 R/W 5 AST5 1 R/W 4 AST4 1 R/W 3 AST3 1 R/W H'ED 2 AST2 1 R/W 1 Bus controller 0 AST0 1 R/W AST1 1 R/W Area 7 to 0 access state control Bits 7 to 0 AST7 to AST0 Number of States in Access Cycle 0 Areas 7 to 0 are two-state access areas Areas 7 to 0 are three-state access areas 1 WCR--Wait Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 WMS1 0 R/W H'EE 2 WMS0 0 R/W 1 Bus controller 0 WC0 1 R/W WC1 1 R/W Wait mode select 1 and 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 WMS1 WMS0 Wait Mode 0 0 Programmable wait mode 1 No wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 0 1 Pin wait mode Pin auto-wait mode Wait count 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 WC1 WC0 Number of Wait States 0 0 No wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 1 0 1 1 state inserted 2 states inserted 3 states inserted 526 WCER--Wait Controller Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 WCE7 1 R/W 6 WCE6 1 R/W 5 WCE5 1 R/W 4 WCE4 1 R/W 3 WCE3 1 R/W H'EF 2 WCE2 1 R/W Bus controller 1 WCE1 1 R/W 0 WCE0 1 R/W Wait state controller enable 7 to 0 0 Wait-state control is disabled (pin wait mode 0) 1 Wait-state control is enabled MDCR--Mode Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- H'F1 2 -- 1 -- System control 1 MDS1 --* R 0 MDS0 --* R Mode select 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 MD1 MD0 Operating mode 0 -- 0 Mode 1 1 Mode 2 0 1 Mode 3 1 Note: * Determined by the state of the mode pins (MD 1 and MD0 ). 527 SYSCR--System Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W H'F2 2 NMIEG 0 R/W System control 1 -- 1 -- 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled NMI edge select 0 An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI 1 An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI User bit enable 0 CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as an interrupt mask bit 1 CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as a user bit Standby timer select 2 to 0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Timer 0 0 0 Waiting time = 8192 states 1 Waiting time = 16384 states 0 Waiting time = 32768 states 1 1 Waiting time = 65536 states Waiting time = 131072 states 0 -- 1 -- Illegal setting 1 Software standby 0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode 1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode 528 ISCR--IRQ Sense Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/W 6 -- 0 R/W 5 -- 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W H'F4 2 0 Interrupt controller 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC R/W IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 sense control 0 Interrupts are requested when IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 inputs are low 1 Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ 4 to IRQ0 IER--IRQ Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/(W) 6 -- 0 R/(W) 5 -- 0 R/(W) 4 IRQ4E 0 R/(W) 3 H'F5 2 Interrupt controller 1 IRQ1E 0 R/(W) 0 IRQ0E 0 R/(W) IRQ3E 0 R/(W) IRQ2E 0 R/(W) IRQ4 to IRQ 0 enable 0 IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 interrupts are disabled 1 IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 interrupts are enabled 529 ISR--IRQ Status Register -- Initial value Read/Write 0 -- -- 0 -- -- 0 -- IRQ4F 0 R/(W)* IRQ3F 0 H'F6 Interrupt controller IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* IRQ 4 to IRQ 0 flags Bits 4 to 0 IRQ4F to IRQ0F 0 Setting and Clearing Conditions [Clearing conditions] Read IRQnF when IRQnF = 1, then write 0 in IRQnF. IRQnSC = 0, IRQn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is carried out. [Setting conditions] IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn input changes from high to low. (n = 4 to 0) Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 1 530 IPRA--Interrupt Priority Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRA7 0 R/W 6 IPRA6 0 R/W 5 IPRA5 0 R/W 4 IPRA4 0 R/W 3 IPRA3 0 R/W H'F8 2 Interrupt controller 1 IPRA1 0 R/W 0 IPRA0 0 R/W IPRA2 0 R/W Priority level A7 to A0 0 Priority level 0 (low priority) 1 Priority level 1 (high priority) * Interrupt sources controlled by each bit Bit 7 IPRA7 Interrupt source IRQ0 Bit 6 IPRA6 IRQ1 Bit 5 IPRA5 IRQ2, IRQ3 Bit 4 IPRA4 IRQ4 Bit 3 IPRA3 WDT Bit 2 IPRA2 ITU channel 0 Bit 1 IPRA1 ITU channel 1 Bit 0 IPRA0 ITU channel 2 IPRB--Interrupt Priority Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRB7 0 R/W 6 IPRB6 0 R/W 5 -- 0 R/W 4 -- 0 R/W 3 IPRB3 0 R/W H'F9 2 -- 0 R/W Interrupt controller 1 IPRB1 0 R/W 0 -- 0 R/W Priority level B7, B6, B3, and B1 0 Priority level 0 (low priority) 1 Priority level 1 (high priority) * Interrupt sources controlled by each bit Bit 7 IPRB7 Interrupt source ITU channel 3 Bit 6 IPRB6 ITU channel 4 Bit 5 -- -- Bit 4 -- -- Bit 3 IPRB3 SCI channel Bit 2 -- -- Bit 1 IPRB1 A/D converter Bit 0 -- -- 531 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram Internal data bus (upper) Mode 1/2/3 Reset R Q D P1nDDR C WP1D Mode 2/3 Reset R P1n Q D P1nDDR C Mode 1 WP1 * RP1 WP1D: Write to P1DDR WP1: Write to port 1 RP1: Read port 1 n = 0 to 7 Set priority *: Figure C-1 Port 1 Block Diagram 532 Internal data bus (lower) Software standby Mode 2/3 Hardware standby C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram Reset Internal data bus (upper) * Q Software standby Mode 2/3 Hardware standby RP2P Mode 1/2/3 D P2nPCR C WP2P Reset R Q D P2nDDR C Mode 2/3 WP2D Reset R P2n Q P2nDR C Mode 1 WP2 D Internal data bus (lower) R RP2 WP2P: Write to P2PCR RP2P: Read P2PCR WP2D: Write to P2DDR WP2: Write to port 2 RP2: Read port 2 n = 0 to 7 Set priority *: Figure C-2 Port 2 Block Diagram 533 C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram Internal data bus (upper) Reset Hardware standby Mode 2/3 Write to external address R Q D P3nDDR C WP3D Reset Mode 2/3 P3n Q R P3nDR C Mode 1 WP3 D RP3 Read external address WP3D: Write to P3DDR WP3: Write to port 3 RP3: Read port 3 n = 0 to 7 Figure C-3 Port 3 Block Diagram 534 Internal data bus (lower) C.4 Port 5 Block Diagram Reset Internal data bus (upper) * Q Software standby Mode 2/3 Hardware standby RP5P D P5nPCR C WP5P Mode 1 to mode 3 Reset R Q D P5nDDR C Mode 2/3 WP5D Reset R P5n Q P5nDR C Mode 1 WP5 D Internal data bus (lower) R RP5 WP5P: Write to P5PCR RP5P: Read P5PC4 WP5D: Write to P5DDR WP5: Write to port 5 RP5: Read port 5 n = 0 to 3 Set priority *: Figure C-4 Port 5 Block Diagram 535 C.5 Port 6 Block Diagram R Q D P60DDR Mode 2/3 C WP6D Reset R P60 Q P60DR C WP6 D Internal data bus Reset Bus controller WAIT input enable RP6 Bus controller WAIT input WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C-5 (a) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P60) 536 Software standby Mode 2/3 Hardware standby Reset Q D P6nDDR C WP6D Reset Mode 2/3 P6n Q Mode 1 R P6nDR C WP6 AS output RD output WR output D Internal data bus R RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 n = 5 to 3 Figure C-5 (b) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P61 to P63) 537 C.6 Port 7 Block Diagram Internal data bus A/D converter Input enable Analog input RP7: Read port 7 n = 0 to 7 RP7 P7n Figure C-6 (a) Port 7 Block Diagram 538 C.7 Port 8 Block Diagram Reset Q D P80DDR C WP8D Reset R P80 Q P80DR C WP8 D Internal data bus Interrupt controller IRQ0 input WP8D: Write to P8DDR WP8: Write to port 8 RP8: Read port 8 R RP8 Figure C-7 Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80) 539 C.8 Port 9 Block Diagram Reset R Q D P90DDR C WP9D Reset R P90 Q P90DR C WP9 Output enable Serial data D SCI Internal data bus RP9 WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C-8 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P90) 540 R Q D P92DDR C WP9D Reset R P92 Q P92DR C WP9 D Internal data bus Reset SCI Input enable RP9 Serial data WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C-8 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P92, P93) 541 Reset R Q D P94DDR C WP9D Reset R P94 Q P94DR C WP9 Clock output enable Clock output D Internal data bus SCI Clock input enable RP9 Clock input WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 n = 4, 5 Interrupt controller IRQ4 input Figure C-8 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P94) 542 C.9 Port A Block Diagram Internal data bus WPA Output trigger Reset R Q D PAnDDR C WPAD Reset R PAn Q PAnDR C D TPC TPC output enable Next data ITU RPA Counter input clock WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A n = 0, 1 Figure C-9 (a) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA0, PA1) 543 Reset R Q D PAnDDR C WPAD Reset R PAn Q PAnDR C WPA D Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger ITC Output enable Compare match output Input capture input Counter input clock RPA WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A n = 2, 3 Figure C-9 (b) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA2, PA3) 544 R Q D PAnDDR C WPAD Reset R PAn Q PAnDR C WPA D Internal data bus Reset TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger ITU Output enable Compare match input RPA Input capture input WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A n = 4 to 7 Figure C-9 (c) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA4, PA7) 545 C.10 Port B Block Diagram Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data WPB Output trigger ITC Output enable Compare match output Input capture input WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B n = 0 to 3 Reset R Q D PBnDDR C WPBD Reset R PBn Q PBnDR C D RPB Figure C-10 (a) Port B Block Diagram (Pins PB0 to PB3) 546 Reset R Q D PBnDDR C WPBD Reset R PBn Q PBnDR C WPB D Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger ITU Output enable Compare match output RPB WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B n = 4 to 5 Figure C-10 (b) Port B Block Diagram (Pins PB4, PB5) 547 Reset R Q D PB6DDR C WPBD Reset R PB6 Q PB6DR C WPB D Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger RPB WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B Figure C-10 (c) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB6) 548 Reset R Q D PB7DDR C WPBD Reset R PB7 Q PB7DR C WPB D Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger A/D converter ADTRG input RPB WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B Figure C-10 (d) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB7) 549 Appendix D Pin States D.1 Port States in Each Mode Table D-1 Port States Pin Name o P17 to P10 Reset State T -- 2, 3 P27 to P20 1 T T -- 2, 3 P37 to P30 P53 to P50 1 2, 3 1 T T T T -- 2, 3 P60 1 WAIT pin Generic I/O pin 2, 3 P65 to P63 1 2, 3 T -- T T H T Hardware Software Standby Standby Mode Mode H keep T keep keep T keep T keep keep T keep T T T T keep T -- T T -- T T T T -- T -- T T T T Sleep Mode keep keep keep keep keep keep T keep keep keep keep T T T H keep Program Execution Sleep Mode Input port (DDR = 0) A7 to A0 (DDR = 1) I/O port Input port (DDR = 0) A15 to A8 (DDR = 1) I/O port D7 to D0 I/O port Input port (DDR = 0) A19 to A16 (DDR = 1) I/O port WAIT I/O port I/O port WR, RD, AS I/O port Mode -- 1 Clock output T Clock output Clock output Legend H: High L: Low T: High-impedance state keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. DDR: Data direction register bit 550 Table D-1 Port States (cont) Pin Name P77 to P70 P83 to P80 P94, P92, P90 PA7 to PA0 PB7 to PB0 Reset State T T T T T Hardware Software Standby Standby Mode Mode T T T T T T keep keep keep keep Sleep Mode T keep keep keep keep Program Execution Sleep Mode Input port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port Mode 1 to 3 1 to 3 1 to 3 1 to 3 1 to 3 Legend H: High L: Low T: High-impedance state keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. DDR: Data direction register bit 551 D.2 Pin States at Reset Reset in T1 State: Figure D-1 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the T1 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, and WR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of RES is sampled. Sampling of RES takes place at the fall of the system clock (o). Access to external address T1 o T2 T3 RES Internal reset signal Address bus (mode 1) AS (mode 1) High RD (read access) (mode 1) H'000000 High WR (write access) (mode 1) High Data bus (write access) (mode 1) I/O port (modes 1 to 3) High impedance High impedance Figure D-1 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T1 State) 552 Reset in T2 State: Figure D-2 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the T2 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, and WR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of RES is sampled. The same timing applies when a reset occurs during a wait state (TW). Access to external address T1 o T2 T3 RES Internal reset signal Address bus (mode 1) AS (mode 1) H'000000 RD (read access) (mode 1) WR (write access) (mode 1) Data bus (write access) (mode 1) I/O port (modes 1 to 3) High impedance High impedance Figure D-2 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T2 State) 553 Reset in T3 State: Figure D-3 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the T3 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, and WR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. The address bus outputs are held during the T3 state.The same timing applies when a reset occurs in the T2 state of an access cycle to a two-state-access area. Access to external address T1 o T2 T3 RES Internal reset signal Address bus (mode 1) AS (mode 1) H'000000 RD (read access) (mode 1) WR (write access) (mode 1) Data bus (write access) (mode 1) I/O port (modes 1 to 3) High impedance High impedance Figure D-3 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T3 State) 554 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode (1) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR, drive the RES signal low 10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown below. RES must remain low until STBY goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns). STBY t1 10tcyc RES t2 0 ns (2) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1). Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode: Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns before STBY goes high. STBY t = 100 ns RES tOSC 555 Appendix F Package Dimensions Figure F-1 shows the FP-80A package dimensions of the H8/3032 Series, and figure F-2 shows the TFP-80C package dimensions. Unit: mm 17.2 0.3 14.0 60 61 17.2 0.3 41 40 0.65 80 1 0.30 0.10 21 20 +0.20 -0.16 0.12 M 3.05 Max +0.08 -0.05 2.70 1.60 0.17 0-5 0.10 0.10 0.80 0.30 Figure F-1 Package Dimensions (FP-80A) Unit: mm 14.0 0.2 12.0 60 61 14.0 0.2 41 40 0.50 80 1 0.20 0.05 20 0.10 M 1.20 Max 0.17 0.05 21 1.00 0 - 5 0.10 0.50 0.10 Figure F-2 Package Dimensions (TFP-80C) 0.00 Min 0.20 Max 556 |
Price & Availability of HD6433030F
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |